Home

Scrivener 2.0

1. 10 2 Keywords HUD 10 3 Naming Text Highlights 11 Gathering Material 110 FUelMPort sesser a 11 2 Scrivener Services 11 3 Scratch Pad Panel 12 Project Planning 12 1 The Corkboard 12 2 The Outliner and the BOE ddan eh ob 3 12 3 Project Notes ossu siss 12 4 Capturing Ideas with Scratch Pad ss onnaa 12 5 CustomIcons 13 Cloud Integration and Sharing 13 1 13 2 13 3 ii Simplenote ow o n Synchronised Folders SimpleText w8 36 37 37 38 38 42 46 46 50 51 55 58 58 59 60 61 61 66 67 68 68 73 74 77 77 80 82 83 83 87 87 87 87 88 88 96 104 CONTENTS 13 4 Index Card for iPad II Writing 14 Writing and Editing 14 1 Rich Text Editing Philos OPi eeoa aah ee aoe 14 2 Editing Basics 14 3 Editing with Scrivener 14 4 Formatting Tools 14 5 Searching and Replacing 14 6 Header Bates occs ssw 147 Footer Bat dus oases 14 8 Viewing Media in the Ed WOOF in dade nae ee ee 14 9 Splitting the Editor 14 10 Using Snapshots 14 11 Auto Completion 14 12 Text Bookmarks 14 13 Editing Multiple Docu ments Scrivenings View 14 14 Goals and Statistics Tracking Tools 15 Full Screen 15 1 15 2 153 15 4 15 5 Using a Background Image Full Screen HUD Full Screen Inspector HUD Customising Full Screen Appearance Using Full Screen with Multiple Displays 16 Annot
2. Note on RTFD Support Since the two applications for which RTFD format is recommended do not support these RTF features anyway it often better to use RTFD with them as they will benefit from a few extra features that would otherwise be dropped RTFD will flatten some of the features it does not support such as annotations and footnotes Not included in the table are basic formatting features Most word processors sup port these with only a few exceptions as listed below if the word processor is listed next to the formatting feature it does not support it Text Highlights OpenOffice org Background colour OpenOffice org Nisus Writer Pro Mellel Papyrus Custom underline styles dotted dashed etc Nisus Writer Pro Papyrus Kerning Mellel Note on Exporting to Word doc Format Because RTF is preferred the Word doc exporter uses RTF internally meaning that doc files exported from Scrivener are essentially just renamed RTF files which will open in Word by default This is useful when you need to send doc files to someone who is not aware that Word fully supports RTF If you require native doc support then you should adjust the application preferences in the Import amp Export tab section B 9 for Microsoft doc export This will force the export process to use Apple s more basic exporter which will produce a native doc file but at the expense of dropped features and 218 CHAPTER 25 COMPILIN
3. Whenever you import a script from Final Draft into Scrivener all of its elements will use the formatting specified in Scrivener s script settings These can be set up by selecting Script Settings from the Scriptwriting submenu of the Text menu The Script Settings panel should be familiar to anyone who uses Final Draft as it is set up to be very similar allowing users to create custom script formats Because a Scrivener project comprises multiple documents it is important that the script settings are set up as the user desires before importing or creating any script documents in the project If you are writing a screenplay using standard formatting you don t really need to do anything here However if you are using a custom format or if you have an FDX script that uses a custom format which you wish to retain after import into Scrivener you need to set up Scrivener to use that custom format first Fortunately this is very easy to do as Scrivener can read the formatting directly from an FDX file but you must do this before importing the script itself Remem ber Scrivener can hold many different script documents but can only use one script format in a project at a time this is why setting up the format must be done separately from importing a script To import the formatting from an FDX file Open the Script Settings panel by going to Text gt Scriptwriting gt Script Settings In the Script Settings panel clic
4. 12 1 5 Freeform Corkboard Material not finished 12 2 THE OUTLINER AND THE BINDER 87 Commit Order Material not finished 12 1 6 Stacked Corkboards Material not finished 12 2 The Outliner and the Binder Material not finished 12 3 Project Notes Material not finished 12 4 Capturing Ideas with Scratch Pad The Scratch Pad is a floating window which can be called up or dismissed with 38 gt or the Window Show Hide Scratch Pad menu command Read more about the Scratch Pad Panel section 11 3 12 5 Custom Icons Material not finished Chapter 13 Cloud Integration and Sharing It is becoming increasingly important to have the ability to make your work instantly available everywhere you go no matter what device you might currently be using Sharing files amongst a circle of colleagues proofers and editors is also becoming common In conjunction with the Simplenote network you can distribute copies of text items from your binder to your note network and access them from anywhere using portable devices or other Simplenote aware applications In addition a gener alised tool using simple files and folders has been provided which can be integrated with file sharing services such as DropBox Synchronization should always be done with care no matter what method you use Computers will always do exactly what we tell them to do even if the outcome wasn t what our original intention was Whenever usin
5. And typically going to the very end of the XML file Pasting the entire XML file will likely produce an invalid e book An iTunes compatible cover graphic will not be produced when using SVG covers 25 3 11 Meta Data Meta data is used to add properties to your manuscript which many applications will display in a document properties viewer and with some formats will be used to add searchable criteria to the Spotlight database There are three primary meta data interfaces available to different formats The general meta data interface will appear for all formats which support the standard set of property fields such as RTF amp RTFD the word processor formats and HTML amp WebArchive The other two meta data panes will only appear along with the specific formats they have been tailored for MultiMarkdown and ePub Since with the exception of MultiMarkdown meta data is not meant to appear in the content of the manuscript itself none of the plain text formats or any formats that do not support auxiliary properties will show the Meta Data pane 25 3 OPTION PANES 211 Title Pale Fire Author Vladimir Nabokov Subject Fiction Company Copyright Keywords fiction english classic Comments Background Figure 25 10 Compile Meta Data General General With the exception of the Keywords field the provided fields are all free form though keep in mind that in some cases like S
6. Enter Dialogue The cursor is at the end of the character name This tells us that if we hit the Tab key we will be able to start typing a transition if we hit enter we can start typing our dialogue The scene elements menu can be quickly and easily accessed from the keyboard so that your fingers do not have to leave the keys for the mouse hit cmd Y to bring up the menu and then hit the letter or key combination associated with the script element you want to use for instance c for Character or p for Parenthetical Auto completion is available for some elements Upon choosing Scene Heading for instance you can start typing and then hit cmd period or option Escape to choose from a list of INT EXT and so forth auto completion can also be set to display a list of options automatically without the need for hitting cmd period or option Escape see below Note on US Stageplay format After selecting the Set Description element in Stageplay US mode you will need to hit tab to move the cursor to the correct indent This way you can type SETTING or AT RISE and so on before hitting tab if you require descriptive words set at the left margin The US Stageplay format will only be available if you installed it using the Extras installer that comes with Scrivener 19 2 Creating Your Own Script Formats Scrivener comes with Screenplay format mode built in You can also install several other f
7. You can make the text in the text editor bigger or smaller without changing the font by using the text scaling pop up in the left side of the footer bar See Scaling Text subsection 14 3 1 for more information 14 8 VIEWING MEDIA IN THE EDITOR 133 14 7 2 Quick Text Statistics In the middle of the footer the current word and character account of the text you are editing will be displayed in real time as you type This counter works for all visible text even if it would otherwise not be compiled and will aggregate all text together when using Scrivenings view This counter will also display the statistics for the current text selection if one exists When the counter is displaying selected text the colour will turn blue to indicate that it is no longer counting the entire document s text Pro Tip If you want to easy grab the word count for the current section you are working on within a Scrivenings session you can use the selection counting fea ture mentioned above in conjunction with the Edit Select Current Text command which can be enabled by holding down the Option key or pressing 38 A This will quickly select only the text of the current section you are editing showing the word and character count in the footer 14 7 3 Text Goals When you are editing a single document a small target icon will appear on the right side of the footer bar This button brings up the target options for the document which will let you set a
8. 264 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES 3 Custom Lets you type in a custom separator Some default common examples have been provided If you wish to insert carriage returns use Return to do so The four different types of selections you can separate are as follows 1 Merged Documents Determines how documents will be merged when using the Merge command from the Documents menu Note that this setting only affects the main text the notes of merged documents will always be separated by a double newline 2 Append clippings service When using the global Append Clipping Scrivener service clippings will be separated from any existing text by this option 3 Append selection When selecting text and using the Edit Append Selection to Document command the selection will be separated from the existing text by this option 4 Scratch pad notes When appending text to documents from the scratch pad incoming text will be separated from existing text by this option B 1 4 Scratch Pad Hot key Sets the global hot key for showing or hiding the Scratch Pad Since this key will be accessible from any application on your Mac it would be wise to choose something that would likely not conflict with any other hot keys in other applications Notes location In Scrivener 2 your scratch pad notes are now stored on the hard drive using RTF files This option lets you choose the location for where those files will be automatically saved By default they w
9. Documents Include documents that have been marked as Include in Draft in their meta data This option can be combined with the below Search Excluded Documents Include documents that have not been marked as Include in Draft in their meta data This option can be com bined with the above Case Sensitive By default the search engine ignores letter case If you need to search for proper nouns and are getting a lot of false positives this option can help Save Search Creates a special Saved Search Result Collections subsection 8 3 4 which will keep itself dynamically updated whenever you view them 14 5 4 Project Replace The menu command Edit gt Find Project Replace provides the ability to replace text throughout the entire project Set the text to find the text with which to replace it whether the search should be case sensitive or apply to whole words only and specify what should be affected by the replace any combination of text titles notes syn opses and snapshots Note that a Project Replace cannot be undone except by using swap to exchange the search term for the replacement text and repeating the Replace All operation which in some cases might have unexpected results A progress bar at the bottom of the sheet shows you the progress of the replacement operation bear in mind that it could take a little while on large projects As with all tools that make widespread changes in a
10. Draft b EF Research gt H Trash Figure 8 1 The three default root folders may have parts and chapters or you may have separate files for each scene within each chapter or even separate files for each individual paragraph if you so wish Everything that goes inside the Draft folder will be compiled into one long text file when you use Compile Draft from the File menu excepting documents that have their Include in Draft setting unchecked Thus the Draft folder is central to Scrivener ultimately you are aiming to complete and arrange everything inside the Draft folder so that each of the elements it contains form an organic whole that can then be output as a single manuscript file Because the Draft folder is what is used to create the final manuscript it is unique in that it can only contain text and folder files The Research Folder The Research folder is the default folder for non text documents such as images PDF files and so on although it can hold text files too You can create as many subfolders as you wish to organise your research or you can rename it and create other folders in the root to hold different types of research The Trash Folder Whenever you delete a file in Scrivener by hitting the 38 Delete for instance or by selecting the Edit Delete menu item the file is not actually removed from the project but is instead moved to the Trash folder You can tell at a glance if the Trash folder has anything
11. is not and if this option is selected then only documents that are contained in the Draft folder and in the specified collection will be synced Use file numbering By default Scrivener will prefix each filename with a numeral corresponding to its position in the binder This will keep your files in the same order as the binder making them easier to find Disabling this will remove the number and the contents of the folder will be subject to ordinary alphanumeric sorting based on the names of your binder items Take snapshots of affected documents before updating Enabled by default With this option turned on Scrivener will automatically generate snapshots of each document if it requires updating If you prefer to handle snapshots manually you may want to turn this off However be aware that leaving it on is the safest option particularly when both items have been accidentally edited separately Since Scrivener cannot determine which is meant to be the most up to date other than by the file modification date having snapshots available will allow you to review the specific changes and decide how to manage conflicts should they occur 13 2 SYNCHRONISED FOLDERS 99 Check for changes in external folder on project open Enabled by default When this project is opened it will briefly scan the contents of the external sync folder and alert you if there are any changes detected offering you the ability to update your project immediately The
12. it will be stored on your device for perusal at any time Note that if you are using a third party editor to interface with Dropbox and allow remote editing this trick will not work but many of these editors store their text files on your device as well and any changes made to them will be synced the next time you have an Internet connexion If you are using this feature in conjunction with another author or editor make sure to communicate these ground rules with them where relevant Since it is not possible for Scrivener to guess at your intentions good communication over where new files should go and what is being independently worked upon will be beneficial You can safely edit the filename so long as the dashed number is untouched When a file has been edited in the sync folder if the binder name portion of the filename is changed the sync function will update the binder with the new name This is considered an advanced feature however to be used with care Note that changing the sequence number will have no effect on the binder order Also note that if all you changed is the filename nothing will happen due to the way modification dates are stamped on the filesystem Advanced users could use the UNIX command touch to force an update 13 2 SYNCHRONISED FOLDERS 103 13 2 4 Limitations RTF Format Limitations When using the RTF export format you can expect zero to minimal loss of formatting information when used in conjuncti
13. 202 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT The first section concerns itself with how footnotes should be arranged in the manuscript and the second section deals with inline annotations and linked com ments Since not all of the available export formats support all available options some variants of the pane will appear differently than shown Figure 25 7 This option pane is a core feature available to all export formats except for FDX and FCF Footnote Options Some formats do not support real footnotes or endnotes When using these formats Scrivener will create the appearance of endnotes by embedding plain text representa tions for both the marker and the footnote itself Since most of these formats also do not have a concept of a page it will be impossible for them to generate true footnotes Consequently they will nearly always be inserted at the very end of the document becoming in effect endnotes The HTML based formats including ePub will insert hyperlink references leading from the footnote marker to the footnote text This will allow readers to click on the marker in the text and jump directly to the footnote With ePub most e book readers have a back button which will let readers navigate back to the place there were before referencing the footnote Remove footnotes The exported manuscript will have all footnotes inline or linked stripped from it When this option is enabled the rest of the footnote section wil
14. Endnote format All of the notes above pertain to endnote numbering as well If you document has both footnotes and endnotes Scrivener will set two different numbering hints within the manuscript file it is up to the word processor to handle them correctly Override font If you wish to use a separate font to print footnotes this can be set here Note that many word processors have their own special stylesheets for handling footnote appearance so this option may not always be necessary Group footnotes before page breaks This feature is available to most formats that cannot generate true footnotes but still support some form of page break It will toggle the default behaviour whereby all footnotes are attached to the very end of the manuscript and will instead insert them at the nearest subsequent page break becoming in most cases chapter based endnotes Comments and Annotations Options As with footnotes it is possible to use both inline annotations and linked comments in the same project and selectively handle them during compile You may wish for example to use inline annotations for simple editing notes and linked comments for references to source material It might then be useful for collaborators to see the source material references but not the simple inline editing comments Most of the compile formats have the same options available but will handle the ex port of annotations and comments in different ways depending on what
15. Remove footnotes M include footnotes in word and character counts _ Export inspector footnotes as endnotes Export inline footnotes as endnotes _ Footnote numbering restarts each page Footnote format 1 2 3 H Endnote format Override font Courier 12 Comments and Annotations v Remove inspector comments M Remove inline annotations Include in word and character counts Export to RTF as Margin comments Figure 25 7 Compile Footnotes Comments Pane RTF z If you wish to make sure a replacement is always an isolated word put spaces around the letters in the Replace column Replacements can contain other tokens as demonstrated Table 25 1 in the fourth row which will produce a numbered figure caption prefix Since replace ments are evaluated simultaneously they cannot refer to other replacements however This option pane is a core feature available to all export formats 25 3 8 Footnotes Comments The Footnotes and Comments pane controls how these two forms of notation will be handled in the compile process or whether they should even appear at all Since there are two ways to add notes to documents linked or inline notes it is possible to treat the four of them differently with most formats As with other areas of the application and documentation the usage of the term footnote is equally applicable to endnote if the options to use endnotes have been applied
16. This commands swaps the position of the two split panes so that the view on the top will become the view on the bottom and vice versa Show Hide Header amp Footer View Toggles the visibility of the header and footer bar Both are elements of the editor and can be toggled indepen dently for each split See Writing and Editing chapter 14 for more infor mation on what these do Show Hide Layouts 38 Toggles the Layouts panel which allows you to manage view settings by saving the current settings or retrieving other settings you ve saved in the past See Layouts Panel section 9 7 All Layouts This Sub menu is populated by the saved layouts you ve cre ated with the Layouts panel It allows easy access to switching these sets of view configurations This menu will not appear if no layouts have been saved on your com puter Editor Options and commands for controlling the main editor A 4 VIEW MENU 243 Lock in Place x38 L Locks the editor or split so that no binder clicks will affect it When an editor is locked its header bar will turn a shade of red Show Titles in Scrivenings When enabled editable titles of documents will be placed in the editing session along with their associated texts Titles can be independently styled to set them apart in the Formatting tab sec tion B 7 These will only appear in Scrivenings mode Forward Backward in Document History 3 and 38 Like a Web browser the editor
17. Updating Templates To update a template which has already been saved follow the above instructions to safely open it without substitute variables make the changes you wish and then repeat the instructions for creating a new template When you access the Save as Template sheet you will note that all of the information from the template will be provided so you do not have to worry about replicating this information every single time If you do not need to make any changes here just click the OK button and then Yes to confirm that you wish to update the existing template Note that after you have created a project from a template even when holding down the option key to click on the Choose button the project will have no further connection with that template So if you have created a project purely to update a template there is no need to keep the project around after that point and allowing the project to auto save will not automatically update the template you must follow the template creation procedure in full Built in templates cannot be overwritten However you can open them for editing and then save your modifications as a new template by giving it a new name 7 9 3 Managing Templates In the Template browser window Options menu in the bottom left provides the fol lowing functions for managing templates Set Selected Template as Default Changes the default template selection to whichever template you currently have selec
18. and so on 17 4 3 Keywords Pane You can associate keywords with documents to help you find them when performing a project search Use the buttons in the header bar above the keywords table to add and remove keywords or you can drag words and phrases from text to the keywords table to create a new keyword You can also use the Keywords HUD which stores a repository of all keywords used in the project to assign keywords by dragging them from the HUD into the keywords table in the inspector You could use keywords to hold character names locations themes or anything else This way you could assign the name of a theme to a document as a keyword and then later you could perform a keyword search to find all documents that deal with that theme especially useful as you are unlikely ever to use the name of a theme directly in the text itself See Also 1 Using Keywords subsection 10 1 4 158 CHAPTER 17 INSPECTOR 2 Keywords HUD section 10 2 17 4 4 Snapshots Pane This section of the Inspector gives you easy access to all of your existing snapshots the ability to create new ones delete old ones and load up comparative displays between snapshots or the current editor At the top of the Inspector you will find two buttons Clicking the button will create a new untitled snapshot for the current document To remove a snapshot select it in the table below and click the button To read the contents of a snapshot click on an
19. colleague that has ot changed their default colours this can lead to situations where their revisions are not visible to you and vice versa When working in collaboration with other Scrivener users it is best to not customise these colours Coloured Text The interface for this type of search is similar to the Highlight search You can pro vide a custom colour restriction in the additional criteria section Note that since revision markings are essentially just formalised coloured text you can use this panel to work around the problems brought up above by searching for your colleagues cus tom colours manually Do note the colour choice still needs to be precise so getting these custom colours from them and turning them into custom swatches will be of benefit 126 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Links You may search for URL or internal Scrivener Links using this tool By default all links will be returned but if you wish to narrow the search down to a particular link type use the Link Type menu to make this choice Text with Preserved Style This will find text which has had a Preserve Style block drawn around it from the Format gt Formatting Preserve Formatting tool Since there are no optional qualities to these blocks of text no additional criteria is required Character Format Arbitrary text level formatting can be searched for using this tool Any number of options in the additional criteria can be stipulate
20. is an internal numerical ID that Scrivener assigns to all documents which users don t normally see In practice it might look like this The Grand Finale MyGreatNovel 756 These three pieces of information in combination allow Scrivener to sync docu ments with Simplenote You should therefore not edit this line in Simplenote In particular if you edit the project keyword or numerical ID Scrivener may not recog nise the Simplenote text as belonging to the current project or worse it may try to sync it with the wrong document in Scrivener It is thus generally recommended that you leave this line alone However you can edit only the document title the part before the parentheses which will update the title in Scrivener when synced if you really want to 13 1 2 Getting Started Login details The Simplenote Sync wizard will first prompt you to enter your login details Enter the e mail address and password which you used to register for Simplenote You can check Remember in keychain to have your login details remembered for the future Project keyword Along with your Simplenote login details you must also enter a project keyword if you have not already chosen one This is used by Scrivener to identify documents in Simplenote that are associated with the current project You should choose a keyword that is meaningful to the project easy to remem ber and that is unlikely to occur on the first line of documents in general
21. sub menu to select the preset you wish to modify You will be presented with the same sheet you used to create the preset only the information you saved into it will be pre populated into the sheet In most cases you will not need to change anything here and can just submit the form to apply the formatting changes you ve made If you do wish to change the parameters of how 14 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 121 much the style saves you can make these changes to the sheet or even change the name of it If you wish to create a derivative instead of replacing an existing preset use the preset to style your text modify it and then use the Format Formatting New Preset From Selection menu command to create the new version Deleting a Preset Deleting a formatting preset can be done at any time by using the For mat gt Formatting Delete Preset sub menu This command cannot be undone but if you do accidentally delete an important preset you can re create it by finding an example in your text and creating a new one from scratch 14 4 4 Font Palette The font palette is a standard tool provided by Apple and can be toggled with For mat gt Font gt Show Fonts and Hide Fonts You can also use 3 T to toggle this view at any time This palette provides full access to the font typesetting engine including access to many OpenType features and custom font effects For basic font changes the Format Bar subsection 14 4 2 will suffi
22. they are easily accessible and we think you ll find they add valuable tools and methods to your writing process In addition to the list below you might want to also check out the new preferences Appendix B and menus Appendix A 3 0 1 Free form Corkboards Up until now the corkboard feature has been another way to view the order of your book by placing it into a familiar metaphor Scrivener 2 takes the metaphor the rest of the way Now you can view a free form corkboard for your sections where cards can be moved around freely allowing the right brain to visualise your book in new ways If you decide to commit the new order into book outline you can do so with the press of a button For more information read The Corkboard section 12 1 3 0 2 Collections Collections add tabs to your binder giving you the ability to collect groups of doc uments together for whatever purpose you desire without moving them from their original position It s a bit like making groups of aliases without all of the fuss You could create a tab to collect all of the sections have your editor has marked as being too verbose and remove them from the collection as you trim them down or create another tab to store all of the documents that still need citations Build smart collec tions that automatically look for search terms every time you view the tab For more information read Using Collections section 8 3 3 0 3 Marginalia Now you get a choice
23. 1 4 The last two sub panes Snapshots and Linked Notes take up the entire Inspector Snapshots An integrated view which displays all of the document s snapshots and the contents of the selected snapshot in the text area below Snapshots can be 5 2 VIEW MODES 23 created from the state of the current text or deleted with the and buttons in the header bar The Compare button will show changes between the selected snapshot and the current text The Roll Back button lets you revert to an older version of the text For more information on using this see Snapshots Pane subsection 17 4 4 and Snapshots and Changes subsection 3 0 8 Linked Notes Words and phrases in the text editor can have notes attached to them The contents of the notes will be stored in this pane New notes can be created with the button or new footnotes with the fn button Selected notes can be deleted with the button For more information see Linked Notes Pane subsection 17 4 5 and Annotating and Marking Your Text chapter 16 5 2 View Modes There are three primary view modes available in Scrivener View modes give you a powerful way to view and modify multiple documents at once in a variety of fashions each tailored for different tasks View modes are generally only triggered when the editor is asked to view more than one document at a time This can happen if you Cmd click on more than one Binder Item or even if you just click on a folder
24. A Converts the selected text into an inline annotation or toggles the writing mode to annotation mode Useful for placing notes right in the editor alongside the relevant text Inline Footnote 88 F Converts the selected text into a footnote or toggles the writing mode to footnote mode Useful for keeping footnotes directly in the editor session Convert The convert submenu provides useful tools for the manipulation of text and notation features To Uppercase Converts the selected text to all uppercase characters To Lowercase Converts the selected text to all lowercase characters To Title Case Converts the selected text to title case which takes into account common English grammar conventions 260 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS To Small Caps If the current font supports proper small caps the text will be converted to that variant However it will fake the results using font sizes otherwise If your workflow requires true small caps be certain the font you are using can handle them Quotes to Smart Straight Quotes Converts between typographic curly quotes and straight inch and foot marks Multiples Spaces to Space Useful for cleaning up a document that has been typed up with multiple spaces in between sentences and so forth Bold and Italics to MultiMarkdown Syntax Converts rich text bold and italic formatting codes into respective MMD syntax Note that in some cases this can produce odd results
25. Base printed page size on There are two ways to print from Scrivener Document printing Page Setup settings will use the settings provided in the standard Mac application Page Setup window in the File menu The other choice is to use the Compile Draft settings which is how you will most likely be publishing your work If page proportions are important to your workflow such as in screenplays be sure to choose the option which you will be using to distribute copies of your script B 7 Formatting B 7 1 Main Text Style These settings determine how new documents will be configured They will not adjust the formatting of documents you have already created in any projects so you needn t worry about these settings destroying your formatting Further these settings can be adjusted per project To change the settings for each project select the menu command Project Text Formatting Preferences These will always be set to the application defaults shown here when you make a new project If you change the settings in the project formatting preferences changes made to this tab will not impact that project It is best to visualise default formatting settings in the following order of prece dence starting with the weakest and ending with the strongest 278 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES z Application preferences as set in this tab z Project preferences as set in Project Text Formatting Preferences The document i
26. Binder or press 1 3 B All of these commands can be used to restore its visibility if it has been hidden The binder is labelled at the top Some functions will automatically replace the Binder view with a temporary data display Project Search Results is the most com mon of these This label will change to reflect whatever automatic data is currently being viewed You can always get back to the binder by clicking the small X button in the footer bar of the binder This section will go over the various aspects of the binder and how to best use Scrivener s features to structure navigate around in edit and write your draft Scrivener does some things which are unusual and generally restricted to high powered expensive applications As a consequence this can result in some inter esting surprises some of which are revealed in the basic templates distributed with Scrivener s installable extras 8 1 1 The Three Root Folders The binder has three default root folders which cannot be deleted or moved from the root although they can be renamed moved around within the root or assigned custom icons To use Scrivener effectively it is very important to understand the significance of these folders The Draft Folder As the name suggests the Draft folder is where you place all of the files that you want included in your actual draft How you structure it is entirely up to you you 46 8 1 HOW THE BINDER IS ORGANISED 47 Binder T
27. Import section allows you to choose where files that have been created in the Notes folder outside of Scrivener will be imported You can select a target container Research by default or uncheck the Only show containers option to choose any item to become a container for imported files This section will be disabled if Sync all other text documents in the project is turned off above The Format section determines how the files will be created in the sync folder Because script writers might not want to use a script format for notes and research documents there are separate options for files stored in the Draft folder and other files in the project There are three file formats available and depending on your intended purpose selecting the right option will be important z Rich Text RTF This provides the cleanest transfer of information Most format ting will be retained especially when used in conjunction with a word processor that handles all of Scrivener s RTF features such as Word or Nisus Writer This is the best option for collaborating with other individuals who do not have ac cess to Scrivener or for working in a multi platform setting yourself Note that all versions of Microsoft Word fully support the RTF format z Plain text XT Formatting will be stripped when using this option The resulting files will be standard plain text files in the UTF 8 format If they are edited outside of Scrivener when synced
28. Permanently discards the current contents of the project trash can You will be warned before this is done Once contents have been deleted there is no way to undo that action This can also be done by right clicking on the Trash itself in the binder A 6 Documents Menu The Documents menu contains all commands relating directly to documents such as duplicating and splitting documents viewing them in combination and moving them and hoisting the binder to view isolated parts of the draft A 6 DOCUMENTS MENU 251 Open The Open sub menu provides you with a number of ways in which to open a selected item These menu items are relevant from the binder or collection views as well as corkboard and outliner views but note that in most cases a single click will open a file all by itself How it does that is dictated by the settings available in the View Binder Affects sub menu The corkboard and outliner can be configured to immediately open clicked files too The first two menu items open the selected documents in either the current editor or the other split To open an item in the current split and replace the existing view use 38 O To open selected item s in the other split use amp 38 O This will open a new split if necessary using the previous split orientation The actual labels of these menu items will change depending upon the current editor that is active and whether or not split orientation is horizontal or verti cal
29. Rich Text Formats The following table shows which file format constitutes the best option when export ing for use with several popular applications and which features are supported by those programs Explanation of features and how compatibility is determined Comments RTF comments are an optional way to export Scrivener s com ments and annotations Compatible word processors will display these com ments in their own fashion usually in the margins If annotations are exported as inline comments then they will be supported by all editors as they just be come ordinary text at that point This is the recommended setting if your word processor does not support RTF comments but you need to export annota tions Footnotes For compatibility so long as a word processor supports footnotes and or endnotes it is considered compatible Not all word processors support some of the more advanced footnote appearance features such as custom num bering styles and restarting numbering on each page Lists Compatibility is considered to be simple bullet and enumeration list transfer Specific bullet styles and custom enumeration styles may not be equally supported by all programs Tables Only basic table support is required to be considered compatible Cus tom styling and other advanced features are not taken into consideration Most word processors do not support nested RTF tables but do support cell back ground colour and borde
30. a selection to be made in a Corkboard Outliner or Binder view or from within a Collection Documents do not have to be in consecutive order they can be picked from throughout the project When selecting non linear items here are some tips to de termine ordering z Ifthe view you are picking documents from is based on the outline order such the Binder Outliner or Corkboard then the merged document will retain the original outline order When using a Collection to select items the collection order will be used to established the structure of the merged document When it comes to merging Scrivener will attempt to retain as much meta data is is logically possible The Synopses Notes Keywords and References will be concate nated together much in the same fashion that the main text will be Meta data which cannot be combined such as Title Label any custom meta data compile option flags and so forth will use the top most document as a reference point For example Document A Synopsis This is the first document Keyword Apples Status First Draft Document B Synopsis This is the second document Keyword Carrots Status ToDo Notes Mix these two together in a blender for a great tasting healthy beverage Both Document A and Document B are selected in the Binder and Docu ments Merge is invoked 38 M producing the following single document wi
31. allows you to set the underline style for the current element If single or double underline is selected you can check Underline by word to un derline words only not spaces All caps to If this is checked the element will be capitalised If End of line is selected the element will be capitalised all the way to the end of the element If First tab is selected the element will be capitalised only up to the first tab character This accommodates formats such as the UK stage play format which has character names and dialogue on the same line with character names in capital letters followed by a tab and dialogue in normal sentence case If Character s is selected you can enter the characters into the text field that will terminate capital isation For instance if you entered a colon in the text field the element would only be capitalised up to the first colon Menu shortcut Enter a letter here that will be used in the script elements menu as a shortcut key Hitting cmd Y brings up the script elements menu whilst you are typing or editing hitting the key you enter here will select the element thus your hands don t have to leave the keyboard to select script elements 19 2 2 Paragraph The paragraph pane allows you to set the paragraph formatting of the selected ele ment Alignment Sets the current paragraph alignment left centered right or justified Spacing Sets the inter line spacing single 1 5 or double Spacing Befo
32. as the target it will become a document stack as it now contains children z Left Right Up Down Use with the appropriate keyboard arrow key to move items around in the outline Left and Right will promote or demote the item in the hierarchy Up and Down will change its order in context with its siblings Sort acts on the children of a selected container and sorts items alphanumer ically either in Ascending or Descending order Note that this a permanent change that cannot be undone Additionally you can choose to shuffle all of the children randomly If you wish to just temporarily sort a list of items by a criteria use the outliner Hoist Binder Mimics the behaviour of traditional outlining software allowing you to temporarily obscure the full binder and focus on only one portion of it A 6 DOCUMENTS MENU 255 Hoisting will display the selected container all by itself in the binder side bar Unlike collections hoisting the binder retains all of the binder s abilities Changes made to ordering and structure while hoisting will be made to the book outline itself If you want a non destructive way of viewing portions of the binder it is recommended you use Collections section 8 3 instead Unhoist Binder Returns the binder to its full display Favorites Provides commands to manage your favourite documents Favourites will be displayed in various places around the interface particularly in item selection menus at
33. backups and never worry about keeping all of your machines up to date You can still make manual backups using the File Menu as before 3 0 10 Document Templates Before if you wrote a template character sheet reference page and so on you had to make sure to remember to duplicate the original and then move the copy to the right spot Now you can set up a template folder which will let you draft your templates in a single spot then place them in an easy to use menu to be inserted right into the draft where you want them Document templates will be clearly marked with a special icon in the binder For more information read Document Templates section 8 4 DropBox is a free tool that lets you keep a folder synchronised between all of your computers For more information visit the DropBox homepage 3 1 HUNDREDS OF OTHER IMPROVEMENTS 11 3 0 11 Page View Display your work in a variety of visual page formats including single page two page side by side and custom page sizes While not intended to replace your word processor or layout program Page Layout preview will give you a rough idea of how many pages your sections are This will be of considerable use to scriptwriters or others who prefer to work in a page based method or just anyone who prefers the aesthetic appeal of seeing virtual pages scrolling by 3 1 Hundreds of Other Improvements Often when a new product version says hundreds of new improvements you know they
34. be a folder or file group Each project can only have one template container at a time To set it up select the container of templates and use the Project Set Selection as Templates Folder The binder icon will change to indicate its status and all of the items beneath it will have a small blue T badge added to their icons To clear a document template container designation use the Projects Clear Tem plates Folder menu item This action will not delete anything in your project It will merely remove the special status from the designated templates folder Template fold ers can be placed or designated anywhere in the binder even in the Draft though do note that if you do that they will likely show up in the final manuscript and toggling them to be hidden would lead to generated items being hidden by default as well Some of the built in project templates will come with a template folder already set up for you To use your own templates folder first clear the default setting using the above menu item Optionally you could just remove the contents of the default and supply it with your own templates If you find yourself doing this often you might wish to create your own project template subsection 7 5 2 8 4 2 Creating Document Templates Creating new templates is as easy as creating a normal file or folder item in the binder There is nothing special about these items save for their position within the desig nated
35. be sure to proof the results before send ing off to the printer Inline to Inspector and Inspector to Inline Conversions These four com mands allow you to convert inline annotations to linked Inspector com ments vice versa and footnotes These commands work on the entire current document Options Provides options which impact the display or behaviour or the text editor Show Hide Invisibles Toggles visibility of hidden control characters such as paragraph breaks tabs spaces page breaks and so on A few control characters do not have associated special characters Typewriter Scrolling 38 1 Toggle a feature which keeps the currently edited line of text in the middle of the screen vertically centred This set ting is global but will impact full screen or the regular editors depending upon the current mode Bibliography Citations 38 Y Ifa citation manager has been set up in the Gen eral tab section B 1 of Scrivener s preferences this command will launch or activate the set manager allowing you to select a citation and paste it back into Scrivener using whatever system that application provides A 8 amp WINDOW MENU 261 A 8 Window Menu The Window menu contains commands for controlling windows and panels along with a list of all open window Minimize 38 M Minimises the window to the Dock the same as the yellow button in the top left of the window Hold down the Option key to minimise all Z
36. binder You ll probably get a corkboard view of its child items or perhaps an Outliner view if that is how you have things set up This is all pretty straight forward but what happens if you close the corkboard view This is a term from outlining applications which means items which are contained by the parent item It is a relative term for a parent could be a child of another parent You ll often see items referred to in genological terms like siblings aunts ancestors and so on Most of these are intuitive and mean exactly what you d expect Aunts are a little more esoteric but it refers to an item that is one level higher in the hierarchy than the previous item A item has an aunt if the next item below it in the list is thus a sibling of its parent 8 1 HOW THE BINDER IS ORGANISED 49 With the folder still selected click the currently selected view icon Corkboard is the default in the main toolbar and you should get a blank view that looks suspicious like an empty text document In fact that s precisely what it is Type in some text and see what happens Note that in the binder the Folder icon has changed and now sports what looks like a little page of paper in its corner This means the folder itself has text associated with it Let s try something a little more radical Right click on the Folder in the binder and select Convert to File It should change to a stack of
37. blank Clicking on it in this state will close the opposing split This means you should click on the icon in the header bar for the document view you wish to retain once the split has closed Either side can be dismissed by clicking on the opposing header bar button Additionally if you hold down the Option key while a split is open a vertical or horizontal line will be drawn allowing you to switch split orientations without otherwise disturbing your layout Both splits will remain open only the orientation will shift 14 7 Footer Bar Below each editor pane is a footer bar This is the most dynamic part of the editor in that it will change depending on the type of document visible and the current editor mode When a text document is being viewed for instance it will display the word and character count along with a pop up button for changing the text scale and a button for setting document targets When a QuickTime document is displayed it shows the current playing time And so on This section will cover the tools available to the standard text editor z For information on the various other document footer bars see Viewing Media in the Editor section 14 8 z For details on how to use the footer bar in script mode see Scriptwriting chap ter 19 Read the chapters on The Corkboard section 12 1 and The Outliner and the Binder section 12 2 for details on how to use the footer bar in those view modes 14 7 1 Text Zoom
38. can be adjusted in the corkboard and Appearance pref erence panes and display can be toggled with View Corkboard Show Stamps or 3 S 2 QuickReference Panels the status is one of the priority meta data values always visible at the top of the QuickReference panel for each document 10 1 META DATA TYPES 71 10 1 4 Using Keywords Each document can have a list of keywords associated with it These are useful for making documents easily searchable for instance you can list all characters and loca tions connected with a scene in the keywords even if they are not mentioned explic itly in the text Creative uses for keywords also include extended status control plot management and whatever else you can think of Like labels keywords have an associated colour which will be displayed beside the keyword in the inspector list as an underscore in the relevant outliner column and in the Keywords HUD see below Additionally keywords can be used in the cork board as small coloured squares along the right hand edge of the card The visibility of these can be toggled with View Corkboard Show Keyword Colors or 38 K The display preferences for these can be adjusted via the corkboard display controls sub section 12 1 3 When exporting or printing keywords will be displayed on a single line separated by commas 10 1 5 Minor Meta Data In addition to the primary types of meta data there are a few smaller items mostly
39. cases where you suspect the project has A 2 FILE MENU 231 lost synchronisation with search index There is generally no need to do this as Scrivener will automatically rebuild indexes if something appears to have gone awry since the last session Save As 3 S Will prompt you for a new project name and or location When you submit this dialogue box Scrivener will immediately start working off of the new copy If instead you want to generate a backup copy and keep working off of the original use File Back Up Back Up To instead For more information on managing your project files see Project Management chapter 7 Import Allows you to import a variety of existing information from your drive or even from the Internet into your active project For full documentation on im porting information into Scrivener refer to Gathering Material section 11 1 Files 38 1 Import files from the file system into Scrivener Supported formats are doc rtf rtfd txt and other text formats all major image and QuickTime file forms pdf files htm html and webarchive files Web Page lt 3 W Import a web page from the Internet by supplying Scrivener with its URL MultiMarkdown File Takes a plain text MultiMarkdown formatted docu ment and will convert its header structure into a binder outline structure Plain Text Formatted Screenplay Import a plain text screenplay option ally splitting sections into sep
40. current compile group If you wish for this to be more descriptive than Draft you can change the name of the Draft in the Binder to be the name of your book lt surname gt The surname from the current user s Address Book entry lt username gt The full name from the current user s Address Book entry Some useful global replacement tokens lt p gt Prints the current page number lt pagecount gt The total page count for the entire manuscript This is a static number that is primarily useful in conjunction with the page number token A value of lt p gt lt pagecount gt will produce 73 258 on page 73 of a 258 page manuscript lt shortdate gt The current date according to the system short date settings lt mediumdate gt As above using the system medium date settings lt longdate gt As above using the system medium date settings There are no hard and fast rules for image size and aspect ratio Within iBooks the book shape will be determined by the cover art If you give the compiler a wide design the book will appear like a wide format coffee table book in the shelf for example Generally speaking a design which is taller is better suited for most devices Include iTunes cover art file for iBooks Once a cover image has been selected this option will be made available It will include additional information that iTunes needs to set the shelf cover art in iBooks In most cases you should k
41. drop down menu lets you select from all of the available font families on your system 118 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Optima Creou 3 e l u EE n al Ea 2 GE S Creses Figure 14 2 Format Bar displayed in sections The second menu provides the available variants available for that family Note that not all fonts come with a full complement of variants If for some reason you cannot change a selection of text to bold or italic check this menu to make sure that the current font supports these variants The third menu provides a quick list of common font sizes If you need a cus tom size that is not available on this list use the Font Panel item at the bottom to access the standard OS X font palette subsection 14 4 4 The next three buttons section 2 Figure 14 2 provide toggling shortcuts to the most common text format tools bold italic and underscore respectively When the caret is in a range of text that matches the format style the buttons will appear activated The next portion in this section allows control of paragraph level text alignment Paragraph level alignment comes in three flavours z Left Align default Centre Align Right Align z Full Justification In all cases these adjust the entire paragraph If you need multiple alignments on a single line you will need to add special alignment tab stops to the standard ruler 38 R In the third section Figure 14 2 the lef
42. examining it the dot ought to disappear your project has been saved Whenever you pause for two seconds Scrivener s auto save feature will kick in and save all your work You might notice that the title of your document changed when this happened If you leave a document as Untitled the first line will be used 6 3 OUTLINING YOUR DRAFT 29 AOO amp My Novel Chapter One a a Dra El Chapter One 4 gt EJ Chapter One Chapter Two gt 5 Research This is the first line in my new book gt Trash a Ill 100 gt Words 9 Chars 38 Figure 6 2 Progress so far as the title This will only happen once and you can always change the automatic title for something more descriptive First let s make a new document in the binder There are a number of ways to do this but first let s try the most direct method click the green Add button in the toolbar just once The cursor will flip over to the binder and let you type in the name of the new doc ument Just type something in here like Chapter Two and press Enter to confirm You ll notice that the content you just typed into the editor has disappeared that is because you are now viewing Chapter Two Let s fix the name of the first document while we are in the binder Press the UpArrow once Immediately you should see the words you just typed re appear in the editor That is because you are now viewing the first st
43. fashion which cannot be un done it is often a good idea to back up your project prior to use it A simple mistake can render your entire draft illegible or even worse produce subtle flaws that even your editor ends up missing Using the Whole words only option can mitigate this a great deal Without that option searching for the character name Sam and replac ing it with Joseph could end you up with such bleakly amusing concoctions as Josephe in place of every same 14 6 HEADER BAR 129 14 6 Header Bar The header bar appears at the top of each editor pane and can be toggled on and off via View Layout Show Hide Header View It contains a number of useful naviga tion tools displays the current title of the edited document s and provides a tool for splitting the editor The header bar has three colour states 1 Grey when no split is active this is the default state If splits are turned on the inactive editor will be grey 2 Blue when splits are active this denotes the active split Any actions taken which will impact the current editor will be made to the blue document The title itself will also be underlined for the active split 3 Red when an editor has been locked it will turn red to remind you that clicks in the Binder will not load any files into the editor 14 6 1 History On the left most side of the header bar are the navigation arrows Use these to navi gate backward
44. for links are located within the Navigation tab section B 5 in the Scrivener Links section Here you can configure how links will act when they are clicked and what will happen when new links are created Both settings have three options available Current Editor The link will replace the current editing session with the linked item This method works most like a web browser and like a web browser you can use the forward and backward buttons to get back to where you were after following a link Other Editor Will use the other split to load the clicked link If necessary Scrivener will open up a new split section 14 9 for you using the last used split type horizontal or vertical z QuickReference Panel The item will be loaded into a QuickReference panel chapter 18 The colour appearance of links can also be adjusted in the Appearance tab sec tion B 2 9 5 4 When Scrivener Links can be Compiled For the most part Scrivener Links are a feature which reside completely within the realm of Scrivener When compiling they will be stripped out of the source text and thus are handy for inserting useful links for your own purposes which will not show up at all in the finished manuscript There is one optional exception to this rule that requires a chain of conditions to be present 1 Links which are solely the title of the document they link to 2 Enable the Update Scrivener Links containing titles to includ
45. formatting you will probably find the formatting tools useful in the writing process especially if you are compiling to plain text where they will all be safely stripped out and invisible to the reader Emulating plain text If you find working in a plain text environment to be more productive you may wish to set the default font in Formatting Preferences to one that does not support rich text features such as Monaco Monaco 10 point is used by most plain text editors on the Mac and change the ruler settings so that there are no indents or paragraph spacing This set up will emulate a plain text environ ment whilst still allowing features such as annotations and highlighting Someone writing a novel or short story could very well do the whole thing in Scrivener including the final print for submission and export to Word format for sending an electronic copy Other writers are likely to export from Scrivener and then use an intermediary tool dedicated to the sort of formatting they require to prepare the final draft Scrivener concentrates on the drafting stage of a long text it is not intended to replace your word processor entirely When using MultiMarkdown to format your work you will find that some for matting such as inline images footnotes and so forth will be converted to MMD markings during compile Most formatting however will be stripped and thus can be useful in an annotation setting 14 2 Editing Basics If you are unfam
46. hand side of the index card as coloured pieces of tape The number of keywords that can be shown at once can be changed using the corkboard display options button For more information on using keywords see Setting Up Meta Data chap ter 10 Show Card Numbers Cards will be numbered according to their sequence in the binder outline structure Ordinarily this will match the order in which the cards appear but in Freeform mode this can be a valuable tool 246 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS as the order of cards are likely to become desynchronised with the actual manuscript structure Number Per Section When more than one container has been selected and the corkboard is displaying cards in Multiple Selection mode card number will be re started for each new section Otherwise cards will be numbered in the order they appear from start to finish Freeform Activates the Freeform Corkboard mode which allows you to move cards around on the corkboard without any grid or ordering constraints This can also be toggled in the Footer bar Commit Freeform Order It is possible to instruct Scrivener to use the cur rent freeform layout to re order the actual manuscript outline structure Scrivener will provide several options for how this should be done For more information on how to work with Freeform Corkboards see The Corkboard section 12 1 Outliner Columns Displays a list of toggles which will reveal or hide the corre sp
47. handy presets using the Format As drop down menu and then supply a target format using the Compile For drop down menu If you require more detailed control of the exported file you can click the expansion arrow to the right of the preset selection menu to reveal the full Compile interface From here it is possible to control practically every element of your draft as it is processed into a single file 25 1 Basic Presets In many cases you may not need to look any further than the supplied presets that have been bundled with Scrivener They have been designed to conform to industry standards in terms of manuscript submission and working with agents and editors The available presets are Novel Formats your book using standard Courier 12pt type and a number of common conventions such as scene separators page numbers and so forth Note to get the full benefit of this preset you will want to use one of the rich text formats such as RTF Novel with parts Same as above but will format top level folders to operate as parts in the book instead of chapters 182 25 2 EXPANDED COMPILE INTERFACE 183 20 2 Expanded Compile Interface The expanded Compile interface accessed by clicking the expansion arrow to the right of the Format As drop down is where fine grained tweaks can be made to the compile process With some formats like ePub you ll need to use this interface to properly configure your book for devices The Comp
48. has been inset in the example with the items named to indicate how they correlate to levels in the Formatting pane Items directly beneath the Draft are considered to be Level 1 a child item beneath one of those is Level 2 and so on The way Scrivener s formatting engine works is by apply a format to the maximum depth in your draft outline Inserting rules will thus only apply to those levels which it states in the label In the provided example I ve added a checkbox to insert Meta Data creation and modification dates labels and so forth to any folders at level two or deeper Folders directly descended from the Draft will only print their titles in the compiled document but all folders at level two or greater will also print their meta data To remove a level based row you can select it and click the button to the right of the Add formatting level button There are other buttons and options in this table but before we take a look at them let s examine the formatting editor Formatting Editor The formatting editor view is linked with the structure table above it When you select a row in that table you are also editing the format for that row as well Thus each type of binder item can have its own formatting rules and further levels of depth in the binder can have their own formatting rules The first thing you need to do when editing the formatting for the manuscript is to enable the global override I
49. highlighter colours show the Color Palette 38 C and select the third icon from the left 10 3 NAMING TEXT HIGHLIGHTS 75 Next from the Palettes drop down menu select the group titled Scrivener You should now see something resembling the above screenshot Double click on any of the provided highlights to rename it Your changes should be visible immediately in the Scrivener interface where applicable Your own colours can be added to any of Scrivener s various colour selection menus as well If necessary click and drag downward in the location marked above Custom colour shelf You should see a row of white squares appear You can drag out as many rows as you like The easiest way to create new custom colours is to use either the colour wheel first icon or the sliders second icon When you find a hue that you d like to use as a highlight text colour or annotation colour drag from the large colour preview area at the top of the pane and drop into one of the empty slots in the custom shelf If you check one of Scrivener s colour menus right now you ll see that it has already been added below the base sets To change the name of your custom colour click on the swatches icon again make sure the Scrivener set is active and drag the colour from the custom shelf into the list Now that it is there you can double click to rename it Note that due to the way colours are estimated if you have several subtle
50. in it as its icon will appear full To permanently remove files from the project select Empty Trash from the File menu after having moved files to the Trash folder Note that although you can rearrange items inside the Trash folder or view it like any other binder item and of course you can move files into the Trash folder by dragging you cannot create new files inside it Files that have been place in the Trash will have their icons ghosted This is useful in differentiating old files since project search results will include trashed items as well 48 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER 8 1 2 Files and Containers If like many authors you are used to using a word processor for all of your writings you probably have a few habits that you ll inevitably end up bringing with you to Scrivener One of these is that of working with large sections of information In a word processor it can be awfully clumsy to work in extremely long files the length of an entire book but at the same time it can also be clumsy working with sections that are too short it means having so many files open at once and no good way to keep all of the windows organised A common tendency is to treat the binder like a collection of those semi large files say the length of a chapter because even just that small incremental step can be so much better than working in a word processor But if you organise your project in this fashion you are missing out on a part of
51. in the Formatting Editor below the table We ll get into how to change the look and feel of this in the next section Pro Tips You can enable or disable elements for all rows by Option clicking on any of the checkboxes If you want to apply settings to only certain rows you can use the standard Copy and Paste functions to copy settings from one row and paste them into another This action will also paste any custom formatting settings as well Things get more interesting when these rules are applied to levels of hierarchy This ability is best demonstrated with an example Try selecting the Folder row in the table and then click the Add formatting level button indicated with an arrow Figure 25 4 The label for the row that was previously selected will now be titled Level 1 and the new indented folder row will be called Level 2 As you might guess this means you now have two rules for handling folders The first rule will 25 3 OPTION PANES 191 apply to level one folders only the second rule will apply to level two folders and anything deeper in the hierarchy than that Note that when you do this any config uration from the original row will be carried over into the new row to help you get started in customising it This holds true for formatting as well as the options we ve already discussed What do these levels correspond with They are matched with outliner depth in your binder An example binder structure
52. in the active split will be used instead of the active default for that split and will thus set the default for that split to the acquired view model 14 10 Using Snapshots Snapshots provide a way of backing up and saving different versions of individual doc ument Taking a snapshot of a document takes a copy of the text of that document as it exists at that exact moment in time and stores it so that you can return to it or restore it at a later date Using snapshots you never need worry about making major edits to a document because you can take a snapshot of it before you begin editing and then restore the older version later if you change your mind about the changes you have made Note that snapshots only affect the text of documents not notes synopses or meta data and are therefore only available for documents that contain text files folders and saved searches You can tell if a text document has any associated snapshots by its icon Documents that have had snapshots taken of them have the top right of the paper icon folded down There are two primary ways to manage snapshots using the Docu ments Snapshots sub menu and the Inspector pane subsection 17 4 4 the lat ter of which will be covered in the reference section You can also conveniently use the s 5 keyboard shortcut while editing a document to take a quick snapshot in the background 14 10 1 Creating Snapshots While working on a document there are thr
53. in the binder you ll see a third icon type that looks like a small index card next to Wineries This new one indicates that you ve typed in a synopsis but haven t yet typed in any text for the section Once you enter text into the editor for the Wineries section the icon will be replaced with the one you see for Chapter One Some people like to work in a top down fashion where they ll build a conceptual outline and then fill in what they intend for each section in the synopsis These three levels of icons give you an over all idea of your level of progress with this task We ll try that now Load the Wineries card by double clicking on the icon next to the name If you can t find the right spot just click on it in the binder There are multiple ways to do nearly everything in Scrivener We could have also selected the Wineries card and pressed 38 O to open it in the current editor or used click and drag to drop the card onto the header bar Type in a short sentence and observe that as predicted the icon has now changed to match the Chapter One section You might be wondering how much text each section should hold The answer is largely up to you With a word processor it is often convenient to work in long documents because lots of small windows can create clutter but Scrivener allows you to break things down into smaller pieces since it organises all of these files for you and keeps them in a lo
54. is supported within that format RTF DOC Provide additional options for utilising RTF s comment syntax Unfortunately this syntax is not widely supported If comments refuse to show up in your word processor try using one of the other methods z Other rich text and word processor formats In all of the formats that support the ability to set font colours annotations and comments will be inserted as actual text in the document enclosed in square brackets and then coloured according to the annotation text colour or linked comment background colour in the project For the purposes of this definition HTML WebArchive and ePub are considered rich text 3So long as the DOC format has been set to use RTF internally section B 9 204 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT z Text based formats For formats like plain text FCF and MultiMarkdown when the HTML method is disabled annotations and comments will be sim ply wrapped in square brackets and placed into the text where they originally appeared in the project The following options are available Remove inspector comments Only inspector comments will be stripped from the resulting manuscript Remove inline annotations Only inline annotations will be stripped from the text If you wish for all comments to be removed from the manuscript make sure both this and the above options are checked Include in character and word counts As with the analogous optio
55. it isn t being edited by anyone else with a copy of the project It is safe to transfer your Scrivener project from one computer to another and then use the same sync folder to share changes made on the second computer While the project will save your sync folder selection the second computer might have a different address to that spot and require you to reselect it In that case you will get a warning when choosing the folder but you can dismiss the warning and safely continue Using this feature in an attempt to merge projects or to have more than one person using a copy of the project could result in lost data or confusing results When in doubt always create a new folder This feature provides the following options Sync the contents of the Draft folder Enabled by default the entire Draft folder will be kept in sync with the folder when this is on Sync all other text documents in the project Keep the rest of the project up to date with this option Note it will only work with text files Enabling this option also activates the Import settings below Sync only documents in collection If this is selected only documents that are con tained in the collection specified in the pop up list next to this checkbox will be kept in syne with the folder This essentially acts as a filter for the other two above Sync options For instance if Sync the contents of the Draft folder is selected but Sync all other text documents
56. level which Compile will use as auxiliary meta data on top of any Compile Meta data settings for MultiMarkdown Below that each header found in the MMD file will be used to create a new document at an appropriate level of depth with any text following that header up to the point of the next header included in that document 11 1 4 Plain Text Formatted Screenplay When importing screenplays from Movie Magic Screenwriter Celtx and other pro grams that export plain text scripts you can use this import utility to have them con verted into Scrivener s script formatting automatically You can optionally choose to have the imported file split into multiple scene documents for you If you are work ing in Final Draft you should use the FDX format instead with the Import and Split utility 11 1 5 From Simpletext ws If you use WriteRoom for the iPhone or the SimpleText ws service you can login using this utility and select from your available note files online choosing which ones 80 CHAPTER 11 GATHERING MATERIAL to download into the binder If you are using your own server to provide SimpleText services you can use the Options button to supply the proper connection informa tion Scrivener does not support uploading documents to SimpleText ws if you wish to use a note taking service that offers round trip synchronisation we recommend Simplenote section 13 1 11 1 6 Scrivener Project Allows you to import another Scrivener p
57. might find the Doc uments gt Split sub menu to be quite useful in converting a long document into an agile outline 32 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR 6 4 Compiling the Draft We ve only scratched the surface of what can be done but before ending this tour we ll look at one more thing compiling Compile is Scrivener s terminology for what most applications refer to as Exporting This name was chosen to reflect the fact that Scrivener is doing quite a bit more than just converting the data from one format to another Scrivener s compiler can generate documents to nearly a dozen different formats do simple or complex transformations on the binder structure reformat everything to a consistent look and much more The philosophy of letting you work the way you want to work is very much supported by the compiler No need to work in Courier Times New Roman or whatever your editor prefers You can choose an elegant font or one that is easy to read at 3am with sore eyes In the end Scrivener will generate a document to your required specifications Let s try it now Press X38 E or select File Compile After all of the features de scribed above you might think you got the wrong sheet at first By default Scrivener present a very simple form with some industry standard presets and an export file format chooser From the Format as menu select Novel Change the Compile for option to RTF That s it Click the
58. non linear multiple selection it will be dismissed Using the Go To menu to navigate While the active split is in Scrivenings mode the View Go To sub menu and the duplicate of that menu in the header bar icon menu will display only the contents of the current Scrivenings session Selecting items from that list will jump you straight to that document like a small table of contents Selecting only the document you are editing Use 3 A to select the entire text area for only the document you are actively editing within the session Standard 38 A will always select the text of the entire session Selecting by section is also a useful way to get a quick word count of the active document in the footer bar Lock in Place navigation If you are in an Edit Scrivenings session and lock the ed itor containing the Scrivenings view in place using Lock in Place from the View Editor Lock In Place or header view icon menu clicking on documents in the sidebar that are in the Scrivenings session will move the insertion point to the beginning of that document in the editor just like Go To 14 14 Goals and Statistics Tracking Tools At some point most writers will want to get some idea of the progress of their work by checking the word character or page count There are several ways of doing this in Scrivener 144 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING To get word character and page counts for the whole of the draft that is the c
59. not be exported If the retention of this information is important to you it is recommended you use inline notation with plain text You can easily convert your notes to inline with the Format Convert tools Number of Notes At the time of writing Simplenote is limited to syncing 2 000 notes a day Although this sounds a lot if you end up syncing the entire con tents of ten projects that contain 200 text documents you can soon end up with a lot of notes in your Simplenote account It is therefore strongly recommended that you only sync the documents you need for working on while away from Scrivener and that you ensure the option is ticked to trim documents that are not being synced This will also help ensure that syncing remains as fast as possible 13 2 Synchronised Folders Scrivener lets you prepare a special external folder on your disk which it will use to keep the text contents of a project up to date as changes are made to the contents of this folder Because it works with simple flat list of files and a few built in folders the format is uniquely suited for integrating with various folder sharing services such as DropBox SugarSync MobileMe and others Using this feature you can share your work in progress with collaborators agents or editors and later read back any changes they have made directly into your project Additionally you could use the feature in conjunction with mobile applications which are aware of DropBox mak
60. numbering Ignore Title Prefix and Suffix For Specific documents can be set to ignore the prefix and suffix settings enabled in the Formatting pane subsection 25 3 2 Common examples would be the Table of Contents Acknowledgements and various Appendicies Note that the Inspector option Compile As Is can also be used to inhibit title prefix and suffix but also at the expense of dropping the title itself Update Scrivener links containing titles to include prefix suffix When Scrivener links directly reference a binder item title the compiler will be instructed to update the text of the link to match the final altered title Since the prefix and suffix field can contain special whitespace characters such as tabs and carriage returns these will be stripped out of the result Consequently you may wish to provide a separator using the Title prefix separator for inline links The value placed into this field will be inserted between the title and the prefix in replacement of whatever punctuation and special characters were used in the title prefix The Processing Options pane is available to all export formats 25 3 4 Separators Separators are used to automatically insert space breaks or custom symbols between the various elements in the list which will be compiled The important aspect to note is that by the time Compile gets to this point your document is being considered as a flat list of files It doesn t matter if a tex
61. numeric word or character goal that you intend to achieve with the section You can optionally use Growl notification to let you know when you ve reached your goal These notifications work in both ways whether you are working up to a number while writing or working down to a number while editing When enabled the footer bar will acquire a progress bar next to the target icon which will fill as you type gradually changing colour until you reach your quota These targets can be set individually for each document You may also monitor and set them using the Outliner by revealing the Target Target Type and Progress columns To disable the goal metre enter a value of 0 into the target configuration for the document 14 8 Viewing Media in the Editor The editor is capable of viewing most of the file types that you will need to interface with for research and creative use The footer bar will often change to provide tools for working with different media types Note that Scrivener is by and large not intended to operate as an editor for all types of files It would take years to design these features and in most cases your existing applications will do a better job of editing PDFs movies and images Consequently a convenient button will be provided in most media views making it simple to load the document in an external editor of your 134 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING choice Changes made to the file will be sa
62. or outdent lists with Tab and Tab Finally the Presets menu hooks into Scrivener s formatting preset system As with Apple s default system it is important to note that these are format and ruler brushes not word processor stylesheets They apply saved formats to the selected text or the caret position but once these have been applied they will not automati cally update later on if you change the preset To read more about Scrivener s style system see Formatting Presets Styles subsection 14 4 3 14 4 3 Formatting Presets Styles Previously known as Styles the new system changes the name to avoid confu sion with word processor styles which keep assigned ranges of text up to date with stylesheets The new system improves upon the management of presets and increases the reliability of custom keyboard shortcuts when applied to them by placing the styles into the Scrivener menu itself rather than in solely in toolbars The first time you run Scrivener you old Apple Styles should be converted to Presets automatically and can be found either in the Format Bar under the Presets drop down menu or in the Format Formatting Apply Preset sub menu There are two different types of presets available 1 Paragraph style This will save all of your ruler settings as well as alignment and line spacing attributes and anything else found in the Format Text sub menu 2 Character attributes This will
63. papers with words on them Delete the line you wrote in that item and it will turn into a stack of paper with an empty page in front Go ahead and right click and select Convert to Folder Nothing fundamental changed here You didn t lose any information the only thing that changed is the underlying type of the item which is really primarily a visual change When an item has other items beneath it but it is a file it is often referred to as a document stack or a file group but fundamentally it can act just like a folder does Let s test that theory Select one of your files in the binder You should see the text in that file as you always do But let s do the same thing we did earlier with the Folder click on the corkboard icon It will be empty but you are now looking at the corkboard for that file With the focus in the Corkboard press 38 N to make a new document An index card should appear just as if you were adding items to a folder In the binder you ll notice that the icon for this file has changed to the aforementioned stack of paper Perhaps you can better see why it is a good idea to think of the binder as an outliner instead of a glorified Finder What is all of this flexibility good for You don t have to be thinking in terms of constrictive structural elements as you flesh out the skeleton for your book You can just add items as you go building out new corkboards and changing things to folders or back to files
64. remain selected after you split making it easy to remove it or style it as a header Pro Tip You might also find the ability to search by formatting subsection 14 5 2 to be of use as well as often the places you will want to split the document will coincide with headers While the Find by Format panel is open you can use the Split with Selection as Title function without closing it and then quickly go to the next search result within the portion that has been split off If you wish to use keyboard shortcuts this means you can alternate between using 3 K to split the found text and 3 G to skip to the next search result When splitting documents all meta data will be carried over to both documents The only exception to this will be any snapshots They will remain attached to the original document everything falling before the split point and can thus be useful in seeing what a document looked like before it was split up It is thus a good idea to set up any common meta data before you start splitting up a document It is not possible to undo a split action but you can use the Merge feature to effec tively undo any unwanted splits 14 3 EDITING WITH SCRIVENER 115 Merging Documents Together In opposition to splitting the ability to select two or more documents and merge them together into a single document is also made easy with Scrivener Unlike the split function merging is a super document level action and thus requires
65. represented as a single piece but still large enough to require navigational assistance bookmarks could be a good strategy for approaching it If however the section of the book covers a number of separate topics which would benefit from outlining flexibility more relevant search context and fine grained meta data handling splitting it up into separate pieces is probably a better move D 2 Hidden Preferences D 2 1 Adjust Table of Contents Indent The ability to copy binder items and paste them as a rough Table of Contents can be adjusted by setting the default indent in points By default items relative to the top level of the ToC will be indented half an inch 36 points for each level To change this copy and paste the following into Terminal 285 286 APPENDIX D TIPS AND TRICKS defaults write com literatureandlatte scrivener2 SCRToCIndentLevel 18 Where the final value is the number of points you wish to indent by for each level This setting will also impact the offset of the secondary tab which can be used in the link prefix to offset numbering from the title D 2 2 Use Thick Dividers Since Leopard the use of single pixel dividers between interface elements has become the visual standard Some prefer the older look where the divider is an element that can be grabbed along any point easily rather than hunting for the pixel or using the drag strip at the bottom To set Scrivener to use thicker dividers paste this command i
66. right align text with the right indent set to the point of the tab stop Decimal Most often used for aligning rows of numbers so that the system decimal value is lined up vertically with everything before the decimal being right aligned and any fractional values left aligned To remove a tab stop simply drag it out of the ruler Using tab stops while writing is as simple as pressing the tab key to advance to the next available stop If there are no more tab stops available on that line the system will wrap around to the next line at the first tab stop This allows you to enter tabular information into a single line without creating multiple paragraphs To remove a tab from the line simply delete it as you would any other character Tabs can be viewed as symbols with Format Options Show Invisibles 14 4 2 The Format Bar The Format Bar is a new addition to Scrivener which provides easy access to common formatting features typically found in fewer quantities with the combined tab and margin ruler in other applications If you are looking for the tab and margin control you can still toggle that per text view with 3 R The visibility of the Format Bar is toggled with 38 R The first section Figure 14 2 of controls handle font face size and variant All of these tools act immediately on the currently selected text If no selection is given then they will alter how you type from the current caret position onward The first
67. set the search to only query a certain type of meta data or text field rather than everything All The default search mode Every available type of searchable field will be queried for matches 14 5 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 127 z Title Only the titles of binder items will be searched for This is similar to title filtering in the binder ea Text The text contents of files and folders will be queried Note this does not include notes and synopsis Notes The auxiliary document notes will be searched Note this does not include project notes Synopsis The synopsis field for each document will be searched This is anything that has been typed into the text area of an index card or in the synopsis portion of the outliner a Keywords Only keywords will be searched Note you can also perform keyword searches quickly by using the Keywords HUD z Label The text not colour of the label meta data will be searched Note the name of this meta data field can be changed per project Status The text of the status meta data will be searched Note the name of this meta data field can be changed per project Custom Meta Data The text values not meta data field name will be searched Operator Set the method by which search terms will be handled as you type them in Exact Phrase The default method What is typed into the field will be queried precisely as it is typed in the book will only match doc
68. shortcuts have two modes of operation If the pane in question is not visible the Inspector will open if necessary and switch to that pane If the keyboard shortcut is pressed while the particular pane is already visible it will be focussed This means you can always start typing in notes even if the Inspector is hidden by quickly tapping the corresponding keyboard shortcut twice The focus model is used in the panes like so Notes Immediate access to existing text so you can start writing and editing in notes immediately Switch between notepads with 38 6 and 3 6 References Selection is moved to the list so you can navigate with arrow keys tap Enter to activate a link or Del to remove a link from the list Keywords Selection is again moved to the list Use arrow keys to navigate between existing keywords tap Enter to add new keywords tap Del to remove keywords Snapshots Focus is moved to the text preview field so you can quickly copy and paste from here if necessary Comments amp Footnotes Focus is moved to the note list Use the up and down arrow keys to move between notes and jump to their corresponding position in the main document Enter to edit the text of an existing comment or footnote left and right arrows to collapse or reveal a note and Del to remove notes Chapter 18 JuickReterence QuickReference Panels give you the ability to open more than two documents at once They a
69. so well if you wish to share the template though Template variables let you place a special code in the place where text should occur and when the template is first loaded it will consult the user s address book for the relevant information The template codes are Code Description lt template_firstName gt lt template_last Name gt lt template_fullName gt lt template_street gt lt template_city gt lt template_ZIP gt lt template_country gt lt template_phoneNumber gt lt template_email gt lt template_projectName gt First name from address book Last name Combines the first and last name for you or dering them according to system language pref erences Street address City Postal code Country Work number if provided E mail address The name of the project from when it was cre ated Note this will not include the scriv por tion on the end If you wish to edit a template which has had template variables used such as many of the built in templates then follow these instructions 1 Create a new project 7 36 N 2 Select the template you wish to edit 3 Hold down the option key and click on the Choose button 4 You can let go of the option key and give the project a name This will inhibit the substitution of these tokens for their address book equivalents allowing you to edit the template file and then update it 42 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
70. standard OS X text view contextual menu commands such as Cut Copy Paste Spelling and so forth along with several commands specific to Scrivener Several common tools such as Spotlight searching dictionary access and selected word character counts and so forth have been moved to the Writing Tools sub menu Ifa selection has not already been made right clicking will select whatever word was under the mouse pointer In addition to the basic system tool there are also a number of additional com mands available The Scrivener specific commands the appearance of which will de pend on the selection are listed below Text Editing Contextual Menu z Split at Selection Splits the current document into two documents at the se lection point the current blinking cursor point or the initiating edge of the selection which will be on the left by default or on the right when using right to left languages z Split with Selection as Title Splits the current document into two documents using the current selected text as the title for the newly created document The selection will remain after splitting making it easy to remove the redundant 2Users of version 1 will want to note that the footer bar now counts word and character counts for the active selection whenever a selection is made in the editor This menu counter is available for scriptwriters and others who have disabled the footer bar view 14 2 EDITING BASICS 111 ti
71. sync click Continue 13 1 4 Step 2 Importing Documents From Simplenote The final part of the wizard allows you to choose to import documents that exist in Simplenote but which do not yet have corresponding files in the project Given that Simplenote is a general purpose note taking system there may be many notes in your 13 1 SIMPLENOTE 93 Simplenote Sync Project keyword MyNovel N Step 2 of 2 Select documents to import from Simplenote Import selected documents into Draft Mi Only show containers in destination list M Remove blank lines between paragraphs in imported notes __ Delete from Simplenote notes marked for this project but not selected for syncing Q Notes marked for this project Other notes 7 J Assign imported notes to project Red indicates notes apparently deleted from the project __ Show notes from other projects Opt click on checkboxes to select or deselect all Cancel gt Go Back 3 lt Continue _ Figure 13 3 Simplenote Sync Step two Simplenote account that you do not wish to import including notes belonging to other Scrivener projects This pane of the wizard therefore contains two lists The first list contains documents that seem to have been marked as belonging to this project These are documents that contain the project keyword see above on the first line of the note enclosed in brackets and which were not detected as already belonging to the pro
72. the 15 3 FULL SCREEN INSPECTOR HUD 151 word and character count for the document As with the standard editor this will also display the counts for any selected text using a blue label In scripting mode this portion of the HUD will display element hints much like in Final Draft and Montage as well as the element selection menu which you can always call up with s8 Y Background Fade Fades the background everything outside of the text column black by default but customisable via Preferences in and out Useful if you want to refer to material in other applications open in the background whilst remaining in full screen When using a backdrop image this slider will do noth ing Exit Full Screen The button at the far right will exit full screen mode You may also press the Esc key or 38 F to dismiss full screen 15 3 Full Screen Insoector HUD The full screen version of the inspector gives you near full access to the inspector data Use the top drop down menu to access the different data views Label and Status will always be visible at the bottom of this window For a full discussion on these views and what they represent read Meta Data Types section 10 1 and Inspector chapter 17 15 4 Customising Full Screen Appearance Most appearance controls can be set in the Full Screen preference pane section B 4 Refer to the documentation provided for this pane for greater detail on available op tions Most colour settings w
73. the Scrivener experience As it uses the convention of folders and files you might instinctively approach the binder as a sort of meta Finder but in actuality it s far better to think of the Binder in terms of being a bonafide outliner You might have been drawn to Scrivener for this very reason but because of the daunting number of things that must be learned all at once have found yourself falling back to using a simplified file is chapter approach The next section will demonstrate that it s not only easy to work more dynam ically but it will save you countless hours in the long run if you just take a few minutes to sort things out cut them up and allow your book to emerge as a gen uine outline That s what Scrivener s binder can do for you and unlike other word processor applications or plug ins that tout outlining capabilities you can use your own internal authorial outline which may or may not have anything to do with the actual construction of the book itself 8 1 3 Folders are Files are Folders As you no doubt instinctively know a folder is a place where you organise files You can create folders on your disk put files and even other folders inside of them to keep everything nice and tidy Let s throw away all of those notions for a moment and take a new fresh look at folders because in Scrivener folders are an entirely different animal Select a folder in one of your projects by clicking on it in the
74. the corkboard background Select Corkboard pattern to use the default corkboard background Custom color allows you to choose a background colour from the colour well on the right of the pop up button Custom background lets you select an image file from disk to use as the background image B 3 2 Fonts The options in this section let you alter the fonts used to draw index cards To change the font click the Select button to the right of the option you wish to adjust This will present the standard font selection palette and any choices you make here will be applied to the preview immediately 270 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES Index cards title font Lets you set the font used in the title area of index cards this affects the index cards both in corkboard mode and in the inspector Photographs title font If you have enabled Display images as photographs option the title of the image will be drawn below the thumbnail using this font choice Index cards text font Lets you set the font used in the text area of index cards affects index cards both in corkboard mode and in the inspector Status stamp font Lets you set the font and whether or not it should use bold face of the stamps that can be drawn diagonally over index cards in corkboard mode to show the status B 3 3 Dragging and Double Clicking Options for how index cards react to click and drag events as well as double clicks Allow drop ons When enabl
75. the flags altogether and export everything Filtering Filtering is an advanced feature marked as 4 which uses the selected contents list above and applies additional criteria to filter the list down further This works in a similar manner to searching for items only those items which match the criteria will be included in the compile compile contents png 186 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT As with the content drop down menu the changes you make here will impact what you can see in the list If when you first load up compile and are puzzled by an empty list check the Filter options and make sure nothing has been left set there from a prior session Filters can be defined in two ways set with the first drop down menu Include Everything matching the rest of the filter will be included in the com pile non matching items will be removed This is the default setting Exclude Everything matching will be removed from the compile The second drop down specifies which attribute you wish to filter by There are three options Documents with label Documents matching the Label specified in the third drop down menu will be matched and handled according to the logic in the first drop down menu This is the default setting Documents with status As above only using the Status meta data field instead of the Label field Documents in collection Will provide a list of available Collections for you in the thi
76. the top of the list such as Go To QuickReference Scrivener Link and more Add to Favorites Adds the selected item s to the favorite list Remove from Favorites Will remove the selected item s from the favorite list ignoring those selections which are not already there Clear Favorites Wipe out the entire favourite list with one command Manage Favorites Displays the Favorite Management Palette wherein you can change the order in which they will appear in the interface remove one or more selected items or drag new items into the palette to add them to the list Convert Provides tools for converting the document s type writing mode or for mat defaults z to Folder File Converts the selected item s to folders or files Note that these two types are very similar in Scrivener so this tool makes it easy to change your mind later about whether or not something should be a folder or a file Web Archive to Text Activates when viewing a WebArchive item Will analyse the archived page for its text content and create a rich text alter native that is editable and considered a text document from that point on ward Note this cannot be undone create a duplicate of the web archive first if you wish to retain a copy with its full layout z Formatting to Default Text Style If the font and ruler styles of the docu ment do not conform to the application or project defaults you can use this comma
77. the visibility of the colour selection palette Note that Scrivener uses this palette in a number of different places not strictly related to text colour Copy Paste Font lt C xX8 V Copies the font settings from the cur rent cursor position Use Paste Font to applies these settings to other selections of text Text Displays the standard OS X Text submenu which contains useful tools for controlling the paragraph level formatting of your text Paragraph alignment and spacing can also be controlled with the The Format Bar subsection 14 4 2 z Align Left Center Justify Right Controls the text alignment of the cur rent paragraph or all paragraphs falling within a selection range Keep with Next Inserts an invisible character which will keep this para graph together with the next paragraph so that they will not become sep arated by a page break 258 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS a Writing Direction Toggle between Left to Right and Right to Left writ ing styles Copy Paste Ruler 8 C s8 V Copies the ruler and paragraph for mat settings from the current paragraph Use Paste Ruler to apply these settings to other selections of text Table Provides tools for adding and manipulating tabular data in the text editor Tables can be set up with a given number of rows and columns but using the options in this menu you can add or remove either to fit the constraints of your data later
78. these things will impact much of the interface A good example is the Draft a place where your manuscript in progress is built This can be called whatever you like and what you name it will impact the names of menu items that refer to it In all cases this documentation will refer to these malleable elements by their default names In cases where file paths are printed the UNIX convention of providing a short hand to describe your personal home folder will be used An example might look like Documents The tilde is a shorthand which means Users yourusername In this case it would refer to the Documents folder in your home folder Chapter 3 What S New Scrivener 2 is a major revision featuring comprehensive overhauls of the interface to make it even more intuitive and easy to use It includes a substantial list of long awaited new features such as a better style system non linear collections of docu ments free form corkboards better snapshot integration and much more We un derstand that you are a busy person and while new software can be fun for some others just want to keep working in the ways they are used to Scrivener 2 has been designed so that the majority of the new features will not get in your way until you want them When you first start using version 2 you should be up and running in the way you are accustomed with a minimal period of transition When you do get the time to explore the new features
79. this will be printed depends on the view mode and all of the settings for this can be accessed with File Page Setup above For more information see Document Printing section 27 1 Compile 38 Compile is the standard method for producing a manuscript out of all the pieces in the Draft This feature provides an immense degree of flexibility and is fully documented in Compiling the Draft chapter 25 A 3 Edit Menu The Edit menu contains options related to editing All of the standard Mac Edit menu items with which you will be familiar from such programs as TextEdit can be found here including cut copy paste and find along with a large complement of Scrivener specific features Undo amp Redo 38 Z amp 38 Z Undoes or redoes the last change Undo and Redo work mainly for edits made to text but they do work for some basic outlining changes too where that change does not cause the current document to change in the editor Each document has its own Undo history which means you can easily go back to another document and revert changes independently of other documents 234 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Cut Copy and Paste 38 X 38 C and sg V Cut copy and paste act exactly as they do in other applications Note that they only operate in a text editing context and not on binder documents or meta data See Documents Menu section A 6 for document management commands Scrivener also supplies addit
80. tion 8 4 to supply yourself with your favourite starter documents Compile settings since Compile settings are stored in the project preferences you can set these up so that your future projects will be ready for one click export or close to it Generic collections standard collections as well as saved search collections can be placed in a template as well though initially they will probably be empty Starter story structure set up your favourite story building techniques The important concept to keep in mind is that when it comes to the content of what you can do with a project a template is identical There are a few differences most pertain to how it is loaded and the explanatory information and thumbnail that can be saved with it but for what will be saved consider it no different than an ordinary project Try not to worry about getting everything perfect the first time through On average it will take at least half a dozen new projects before things start to settle down It is easy to updated existing templates with revised starting parameters by simply naming them identically with the template you wish to update Once you have set everything up use the File Save as Template menu item to start the template creation process In the Template Information box provide the following details Title The visible title of the template what will appear beneath the thumbnail in the template browser Cate
81. to a corkboard Other ideas build around them and you might even write out a few paragraphs and pin them behind the index card with which they are associated At this stage the index cards have no particular order 3 Eventually you may begin to see an order emerging and repin the index cards accordingly 4 After you have gathered enough material you might take all of your index cards sheets of paper and jottings and place them into a ring binder You are still free to move everything around but now you have a good idea of how much work you have done and how much more work you have to do Scrivener is thus a nonlinear writing tool that provides the writer with all of the features found in any text editor along with the functionality for growing your work organically within the program itself Chapter 2 About This Manual This manual has been written using Scrivener and is available in three different for mats If you purchased a boxed copy of Scrivener you should have a printed version of it available for desktop reference It can also be accessed as a PDF from the Help menu under User Manual You should also find two copies which have been spe cially formatted to be printed on either US Letter or A4 standard printer paper on our website Lastly the Scrivener project used to author the manual has been pro vided to you as a demonstration of writing in Scrivener and can be downloaded from the Support section of the L
82. to call Full Screen from the editor itself When you first enter full screen you will see your document in the middle of the screen set to a pinkish grey paper colour and blocking the rest of the screen a black background Nearly every aspect of this experience can be changed some right within Full Screen mode You will also briefly see the Full Screen HUD detailed below To retrieve it slide the mouse pointing down to the bottom of the screen and let it sit for a moment So long as the mouse remains in the HUD area it will stay visible Once moved back up it will disappear out of view 149 150 CHAPTER 15 FULL SCREEN The menu bar can be accessed by similarly sliding the mouse pointer to the top of the screen After a momentary pause the menu will appear This is a useful way to access advanced formatting tools and even navigate around in your project using the View Go To sub menu without leaving full screen 15 1 Using a Background Image You can replace the default solid background colour with an image of your choosing by accessing the View Full Screen Backdrop menu The image will be scaled to fit your screen using the maximum height or width whichever is better This can mean that if the image does not match your screen s aspect ratio the background colour may still be visible along the sides or top and bottom 15 2 Full Screen HUD The full screen control panel contains various controls for manipulating the inte
83. to display in whatever manner they provide Most of the simpler e readers such as those embedded into specific purpose devices will only use Title and Author but many desktop readers such as Adobe Digital Editions and Calibre will make use of as much meta data as you can throw at it The two fields which you will want to be more careful with are Language Code and the custom unique identifier Make sure you use the correct ISO two letter ab breviation for the language the book is written in If you do not wish to provide a custom identifier Scrivener will generate one for you based on the author title and date If your publisher has provided a unique identifier for you then you can check the box and type in your own 214 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT 20 4 Available Compile Formats The table below shows all the formats supported by Scrivener with commentary on their usage For most word processor based workflows including Microsoft Word RTF is the best option Nearly every word processor provides solid RTF import and export capabilities and some use RTF as their native file format The one major exception to this is Pages which has limited RTF support Note that if you double click on RTF files in the Finder they will most likely be opened in TextEdit by default which doesn t support all RTF features to open an RTF file in your desired word processor you should open the word processor first and use File Open 25 4 1
84. to the current document ivi Only show containers in destination list Cancel EO EA Figure 9 3 Create a New Linked Document The Destination drop down menu provides a list of all the containers in the project binder Use this to select where the new document should be created By default it will select the Research folder for you If you have unchecked Only show containers in destination list then the drop down menu will display all items in the binder allowing you to form new containers by creating new items beneath existing documents The Title field is where you type in the name of the new binder item which will be created It does not need to match the text of the link The Link to Existing Document tab will provide a browser with which you can look for an existing binder item and link to it Using this method is very similar to right clicking on the text and selecting an item from the Scrivener Link sub menu and is mainly provided as a convenience for people using the 8 L shortcut to create new links or wiki linking discussed below Suggestions Ifthe selected text contains material that is found in existing binder item titles these matching titles will be added to the menu as well as suggestions This is handy when you have typed out the name of a Binder item and wish to create a link to it This section will not appear if no suggestions are found 3If this is hard to understand I sugge
85. to warrant a scroller and disappear when there is not Auto hiding scrollbar uses text color The scroller will take on the colour of the text as set using Override text color see above and will only appear when the cursor is over it Move the cursor to the edge of the paper area to get this scroller to appear This is an unobtrusive scroll bar that gets out of your way when you don t need it and fits in with the the retro green on black full screen look that a lot of users like No scroller Full screen mode will not feature a scroll bar under any circum stances if this is selected B 4 3 Insertion Point Caret Adjust the behaviour of the insertion point to increase visibility Disable insertion point blinking When enabled the cursor will be always visible on the screen Use block insertion point of n pixels Adjust the width of the insertion point from its default of 1 pixel This will dramatically increase the visibility of it however with variable width fonts like Optima this setting can produce odd results It is best used with a fixed width font like Courier B 4 4 Margins Sets the margin spacing between the text and the paper edge You can select a dif ferent distance for horizontal and vertical margins The top and bottom margin will only affect the very top and bottom of the document on the page B 4 5 Default Settings for New Projects You can dynamically adjust all of the following o
86. tools to all modes Containing text Limits the search to only return results in which the specified text falls within the highlight range Search in There are two choices available All Documents will search all text doc uments in the binder Selected Documents will constrict the search to only those items you have currently selected in the sidebar or a view If you leave all of the criteria types empty it is possible to use this panel to find all instances of the particular formatting type The rest of the panel will change depending upon the current formatting mode As with the standard text Find panel it can be left floating over the project window as you click the Next and Previous buttons allowing you to edit immediately after coming across a match and then going back to search without having to call up the palette again The rest of this section will go over each of the individual formatting search types Highlighted Text Looks for text that has been highlighted using the highlight feature section 16 3 Limit search to color When enabled only those highlights matching the chosen colour will be found If this is disabled all highlight colours will be consid ered a match Note that the colour must be precisely the same so stick to using swatches or the built in highlighter defaults when using this tool Click once on the colour chip to bring up the colour palette or right click to select from the system default
87. use this option z Preserve line spacing All of the spacing options including paragraph spacing will be left alone z Remove first paragraph indents When checked will use the common typeset ting standard which only indents paragraphs subsequent to the first paragraph relieving you of the burden of having to do that by hand throughout your manuscript z On new pages only Narrows the above option down so that it only applies to first paragraphs following a page break 194 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Structural Options Compile ignoring levels outside of the current compile group If checked compilation ignores other levels and documents outside the current compile group when calculating auto numbering and formatting Individual Document Title Options Ignore Title Prefix and Suffix For Allows you to turn off any title prefixes and suffixes set in the Formatting pane for individual documents Scrivener Link Title Options v Update Scrivener links containing titles to include prefix suffix Title prefix separator for inline links The title prefix separator replaces blank lines and punctuation between the prefix and title so that inline links don t get broken across lines Figure 25 5 Compile Processing Options Pane The Preserve Formatting only preserves section adjusts how the For mat gt Formatting Preserve Formattingfeature works subsection 14 4 5 By default this featur
88. used symbols and typographic conventions by detecting when their use is appropriate Not all text entry areas are capable of using substitutions but they will always be available in the main text editors Note that if you are using the MultiMarkdown export system it is best to leave typographic substitutions disabled as it will handle all of that automatically after export and in some cases special characters can confuse the exporter Use smart quotes will convert inch and foot characters into typographic quotes also referred to as curly quotes as you type according to your system lan guage settings To customise these click the System Text Preferences button that is provided at the bottom of the window Replace double hyphens with em dashes Replace triple periods with ellipses Disable smart quote em dash and ellipsis substitution in script mode The above three options will be ignored in script mode Superscript ordinals When numbers are typed with a following ordinal the ordinal will be superscripted and set to a smaller font Automatically detect web addresses and Scrivener links If you start typing in a web address Scrivener will automatically generate a web link for it so you can click on it and open the link in your web browser Scrivener document titles can be linked to by surrounding the title in brackets For more information on this feature see Scrivener Links section 9 5 Symb
89. within the book will be displayed in a single section with linear number from start to finish When disabled notes will be broken apart into sections based on the ToC break points and numbering will restart for each section 210 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT For more information and helpful tips on creating e books read Creating an eBook subsection 25 4 5 SVG This is an advanced feature which will allow you to insert SVG code instead of using a bitmap image If you have been provided with SVG artwork code by a designer or have created one yourself use the SVG button to access the sheet The text area labelled SVG Code is where you will paste the vector format code You will need to manually specify a default view box size Get this information from your designer the graphics program you used to create the SVG code or from the XML itself The actual size used is less important than maintaining the original aspect ratio Incorrect aspect ratio values the factor between height and width will cause the graphic to become either too squat or squashed You will need to research which SVG standard your target readers will be using Most readers are capable of understanding SVG 1 0 and SVG 1 1 including SVG 1 1 Basic When copying the XML code make sure not to include the XML declaration and doctype lines Only paste the SVG element and its contents This will be the line starting with lt svg version 1 1 id Layer_1
90. you choose to identify the documents you wish to sync as recommended you are presented with separate lists for documents contained in the Draft folder and all other text documents in the project Simplenote is text only so you can only choose text documents You should go through and tick the documents you wish to upload to Simplenote for editing while on the go All documents that have already been uploaded and exist in Simplenote will be ticked for syncing automatically The icons next to the document titles will tell you what will happen when you choose to sync as follows The following options are available Take snapshots of affected documents before updating When ticked Scrivener will take a snapshot of documents being updated before overwriting them with the new version of the text This ensures that you can return to the earlier version if something goes wrong with the sync process It is therefore highly 92 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING Icon Meaning Green check The document is up to date both in the project and on the Simplenote servers the version in the project is the same as the version in Simplenote Up arrow The document will be uploaded This indicates either that the version of the document in the Scrivener project is newer than the one in Simplenote or that it has not yet been uploaded at all and is now selected for syncing Downarrow The document will be downloaded This indicates that there is a newe
91. 69 170 171 171 174 175 176 177 178 179 182 182 183 183 214 221 iv 27 Printing 27 1 Document Printing 27 2 Printing Index Cards 27 3 Printing Outlines 27 4 Compile and Print 27 5 Page Setup d4aesecs V Advanced 28 Using MultiMarkdown 28 1 What is Markdown 28 2 What is MultiMarkdown 28 3 MultiMarkdown and SONVENEP a OF pa re ewes 28 4 Importing MultiMark down Files 28 5 Exporting MultiMark down Files 28 6 Updating MultiMarkdown 28 7 Further Information A Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts Al A 2 Scrivener Menu File Menu 222 222 222 222 222 222 223 224 224 225 225 226 226 227 227 229 229 230 A 3 A 4 AS A 6 A 7 A 8 AY CONTENTS Edit Menu View Menu Project Menu 466 50s Documents Menu Format Menu Window Menu Help Menu B Preferences B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 B 9 B 10 General 0 654446 a Appearance 25 84 55 4 Corkboard 2400 45 6444 Full Screen o n Navigation e oes BUG sates an 2s ee POrmateine eeraa ceas Auto Correction Import and Export Back p pacea seeds C Replacement Tokens D Tips and Tricks D 1 D 2 Bookmarks or Small Files Hidden Preferences 233 239 249 250 256 260 261 262 262 265 266 270 273 275 277 279 280 282 284 285 285 285 About This E
92. 79 No extension documents with no extension get imported into Scrivener as plain text files note that this can often be a source of confusion if you try to import an RTF file that has no rtf extension when you import it into Scrivener you will see all of the RTF syntax because it will be imported as plain text make sure you add the rtf extension before importing to ensure that Scrivener recognises it as an RTF file As well as these text file types Scrivener also supports all of the main image file types TIF JPG GIF PNG BMP etc all of the main QuickTime formats MOV MPG WAV MP3 etc PDF files and HTML HTM and webarchive file types for importing saved web pages 11 1 2 Web Page Web Page This lets you enter the URL of a web page that you would like to import into Scrivener The web page will be imported as a web archive into the Scrivener project note that you can convert it to a text file afterwards by using Doc uments Convert Web Archive to Text should you wish to edit the file Note that web pages cannot be imported into the Draft which only supports text so you must ensure that a non Draft item in the binder is selected for this item to be available 11 1 3 MultiMarkdown File This imports a MultiMarkdown text file into the project by splitting it into multiple files based on its structure and recreating that structure in the binder The Meta data block will be inserted as the first document at the top
93. Compile button choose a name and location for your RTF file and once the dialogue box dismisses open the file using the Finder It should open in your preferred word processor or TextEdit As you can see all of the test lines you typed in are there separated by hash marks in between the sections as well those came from the Compiler too as a part of the Novel preset This can be turned off or changed entirely Let s try one more thing Switch back to Scrivener and open up the Compile sheet again Leave everything the same but this time click the down arrow which appears to the right of the Format As drop down menu The full Compile interface will appear and with that you ll be able to see just how much power is available Feel free to explore the interface Many of the options are self explanatory but if you find yourself confused over something read the chapter on Compiling the Draft chap ter 25 There is much more to learn but if you are in the middle of a major project and want to get started right away you should now know enough to make a simple outline and start writing content into that outline and then compile this as a simple draft As you ve seen from the amount of flexibility we ve demonstrated you can rest easy on the topic of doing things the right way from the start Unlike many programs Scrivener makes it easy to change your mind later on Folders can become files items can be easily re arranged and s
94. ER 14 WRITING AND EDITING 14 11 2 Custom Auto completion 14 12 Text Bookmarks Text bookmarks are useful when you wish to quickly mark a spot in your text in a way that can be easily recalled later on or for marking out sections of text in longer documents There are two types of bookmarks 1 Bookmark Annotation This is your standard bookmark Great for quickly marking a spot for later editing quick navigation or whatever you require 2 Bookmark Header Annotation Will create an offset label in the bookmark navi gation menu indenting regular bookmarks beneath it until another header style bookmark is encountered Useful for documents with many bookmarks Bookmarks work by placing a special marking at the beginning of a paragraph or line and there are two tools for doing this without disrupting your writing process Use the Edit Insert gt Bookmark Annotation menu command or 8 B to place the marker at the front of the current paragraph without moving your cursor Use Edit Insert gt Bookmark Header Annotation to insert a header style annotation in asimilar fashion as a standard annotation Custom bookmark labels Bookmarks are simply an inline annotation starting with an asterisk and a space The first few words of the line following will be used to label the bookmark in the navigation menu If you wish to provide a custom label add it to the annotation after the asterisk and the rest of the line will be ignored The
95. Export a plain text MultiMarkdown file useful for archiving or further custom post processing tex Exports a LaTeX format file with full Multi Markdown parsing Note that if you are in tending to export a LaTeX file that has been handwritten in Scrivener without MMD you should use the plain text exporter above rtf Export an HTML derived RTF file with partial MultiMarkdown support Note that the RTF files generated in this fashion will be limited in features and formatting support in the same way as HTML and is not equivalent to Scrivener s standard RTF exporter in the word processor compatibility tables html Generates a W3C compliant XHTML file suit able for web publishing or further XML post processing 25 4 AVAILABLE COMPILE FORMATS 217 Supported Features Application Best Format Comments Footnotes Lists Images Headers Footers ToC Microsoft Word RTF X X X X X X Nisus Writer Pro RTF X X X X X X OpenOffice org RTF X X X X RedleX Mellel RTF X X X X X Papyrus RTF X X X Apple Pages RTFD X X TextEdit Cocoa Misc RTFD X X Endnotes are not recognised and will be lost with Papyrus Always use footnotes Endnotes are not recognised and will be lost with Papyrus Always use footnotes ToC Support for Scrivener s Table of Contents feature including RTF Book marks While technically two different features word processors that support one will usually support the other so they have been combined
96. Find and Replace As with many Mac OS X applications you are provided with a standard Find and Replace panel which can be called up in any text view with s F Note that the find panel operates only on single text views To replace text in all documents use Project Replace see below to search for text in all documents use Project Search also be low In addition to the buttons available in the panel there are some keyboard shortcuts you can learn which can reduce the reliance upon clicking within the panel to carry out searches 3 G finds the next available match will wrap around to the top of the docu ment if there are no more matches available below the current point 4 3 G finds the previous match as above but will wrap around to the bottom of the document 124 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING 3 E loads the currently selected text into the Find field Using this method you can define a search term and then use 38 6 to find the next instance of that term without even opening the panel at all 14 5 2 Find by Format and Text Function The Formatting Finder palette Edit Find Find by Formatting 3 F gathers to gether a number of powerful project wide search tools for otherwise difficult to lo cate things such as italicised text cross links revision markings and so on The basic panel has a drop down menu at the top which is the primary formatting mode selector Below that there are two common
97. For instance you might use a wordsJammed Together version of your project title such as MyGreatNovel NOTE It is important to understand that Scrivener has no way of knowing which documents in Simplenote are associated with which Scrivener project without this keyword so it is up to the user to choose a unique keyword for each project If two projects have the same keyword you could run into problems with each trying to sync the other s documents in Simplenote 90 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING _ Simplenote Sync Configuration Click the button in the top right to learn how best to use this feature Email Password Remember in keychain Project keyword This is used for finding project documents in Simplenote http simplenoteapp com Cancel Go Back Continue Figure 13 1 Simplenote Sync Configuration The project keyword is also very useful for viewing notes in Simplenote because you can use it as a search term to filter Simplenote so that only documents from your project are shown in its file list In addition Scrivener will add this project keyword as a tag to each document so you can view by tags to isolate notes corresponding to a specific project Once you have entered your login details and ensured that a project keyword has been supplied click on Continue You won t be prompted for the project keyword or login details next time you sync the project with Simp
98. For example if the focus is in the bottom editor of a horizontal split the label for 38 0 will be in Bottom Editor as QuickReference Opens the selected document in a QuickReference Win dow rather than any active or inactive splits in QuickLook This menu command is only available for types of files which Scrivener does not recognise It will hook into the Mac s QuickLook sys tem and display that file according to its QuickLook settings With All Subdocuments If the selected item has sub documents this can be determined on the corkboard if the index card appears as a stack of cards and in the outliner if it has an arrow beside it s name you can choose to open it as a corkboard either in the current editor or the other split On Editor Corkboard 38 0 Replaces the current editor view with the selected item s contents This is similar to pressing 38 DownArrow in the Finder On Other Editor Corkboard As with above but uses the split editor to open the item instead of replacing the current view in External Editor 38 O This command is available on any type of item that is not a text or folder document It will open the file using the default editor for that type of file An example would be opening a picture in Preview Opening items this way allows them to be edited in their native applications and the results of those edits if Scrivener can display the file type will be visible upon saving that file
99. G THE DRAFT altered formatting in particular indents and line spacing will be lost Only use this option if you absolutely need native doc files and RTF does not work with the target word processor 25 4 2 Special Note on Pages Pages is a unique word processor in that it has limited RTF support Compounding this its proprietary pages format is unpublished and has no officially supported mechanisms for allowing applications to read and save to the format However there is one loophole that can be used to get information from Scrivener to Pages with minimal loss of formatting its support of Microsoft Word s doc and docx formats Unfortunately as noted in the previous section Scrivener does not actually pro duce native doc files as this is a proprietary format for which only basic exporters are available to most Mac programs and for the same reasons its docx export is very basic and involves the loss of certain formatting So while Scrivener allows access to these basic exporters they will not suffice for what most people need This means that if you use the RTF format for exporting to Pages formatting will be lost because Pages does not fully support RTF but if you use doc or docx for matting will be lost because Scrivener only has basic exporters for these formats The preferred method for getting data from Scrivener to Pages thus takes three steps 1 Produce a quality RTF file from Scrivener 2 Open the RTF file
100. It is also possible to manually enable a view mode allowing you to easily flesh out a single document with new index cards For the most part Scrivener will anticipate what you are trying to do and react accordingly If you click on a single text file it will display the contents of that text file in the editor If you then click on a folder containing that file it will automatically switch to your preferred view mode the one which you used last A key principle is that view modes are just that They are alternative ways of viewing a Binder Item and thus like the Binder are methods for organisation All documents in the Binder can both contain text and children This is a departure from how most applications work where the only way to organise items into other items is to use a Folder Scrivener doesn t restrict you to that and indeed even allows you to convert a text file to a folder and back again Consequently even though it selects the most appropriate view mode depending upon what you click on you can always override the default For folders you can turn off the current view mode and read or add text to it For files you can select a view mode manually When performing the latter you will most likely be presented with an empty corkboard or outliner This is fine because you can still go ahead and add items to that view and in doing so you will add children automatically to that file This is a great way of expanding scenes and fles
101. Next Collection Select the next Collection tab in the stack Previous Collection Select the previous Collection tab in the stack 242 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS The rest of this menu will be populated by the existing available collections in the reverse order that they appear in tabs It will always include an entry for the binder and Search Results Selecting an entry will switch the sidebar to viewing that collection making this menu useful when the tabs are not visible or for assigning keyboard shortcuts to oft used collections Layout The commands in the Layout Sub menu affect the main window elements Show Hide Binder 38 B Toggles whether or not the binder subsec tion 5 1 2 sidebar is visible on the left of the main window You can hide the binder to concentrate on editing or composing the current document if you so wish Show Hide Inspector 38 1 Toggles whether or not the Inspector subsec tion 5 1 5 is visible on the right of the main window The inspector displays all meta data for the current document including synopsis and notes The inspector is hidden by default No Split s8 Split Horizontally x28 Split Vertically Commana These commands allow you to choose how to view the main editor in the main window For more information on using splits see Splitting the Editor section 14 9 Swap Editors Only available when Split Horizontally or Split Vertically is se lected see above
102. SETTING UP META DATA including titles and no reformatting of the text will be done Text will always be included even if it would otherwise be excluded As with the above two items this checkbox has no meaning for items outside of the Draft 10 1 6 Custom Meta Data When you need to keep track of more details than the default meta data options pro vide adding custom fields to your project can be a valuable move Custom fields are fundamentally free form text labels Setting them up is done using the Project Meta Data Settings control in the third tab For each column you wish to add press the button and supply a field title Each field has two options Wrap Text Useful for fields where you want to display all of the entered text even if that text causes the row to expand in height in the outliner Unwrapped columns will only ever show the first line of text unless you edit the field Colored Text When checked the colour selection tool at the bottom will be enabled allowing you to customise the text colour for this column Text colour will be displayed in the inspector and outliner columns As with label and status fields can be re ordered by dragging rows in the configu ration table Custom meta usage is generally limited to the inspector and outliner though it can also be exported along with the rest of the meta data when compiling exporting binder items and printing 10 1 7 Exporting Meta data All meta data can be
103. Scrivener when you ex port to RTF you will find that the tables and lists are stripped out This is because certain limitations in the OS X system can cause crashes or strange results during the RTF conversion process in situations where tables and bulleted lists clash with the boundaries of annotations and footnotes If you require such elements it is thus recommended that you format them at a later stage of the draft in a dedicated word processor 16 1 Inline Notation 16 1 1 Inline Annotations Material not finished 16 1 2 Inline Footnotes Material not finished 16 1 3 Finding Inline Notations Material not finished 16 2 Linked Notation 16 2 1 Linked Comments Material not finished 153 154 CHAPTER 16 ANNOTATING AND MARKING YOUR TEXT 16 2 2 Linked Footnotes Material not finished 16 2 3 Finding Linked Notations Material not finished 16 3 Text Colour and Highlights 16 4 Marking Revisions 16 4 1 Setting a Revision Level 16 4 2 Marking Existing Text 16 4 3 Removing a Revision Level 16 4 4 Removing all Revision Markings 16 4 5 Finding Revision Markings Chapter 17 Inspector The inspector displays all meta data associated with the document shown in the editor pane that most recently had the keyboard focus Note that the special root folders in the binder Draft Research and Trash have no meta data associated with them and therefore the inspector just shows the project notes or references when t
104. Searching and Replacing section 14 5 How to search for information in your project and perform powerful project wide search and replace actions QuickReference chapter 18 Taking QuickLook to the next level Open items in persistent editable windows When two splits aren t enough use QuickRef erences Annotating and Marking Your Text chapter 16 Learn how to comment as you write using either Scrivener s exclusive in line annotation tool or linked comments Also covers footnotes endnotes marker highlighting and revision pens Inspector chapter 17 All about the inspector which displays document meta data notation references and more Scriptwriting chapter 19 While Scrivener is not meant to replace an indus trial strength scriptwriting tool it can still function as a very adept first draft scriptwriting solution and produce exports which will work seamlessly in in dustry standard applications like Final Draft 13 4 INDEX CARD FOR IPAD 107 Bibliography Management chapter 20 If your book requires extensive cita tion management Scrivener has methods for integrating with the most popular citation databases Backing Up Your Work section 7 6 Avoid the catastrophe of lost data Scrivener s automated backup service will keep your data safe Also learn about manual backups Chapter 14 Writing and Editing Scrivener uses the standard OS X text engine for rendering its text and t
105. Store Any Kind of File A new advanced feature which must be enabled in prefer ences allows you to drag any type of file into your project When accessed Scrivener will let you load it in an external editor that supports that file type Unlike references these files will be stored with your project turning it into a hub for all your file types 3 1 HUNDREDS OF OTHER IMPROVEMENTS 13 Full Screen Backdrop Now you can customise your full screen experience by choosing images from your hard drive Improved Navigation New keyboard shortcuts let you traverse the binder from right within the editor session No more switching back and forth between binder and editor to select the next document Expanded Export Features More of your work can now be saved when using the Export feature Include all of your Snapshots as well Multiple Project Notepads Project notes can still be accessed in the inspector just like you are used to but now you can also load them in a separate window which has been designed to look like a tabbed notebook Add new tabs to have multiple notebooks and these will be accessible from the inspector as well Now you can have both your document notes and project notes available at the same time Format Bar The new format bar collects the most common formatting tools into a single compact space No more hunting around in menus or messing with font palettes The margin and tab stop ruler has been separated and simplified so n
106. Title D This is the default method in most application The entire item including all of its children if it has any will be duplicated and it will be provided with a unique name automatically without Subdocuments 4 D Also referred to as Simple Duplicate in prior versions of Scrivener this is most useful when you only want to duplicate the container of an item by itself such as a chapter folder but not all of the scenes within it In this case a unique name will not be provided Set Selection as Title 3 T Available when text has been selected in the main editor the title for the current document will be replaced with whatever text has been selected Split Provides two methods for splitting the current document into two different documents In both cases everything below the current cursor position will be moved into a new document below the current one Everything above the cursor will remain unchanged This action cannot be undone except via the Merge command z at Selection 38 K Simply create a new document with all text below the current caret position In cases where text has been selected the caret position will be considered as the start of the selection range with Selection as Title lt 38 K Works the same as above but in this case the currently selected text will be used to title the new document that is created rather than requesting a new document name after pressing the shortc
107. Tricks D 1 Bookmarks or Small Files Scrivener 2 0 introduces a new feature called text bookmarks which make it possible to insert markers into your files which can be used to populate a menu in the header bar for rapid navigation within a document In the past the best way to go about breaking apart a large section of a book was to split it up into separate files in the binder and use Scrivenings to view them all together when necessary Bookmarks makes it possible to avoid that in cases where you deem it is appropriate and provides flexibility for those who prefer to work in longer sections rather than lots of short sections There are a few things to consider when deciding between the two methods Scrivener still retains all of its prior power when it comes to managing lots of small pieces of text In fact if anything this level of power has been dramatically increased in the new version So if you are already used to working in that method there is no reason to switch to using bookmarks Small portions of text will still remain more useful in terms of search results When you have your text broken down into smaller pieces project searches produce more relevant search results because only the context of the returned items is displayed no scrolling through ten pages wondering why a particular document matched your search criteria So a good rule of thumb to follow could be if the overall theme or context of a file is similar enough to be
108. User Manual Scrivener 2 0 erat fat Literature amp Latte July 2010 Revision 2 0 01 2010 Literature amp Latte LTD All rights reserved Contents Contents About This Edition Acknowledgements I Introduction 1 Philosophy 2 About This Manual 2 1 Terms and Conventions 3 What s New 3 1 Hundreds of Other Im provements 4 Installation and Upgrading 4 1 REgIStEring iss ae ele eo 6 4 2 Application Updates 4 3 Upgrading from Scrivener 1 ose eee 5 Interface 5 1 Interface Overview 5 2 View Modes 5 3 Full Screen Interface 6 Quick Tour 6 1 Project Format sessao 6 2 The Main Window 6 3 Outlining Your Draft 6 4 Compiling the Draft II Preparation 7 Project Management ii iii 16 18 23 25 26 26 28 28 31 34 36 Toh ae Vee 7 4 Z 7 6 Project Size Limitations Creating a New Project Saving and Making Copies Opening Existing Projects Templates 4545 Backing Up Your Work 8 Setting Up the Binder 8 1 How the Binder is Or ganised cn ate dae cake 8 2 Binder Controls 8 3 Using Collections 8 4 Document Templates 9 Navigating and Organising 9 1 General Navigation 9 2 Go To Menu 93 Hoisting the Binder 9 4 Locking the Editor 9 5 Scrivener Links 9 6 Using Favourites 97 Layouts Panel i 644 5 10 Setting Up Meta Data 10 1 Meta Data Types
109. When projects are open the Send to Project sub menu will provide you with a list of all opened projects There are two ways of bringing notes into the project 1 Append Text To The contents of the selected note will be appended after any existing text of the document you select in the project sub menu A list of your entire binder will be arranged so you can easily select any text item Note that media files will not be listed since they can not have text appended to them 2 Import as Sub Document Of A new document will be created beneath the se lected document This sub menu operates in a similar fashion to the above though it will allow you to select any of the items in the binder since all types can contain children The name of the scratch pad note will be used to populate the title field for the new document Since Scratch Pad does not store your notes in any projects it uses ordinary RTFD files which by default will be stored in your Documents folder under Scrivener Scratch Pad Notes These are ordinary files that you can edit with other programs or you can even make your own RTF files in this directory making it possible to add notes while Scrivener is not even open To change the location of where notes are stored use the General preferences pane section B 1 You may also set up a system wide shortcut that will make it possible to toggle the visibility of this panel while in other applications Scrivener must be open
110. abelled the Alt key on some keyboards depending on which country you purchased your Mac from Some laptops only have one Option key on the left side Control is usually located to the left of the Option key Some laptops only have one Control key between the Option key and the Fn key z Fn If you have a laptop or a newer Apple keyboard you might have a Function key available Scrivener tends to avoid this key since not everyone has one available a N The Shift keys are rarely used by themselves in shortcuts but are often used on combination with other modifier keys When a keyboard shortcut requires a combination of modifier keys they will be printed together Example 3 V which matches Edit Paste and Match Style means you should hold down all three of these modifier keys and then tap the V key on your keyboard The hyphen is used to separate the modifier keys from the target key and is not meant to be included in the shortcut itself Interface elements will be capitalised as proper nouns to help differentiate them from standard nouns when appropriate A Collection is an interface element while the word collection can be used to indicate a casual grouping of items and not nec essarily a formal Collection http www literatureandlatte com scrivChangel ist php 2 1 TERMS AND CONVENTIONS 7 Some of the names for various elements within Scrivener are customisable on a per project basis and how you name
111. ad data entered into it an asterisk will appear in the upper right corner of the button The sub panes are listed in the order they appear 1 Meta data and Notes 2 Meta data and References 3 Meta data and Keywords 4 Snapshots 5 Linked Text Notes In the above screenshot the displayed document has references keywords and snapshots but no document notes or marginalia The lock icon at the end locks the inspector so that you can reference the material in it even when switching to a different split 22 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE The first three sub panes include general meta data in addition to their specialised information These sections can be collapsed by clicking the disclosure arrow on the left side of the header bar for each The two meta data sections are as follows Synopsis amp Image The top frame can show either the synopsis for the binder item which is what also appears in the index card representation of the item in cork board view Using the top drop down menu you can optionally also attach an image to the item to represent it in Corkboard mode instead of a text synopsis General amp Custom Meta data The General pane of the inspector shows basic meta data for the current document This includes the label and status which can be renamed the modified and created date of the document click on the arrows to switch between the modified and created date and checkboxes that affect how and whether the document will
112. amic filters will not be used Session Target Count text written anywhere in the project Turning this on will count anything you type or paste into the any document in the project binder even if it is a character sheet or a grocery list Allow negatives When disabled the session counter will never drop below zero Leave this on to get an accurate net total of your writing session When disabled deletions will still be counted but only until the counter reaches zero so some deletions would no longer be counted after that point making it less accurate z Show target notifications using Growl If you have Growl installed on your sys tem Scrivener will register itself for announcements and use that system to post notices when you exceed a goal or fall back under it 14 14 2 Project Statistics Project statistics can be called up at any time with Projects Project Statistics or 4 S on the keyboard This sheet has two sections to it Draft Everything included in the Draft folder and by default only the current compile group Note that compile options which modify export content in any way can impact this counter If your compile is set up to only export titles in an outline format you ll get a pretty small word count Likewise Com pile content selection filters and the state of the Include Exclude All selection drop down will impact the total In general consider what your document looks like when you compile th
113. and forward through the navigation history If you right click on the either of the arrow buttons a menu will be provided making it easy to jump straight to something far back or forward in the history without having to go through each point in between 14 6 2 Item Icon Menu Next to the navigation buttons is the document icon which shows what type of doc ument is being displayed and its content status if it is a folder or text file Clicking on this icon brings up a menu containing some useful shortcuts to oft used commands Reveal in Binder 38 R Will show the location of the currently edited file in the binder disclosing containers as necessary to do so This is most useful when the method you used to arrive at the current document did not involve clicking in the binder such as using the history navigation buttons or if you are currently viewing a collection and wish to find where the file is actually located in your project outline Path Reveals the location of the current document in descending order The top en try will always be the current document the entry below that its immediately parent and so on until the top of the project binder is reached These can be selected to immediately jump to any ancestor of the current it 130 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Go To Offers an alternate way to jump to a specific binder item without using the binder If the binder is hidden or hoisted for instance will let you navigate to
114. and its meta data in the Inspector again see below Whilst you can create as many folders and files as you wish in the binder there are three root level folders that cannot be deleted although they can be moved around within the top level and renamed Draft The Draft folder is where you place all of the documents you want to include in your final manuscript As such the Draft folder is unique in that it can only hold text files and folders it cannot hold image files PDF files QuickTime media or web pages as other folders can All of the writing you want to be part of your finished work should be placed inside the Draft folder in the order you want it which of course is easy to change by dragging and dropping When you are ready to export or print your manuscript use Compile Draft in the File menu This will combine all of the individual documents inside the Draft folder into one long document formatted as you specify Each file you place inside the Draft may represent a chapter a scene a paragraph or whatever you want Note some templates will have renamed this folder to something else but its function remains the same Research The Research folder can hold any type of file supported by Scrivener text image QuickTime web archive or PDF files It provides a default place for non text files to be imported and stored although you can create other root level folders for this purpose if you so wish Note some templat
115. andard but with half an inch added to the left indent of each element so 163 164 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING that when you print with a standard set up of one inch margins the left margin will actually start at one and a half inches which is the standard to allow for three hole binding The scriptwriting mode in Scrivener works much like other scriptwriting programs or to put it more honestly it has been strongly influenced by Final Draft On the right of the footer view is a pop up button with a menu containing the various elements for the selected format Clicking on an element will reformat the current paragraph to the format of the selected element So for instance if you clicked on Character the current paragraph might all be capitalised and centered Upon hitting enter and typing the paragraph formatting will be changed to that of the next set element although hitting shift enter allows you to create a new paragraph without changing element So for instance if you hit enter after having typed in a Scene Heading the typing attributes might be set to Action At this point you could easily change the current element by hitting Tab hitting it once would change the current element to Character Hitting it several times will cycle through different elements The footer view tells you which element will be created next by hitting tab or return In the image above the prompt text in the footer view says Tab Transition
116. appear as part of the compiled draft for exporting or printing Click on the header bar to switch between general and custom meta data which can be set up for each project For more information read Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 Notes References and Keywords all display the above meta data boxes They are described as follows Notes Displays a notepad for the document Each document has an auxiliary notepad associated with it Clicking the header bar of the notes area will bring up a pop up menu from which you can select Document Notes or Project Notes which are global to the project If you have multiple project notepads you may see more than one option here in parenthesis For more information read Document and Project Notes subsection 17 4 1 References The References table allows you to hold links to related material within the project itself elsewhere on your hard drive or on the internet Click the header bar to switch between document references and global project refer ences Use the latter to make links available throughout the project For more information read References subsection 17 4 2 Keywords Displays a list of keywords associated with this binder item Keywords can be used to tag your document Use the and buttons to add and remove keywords or the gear menu to access the project s central keyword list Read more about them in Keywords Pane subsection 17 4 3 and Using Keywords subsection 10
117. arate binder documents This works best with scripts that have been exported from CeltX and Movie Magic Screen writer From SimpleText ws Integrate with the SimpleText ws service You will need to provide your account log in information This will allow you to re trieve files you have created in SimpleText aware applications such as WriteRoom for the iPhone Scrivener Project Import an entire Scrivener project into the current project Most meta data keywords references and notes will be trans ferred Import and Split Takes a standard text file and allows you to supply a char acter sequence such as which will be used to split the document into sections Export Provides tools for exporting elements of the binder to the file system For more information on exporting your work see Exporting chapter 26 232 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Files 38 E Allows selected contents of a project to be exported as files and folders onto the hard drive This feature should primarily be used to create a hard copy backup or to share resources with someone not using Scrivener Generally speaking you will want to use Compile to export your book Comments and Annotations Exports just the comments and annotations from the project into a single file Optionally you can choose to export only the selected binder items Sync Tools for linking parts of your project to external applications mobile de vices or d
118. ard to represent the image instead Arrange cards from right to left Will cause index cards be ordered from right to left top to bottom If you are accustomed to working in right to left languages this will make the Corkboard more intuitive Status stamp opacity Allows you to set the opacity of stamps on the corkboard Corkboard shadows Sets the intensity of the shadows around the cards and borders of the corkboard view Position pins Allows you to choose whether pins on the corkboard if displayed should be drawn in the centre of the title area of each index card which looks more authentic but can partially obscure the actual title or in the top right corner If using the rounded card theme this option will have no effect Index card theme Lets you choose the line colours used in the index card Red and blue divides the title area from the text with a pinkish red line and draws blue lines in the text area Blue and black divides the title area from the text area with a blue line and draws black lines between the text These represent the most common colours of index cards in the real world The rounded card theme displays cards in a more stylistic fashion Cards will have rounded edges labels will be represented as a colour block instead of a pin and lines will be drawn in grey This setting will also impact the index card in the Inspector though it will always have square corners Corkboard background Lets you customise
119. are counting each and every change including bugs fixes Scrivener 2 actually does have hundreds of improvements far too many to list right now though if you want a complete list consult the change log online You ll notice most of these refinements as you go about working in the way you ve grown accustomed to Here is a list of just a few of the new things you can do Binder Favourites Set documents or folders as favourites and they ll get pinned to various document selection menus in the interface such as Go To and Scrivener Links Text Bookmarks Set bookmarks in the text of your document to mark places of interest Bookmarks are set using the existing inline annotation feature so it is easy to spot where they are while you work New Style System Apple s built in style system has been completely replaced with an improved style builder and selection mechanism It is important to note that Scrivener styles are still a way of applying favourite formatting rules and font variations not dynamic styles in the sense of a word processor but the system for maintaining and creating these should be much easier Refined Menu Layout Much thought has been put into storing the vast number of functions available The new menus have been re arranged to be more intuitive and logical Preferences Overhauled More control is available letting you personalise your copy of Scrivener even further and the sections have been re arranged to be
120. are with another author using one of the various syncing methods Create a special compile group with an alternate selection and order than a typical compile of the draft z Store saved searches for future use or to monitor workflows 8 3 1 The Collection Interface To reveal the Collection interface click the Collections icon in the toolbar or select View gt Collections Show Collections Each virtual tab represents a single collection In the screenshot Figure 8 2 the Binder tab is selected While not a true collection this is how you can navigate back to the Binder after viewing a Collection Click on any tab to select it when a tab is selected it will re colour and ghost all of the tabs below it to help indicate which is the active tab Additionally the header bar will change its title to the name of the tab You could hide the Collections interface at this point and continue working in that tab The background colour of the sidebar and the header bar will help remind you that you are not in the full Binder When first created Collections will be assigned with an automatically generated colour but their tabs can be recoloured by double clicking the rectangular colour chip to the right of the label Likewise double click on the title to change the name of a collection The Binder and Search Results tabs cannot be renamed 52 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER no e Collections j Q Search Results New C
121. arkdown EIfXformat As with the other MMD formats use of the empty line type will produce the best result in most cases The FT pXcode for a pagebreak pagebreak will be inserted for the page break option Note that this will be enclosed in an HTML comment which is the preferred method for passing ATEXcodes straight through the MMD sys tem This ability is disabled by default and will need to be enabled by hand in the MMD sub system chapter 28 The Separators pane is available to all formats except FCF and FDX 25 3 5 Text Options The Text Options pane provides a number of useful text and format conversions as well as a few presentation options Since many of the available formats have their own unique strengths and weaknesses not all of the options listed will be available for every format 7In the case of plain text files the Unicode break character will be used While support for this is not common the character can still be useful as a search and replace anchor TextEdit will treat this character appropriately when the file is viewed in Page Wrap mode 198 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Plain Text Conversions These are useful conversion tools for translating special characters and some ruler styles to plain text variants These options are made available to the rich text formats as well Straighten smart quotes Typographic quotes will be substituted with straightened variants In versions of Mac OS X Leopa
122. arter document To change the name just press Esc and type in Chapter One pressing Esc again to confirm the name change You might notice something going on with the icons Figure 6 2 Document Chapter One looks like a page of text but Chapter Two just looks like a blank sheet of paper That s because we haven t typed anything into the editor for Chapter Two yet Scrivener lets you know which parts of your project are still placeholders For now let s use another method for adding new documents When you are in the binder there is a simple way to add new ones below the current document Select Chapter Two and just press Enter Call this one Wineries Now let s take a look at a great way to get an overview of your Draft Either click on Draft in the binder with your mouse or simply press the LeftArrow to jump up to it When you view a folder in Scrivener by default it will automatically switch to showing you the corkboard in the editor area You should see three index cards one for each of the items we ve created sometimes referred to as Scrivenings but the cards will be blank this is because they display the synopsis for a document not its 30 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR internal text Double click in the empty ruled text area on the Wineries card and type in a short synopsis for this section of the book When finished pressed Enter to confirm At this point if you look
123. as they appear in the registration e mail you received or registration will fail For this reason it is probably best to copy and paste both the user name and serial number directly from your e mail Once Scrivener has been registered there is no longer a time limit on its use and you will no longer see the nag box at startup the application will launch immediately without any messages 16 CHAPTER 4 INSTALLATION AND UPGRADING 4 2 Application Updates When you first launch Scrivener you will be presented with a panel which asks whether or not Scrivener should automatically check itself for updates To use this feature you must have a connection to the Internet If you click Yes whenever you launch Scrivener if your machine is connected to the internet Scrivener will do a quick check to see if there is a newer version available If so you will be presented with a panel giving details of the update and asking you whether or not you want to install the newer version it is strongly recommended that you always update to the newest version available If you click No to Check for updates on startup Scrivener will not do this check automatically Whether you click Yes or No however you can always check for updates manually by choosing Check for Updates from the application Scrivener menu You can change your mind later by setting this option in the application prefer ences under the General tab se
124. at is what will be counted z Selection A count of everything you have currently selected in the Binder including all of their children items by default Each of these sections have identical statistics available to them The word and character counters are self explanatory The two page count estimates are based on different algorithms Paperback uses the industry standard est 350 words per page to calculate against the total word count This of course does not take into account whitespace Dialogue heavy text will take more space than long Kafkaesque paragraphs will However it is a standard metric that many publishers use and on average produces a good result It can be tweaked in the Options tab 14 14 GOALS AND STATISTICS TRACKING TOOLS 147 Pages printed will be in many cases much more accurate as it will compile your draft in the background using your formatting and page layout settings and then count the total pages that resulted from that Consequently in large projects it make take a few moments for this sheet to display 14 14 3 Project Statistics Options To access options for how project statistics are calculated click the Options tab in the sheet Draft Statistics Options Controls how the top Draft only section of the stats are calculated Count current compile group only only calculates off of documents that have been chosen in the Content pane of the Compile interface This is the only compile time optio
125. ating and Marking Your Text 16 1 Inline Notation 16 2 Linked Notation 16 3 Text Colour and Highlights 16 4 Marking Revisions 17 Inspector 17 1 Synopsis Card cos 5 ves 17 2 General Meta Data View 17 3 Custom Meta Data View 104 105 108 108 109 112 116 123 129 132 133 136 138 139 139 140 143 149 150 150 151 151 151 153 153 153 154 154 155 155 156 156 17 4 17 5 17 6 Document Support Panes Locking the Inspector Advanced Inspector Key board Usage ce meas 18 QuickReference 18 1 18 2 QuickReference Mini JASpECtOr savni ak we os Using QuickReference Panels in Full Screen 19 Scriptwriting 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6 19 7 Formatting a Script in DOTIVEMCR x dain are e Creating Your Script Formats heey Importing a Script from Final Draft and Other PROVING s e eii oe oad Export the script from Fi nal Draft as an RTF file Printing a S ript siss Exporting a Script Final Draft Breit ae oa 8 20 Bibliography Management 21 Transcribing Media 22 Page View 23 The Name Generator IV Final Phases 24 Creating a Table of Contents 25 Compiling the Draft 25 1 Baste Presets suc sa uats 25 2 Expanded Compile Inter Teak dict ich aie E Be 25 3 Option Panes 25 4 Available Compile Formats 26 Exporting iii 156 159 160 161 162 162 163 163 164 168 1
126. automatic backup system will ignore this project entirely It will then be up to you to keep manual backups of the project The File Back Up Back Up Now feature is useful in this regard 7 6 3 Manually Backing Up Backups can be created whenever and wherever you want regardless of the automated settings just as in Scrivener 1 x Use File Back Up Back Up To and select a backup location The Backup as ZIP file option will compress your project into a zip file prior to saving it and is thus useful when backing up to remote storage locations such as MobileMe or DropBox By default backups will be timestamped according to your system s locale settings making it easy to find a precise version later on It is also possible to manually trigger the automatic backup system even for projects which have been excluded by using File Back Up Back Up Now This 44 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT will follow any relevant options that have been set in preferences such as how many to keep where to store them and how many to keep around Frequent use of this feature will help safeguard your work in progress and it is recommended that you start forming a habit of making backups whenever a decent amount of work has been committed to the project 7 6 4 Tips for Using Time Machine Mac OS X Leopard and greater provides the Time Machine feature which will au tomatically back up your computer once every hour and store backups as
127. back in all custom formatting in paragraphs that have been edited will be lost Scrivener will protect those areas of the files which have not been edited wherever possible Scrivener does its best to retain as much formatting as possible when re syncing but if formatting is as important to your workflow as synchronising then you will either need to find a solution that can take advantage of RTF files or save formatting for the final stages in your writing project z Final Draft FDX Those working with Final Draft and scriptwriting mode should use this setting as it will retain all special script formatting in a round trip Automatically convert plain text paragraph spacing When this option is engaged Scrivener will intelligently convert your documents paragraph spacing to bet ter suit the intended environment Since Plain text editors cannot display pseudo spacing between paragraphs this option will insert a second carriage return to help set them apart from one another Upon import these extra car riage returns will be removed for you 100 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING Using Folder Sync with the iPad and iPhone If you intend to use this feature in integration with Dropbox and the iPad or iPhone you should always use the plain text format At the time of this writing there are no Dropbox aware editors on the iOS that can read RTF files Keep this setting turned off if you require a certain standard one way or t
128. be referenced in depth If you want to find a specific feature but don t know which section it might be located in consult the appendices at the end of the manual which have a cross referenced list to every menu item and window in Scrivener or the index Users who are already familiar with prior versions of Scrivener will want to consult the What s New chapter 3 section where new major features are briefly explained http www literatureandlatte com support php 5 6 CHAPTER 2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL and a list of minor changes and features is provided as well For a full description of everything that has changed as well as bug fixes check out the Release Notes online The PDF and Scrivener project versions of this manual will always be the most up to date 2 1 Terms and Conventions Whenever the documentation refers to an action that must be taken by you the vis ible name for that action will be formatted like so Button labels menu items and keyboard shortcuts will all be displayed in this fashion Menus will be displayed in a hierarchy using the character to separate top level sub menu and items To convert a range of selected text to uppercase invoke the Format Convert To Uppercase command Keyboard shortcuts will use the following symbols z 3 The Command key or the Apple key is the one located directly to the left and right of your spacebar x The Option key is also l
129. between in line annotations and footnotes or placing your notes into a new panel located in the Inspector This not only lets you place long notes out of the way of the primary draft it can also work as a bookmarking system Clicking on the notes in the Inspector column will automatically scroll your editor to its linked position in the document When using Edit Scrivenings you can see all of the notes for the collected document at once Your old projects will use the in line system as they always have but you can easily convert to the new system with a single menu command or vice versa For more information read Annotating and Marking Your Text chapter 16 3 0 4 Improved Compile For most Scrivener authors compile is the last crucial step where all of your hard work is bound together into a single document It lets you write in a way that is com fortable for you while quickly generating a format that your editor is comfortable working with Scrivener 2 recognises the importance of this process and has increased its abilities in nearly every facet Now you can design export instructions which au tomatically title and number your chapters for you insert custom separators between types of documents filter compile according to meta data or other criteria export to more formats including ePub and WebArchive with even better Final Draft support Compile now takes your export format into account and reduces the complexity of the options prov
130. board Show Pins or 38 P to toggle the visibility of pins 2 Outliner The outliner can be set to tint the background colour for each row using the label colour with View Use Label Color In Outliner Rows 3 QuickReference Panels the label is one of the priority meta data values always visible at the top of the QuickReference panel for each document 4 Binder can be set to highlight the background of each binder item using the label colour in a manner similar to the Finder Toggle this behaviour with View Use Label Color In Binder 5 Icons enabled with View Use Label Color In Icons this option will tint doc ument icons wherever they appear 6 Index Cards enable with View Use Label Color In Index Cards this optional method will tint the background colour of index cards wherever they appear The label can also be used to tint colour printouts when printing corkboards and outliners 10 1 3 Status Stamps As with the label the status field can have its representative name altered to suit your project preferences By default this field represents that status of a document in terms of its completion such as To do or Rough draft but this field can be used for whatever purpose you desire Unlike the label there is no corresponding colour and so its display potential is more limited 1 Corkboard can be displayed as a diagonal stamp across the face of the card The appearance of this
131. by dragging and dropping them the elements in the pop up buttons will be reordered to match which could lead to different elements being selected so be sure to do this part only after you have arranged the elements list on the left in the order you desire Tab behavior Sets what happens when you hit the tab key Allow tabs If this is checked the tab key works as it would normally that is it inserts tabs With this checked none of the other options for tab behaviour are available Tabbing on an empty line Choose an element from the Go to pop up button to set which element will be formatted when you hit tab on an empty line This allows you to cycle through elements using the tab key For instance in the example image above if you have hit return to find the text formatted as a Scene Heading you can then hit the tab key to reformat the line as an Action element provided you haven t typed anything yet Tabbing after typing Sets what happens when you hit the tab key after typing something in the current element Select Go to and an element from the pop up button to have tab automatically take you to the next desired element inserting a new line automatically Select Insert and type characters in the text field to have the tab key insert a character sequence In the example above hitting tab after typing something in a Scene Heading element automatically inserts a hyphen surrounded by spaces which emulates the behaviou
132. c You can choose Go Back at any point to make changes 13 1 5 Clearing Out Simplenote When you ve reached a point in your project where you no longer require external syncing or would for any other reason like to clear off everything belonging to your project it is very easy to remove everything from the server pertaining to the project Before following these instructions it might be a good idea to run one last sync to make sure everything is up to date Then simply make sure the Delete from 13 1 SIMPLENOTE 95 Simplenote notes marked for this project but not selected for syncing is enabled in Step 1 and Step 2 and then Click on any file checkbox currently enabled This will de select everything and wipe out the related notes on Simplenote when you click the Sync button Note that nothing in the project will be impacted when you do this it will only clear out the associated notes on the Simplenote server 13 1 6 Using Simplenote Tags When syncing files Scrivener will assign two tags to each file 1 The tag Scrivener which will make it easy to find all files associated with any Scrivener project 2 A tag corresponding to the project keyword you selected above making it easy to filter your note list in the Simplenote application by project You can also add new documents to the project from Simplenote by simply adding the project keyword tag to that document When using this method you needn t supply the
133. can quickly flip through the history with 3 and you can cause the other editor the jump back and forth in its own history queue with s and s A nice trick here when working with a sequence of reference documents is to pre load them into your reference split by clicking on each one sequentially Now they are loaded into the history queue and easily accessible while you write in the other split Controlling media While typing in one split you can start and stop QuickTime movies and audio tracks with s R making this setup extremely useful for transcription If you have Rewind on Pause enabled subsection 14 8 3 this shortcut will also rewind the piece by a set amount 3 seconds by default mak ing it easy to catch up 14 9 3 Swapping Splits and Matching Editors If you wish to swap the actual position of the material in the editors so that the con tent on the left now appears on the right for example use the View Layout Swap Editors menu command To match the content of the alternate split to the active split you are working in click the document icon in the header bar and select the Match Split Document s command This will duplicate your current view selection in the other editor So if you are in a Scrivenings session that session will be duplicated if you have a Multiple Selection view that selection will be duplicated in the bottom view and the current 138 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING view mode
134. ce The precise appearance of the palette will change depending how large you make it As the size of the palette increases more options will be made available to you Since this palette is provided by Apple please refer to the help files provided by TextEdit for details in using it To use the font palette to change the appearance of your text you will need to first select the text you wish to change and then call up the palette Any changes you make will be immediately reflected in the editor 14 4 5 Preserve Formatting If you are planning on letting Scrivener s compiler do all of the final formatting for you it can often be useful to preserve ranges of text from the effects of the format ting engine A common example of this might be the use of block quoting as a left and right indent Technical writers might find it useful to set apart blocks of text as code using a special font and layout In the past you had to break out these special sections into their own documents and preserve the formatting of the entire document Now you can define these ranges right in their original context To specify a range of text for preservation select the text in the editor and then invoke the Format Formatting Preserve Formatting menu command This will draw a dashed box around the text which can be worked around and within like any other type of formatting range Also like other formatting tools to toggle a preserved range off si
135. ce If you change the size of the editor view later it will stay at the same view 244 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS z Single Facing Pages In single mode will show one page per row like an ordinary digital file In facing mode two pages will be placed side by side in a column more like reading a book Continuous Page Breaks These two scrolling modes affect how the docu ment is handled when using the scroll wheel arrow keys or page up and down keys In Continuous mode the pages flow by seamlessly in page break mode only one or two if facing pages is enabled pages will be showed at a time and scrolling actions flip between pages Play Media File s8 Return Functionally this acts like clicking the Play button in the media viewer for either audio or video files If the editor is split between a text document and a media file and you are typing in the text document this shortcut will start and stop the media in the other split allowing you to easily transcribe or reference the media When two media files are open at once the shortcut will affect the active split Fast Forward Rewind 3 amp x8 0 Will jump playback forward or back ward by two seconds This shortcut works while playback is running or while paused In the latter case it will stay paused at the new position As with Play Media File will work in the opposing split while typing providing further aid for transcription Page View Acc
136. cept described above filters can only modify the contents of the list they have been pro vided with The items listed within a Collection will be used to match against the given compile group list and they will never produce new results outside of the orig inal list So if you wish to include items from a Collection that do not exist in the original compile group you will need to use that Collection for your compile group Collections are an effective way to arbitrarily focus your Draft for special purposes without adjusting the Include in Draft checkbox for these items but do note that this feature is secondary to the Include checkbox The checkbox will always have priority over any filter settings Filters adjust the item list they do not dictate the terms of compile 25 3 2 Formatting The Formatting pane is where you will design the look and structure of your docu ment It is separated into two main areas each of which we will gradually introduce 1 Structure and Content Table A table for assigning content to the various Binder item types available and the creation of level specific content and formatting rules 2 Formatting Editor A format editing and live preview area In the supplied example Figure 25 3 the manuscript will print all folder titles including any text within that folder item itself and only text for file groups and files It will also override the formatting to Courier 12pt with a large right marg
137. chapter duplicate it Scrap it if you don t like the style at all and want to design your own When you use a new template for the first time check the Meta Data settings X and make sure that everything is arrange the way you prefer z Some project templates will have document templates already pre configured This will provide you with starter documents for creating new elements within the template You can modify the items in this folder to customise these Some templates will change the name of the Draft and Research folders to some thing more appropriate The novel template for example changes the Draft name to Manuscript Note that when the Draft has been renamed all interface elements that refer to it will have their labels updated 7 5 2 Creating Your Own Templates Creating custom templates is as easy as creating a new project and if you often set up similar projects with items like character sheets keywords to mention a few they will save you a lot of time Here is a list by no means complete of things that are commonly changed or added to custom templates Custom labels amp status add the types of labels preferred colours and status stamps that you find useful for your projects ea Project references try making a list of writing resources and research portals that you often use 40 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT Character sheets or research note starters use Document Templates sec
138. ckLook except unlike that you can actually edit content and have multiple pan els open at once You can also split the window and edit nearly anything in the second pane that would ordinarily require the Inspector to be open QuickReference windows can also be used while working in Full Screen Mode For more information on how to use QuickReference windows read QuickReference chapter 18 3 0 8 Snapshots and Changes Taking snapshots of your documents as you work has always been a crucial safety net in Scrivener but Scrivener 1 just gave you a list of old snapshots in a window and let you do all of the hard work figuring out what changed and which one was which Snapshots have now been moved into the inspector meaning you can view them right alongside your current version They can also be loaded right into the editor itself as a read only reference Split your editor into two panes and load an older snapshot into that pane for full size editing and reference You can also now ask Scrivener to look for changes between revisions It will highlight new words and overstrike deleted words for you For more information read Snapshots Pane subsection 17 4 4 3 0 9 Automatic Backups To keep your work safe you can now tell Scrivener to automatically back up your projects as you work There are a number of ways in which to do so including time based opening and closing and force saves Tell Scrivener to use your DropBox folder for automatic
139. cluding indents and line spacing It is always better to use RTF if possible Simple ODT exporter This uses Apple s default exporter which loses much of the formatting in cluding indents and line spacing It is always bet ter to use RTF if possible Scriptwriting Formats For transferring your script to Final Draft this is the best option unless you have an older ver sion of Final Draft than version 8 Maintains synopses as scene summaries scene titles and custom script element formatting Use the FCF converter when working with an older copy of Final Draft Supports only basic screenplay formatting 215 216 Format CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Extension Description ePub eBook HTML Web Archives MultiMarkdown MultiMarkdown gt LaTeX MultiMarkdown gt RTF MultiMarkdown gt HTML E book amp Web Support epub Generate feature rich eBooks for use in portable reading devices that support the ePub format such as the Sony Reader or iPad ePub files can be dragged into the iTunes Library to import them into iBooks html Creates a single HTML file suitable for web publishing webarchive Much like HTML but conveniently packages ex ported image files into a single bundle using Ap ple s webarchive format which can be opened by Safari including the Windows version and various Mac OS X applications Not compatible with most other browsers MultiMarkdown Post processing md
140. create a script format mode that recognises elements from an imported script please use Save to file in the Manage pop up menu from the Script Settings panel to save your format as an XML file somewhere safe on your hard drive so that you can back it up and load it on other machines or following a hard drive reformat if necessary Also please feel free to upload such format files on the forums where other Scrivener users may find them useful or from where you can always download them again should you lose them 19 5 Printing a Script You can use the Compile Draft sheet from the File menu to print your script or to turn it into a PDF file For examples of how to do this including providing a title page install the Extras that come with Scrivener by double clicking on the Extras Installer on the DMG from which you installed Scrivener and then take a look at one of the scriptwriting project templates by going to File gt New Project and selecting a project template such as the Screenplay template Read the instructions that come with the template to see how to set up your project so that it is formatted properly when printed or exported Note that if you install the extras you can also use the Load button in the Compile Draft sheet to load preset options that have been optimised for use with various script types Note that Scrivener is not intended as a final formatting solution however In the majo
141. created within the folder Otherwise the new file will appear as a sibling to the current selection New Folder 38 N Creates a new folder document at the current selection Fold ers will always be created as a sibling to the current selection For more information on the differences between files and folders see Project Plan ning chapter 12 New From Template gt There are two management commands always available from this menu which let you set or remove a designated template folder Once a template folder is set this menu will also be populated with the children of that template folder which may need to be set with Project Set Selection As Templates Folder below Read more about Document Templates For tricks on how best to use text and project statistics see Goals and Tracking Tools Text Statistics 3 S Brings down a sheet displaying statistics for the current document and thus only available when a text document or Scrivenings are focussed 250 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Project Statistics x8 S Brings down a sheet displaying the statistics for the cur rent project including the word and character count for the draft and for the current binder selection Show Hide Project Targets 3 1 Toggles visibility of the targets panel which lets you track a few simple metrics in real time as you type and edit Meta Data Settings 38 Displays a sheet which lets you adjust the two ma
142. ction B 1 4 3 Upgrading from Scrivener 1 While it is possible to run more than one version of Scrivener at once on your com puter it is advisable to first delete your copy of 1 x before installing the new version To do this simply locate Scrivener in the Applications folder and drag its icon to the Trash in your Dock then follow the above instructions to install Scrivener 2 0 on your hard drive Since the application preferences have all been updated you will need to go through the new preference system and set up your defaults again The Scrivener project file format has been updated considerably and new or up graded projects cannot be opened in Scrivener 1 x versions of the application For each project on your system you will be presented with a dialogue box asking if you wish to upgrade the project format Until you do so it will not be possible to open these older projects in Scrivener 2 x When updating the project Scrivener will cre ate a backup copy of the original project preserved in the 1 x format which you can choose to backup or delete once you ve verified the update was successful Once the update process is complete the project will open in 2 0 and you can begin working immediately Updating large projects When updating very large projects be prepared to wait a while for the process to complete A good rule of thumb is how long it would take to copy the project from one disk to another If your project is so
143. ction can be collapsed to make space for the other elements of the Inspector See also So What are Index Cards Anyway subsection 12 1 1 155 156 CHAPTER 17 INSPECTOR 17 2 General Meta Data View This collapsible section appears in the Notes References and Keywords panes of the Inspector It displays the basic document meta data and provides controls for editing it Read Meta Data Types section 10 1 for further detail 17 3 Custom Meta Data View Click on the header bar for General Meta Data to reveal the Custom Meta data con trol You can also alternate between General and Custom meta data by pressing 38 7 The interface presents a table with the meta data field name in the left column the editable values you may supply on the right If custom colours have been assigned to any fields they will be rendered here as text colour Also word wrapping will impact this table Read Custom Meta Data subsection 10 1 6 for more information If no custom meta data has been configured for the project this panel will not be available 17 4 Document Support Panes The five panes of the inspector present further access to notes reference links key words text snapshots and linked comments and footnotes respectively The first three share space with the synopsis and meta data panels the last two take up the entire inspector interface The five panes can be accessed at any time by clicking on the icons in the bottom of the inspe
144. ctor using the View Inspect sub menu 17 4 1 Document and Project Notes Document notes provide a rich text writing area that is outside of the main text area You can use notes to store any auxiliary information about the current document for reference whilst writing Clicking the header bar of the notes area will bring up a pop up menu from which you can select Document Notes or Project Notes Document notes are always attached to the current document Project notes are similar to document notes except they are visible to the entire project no matter what document you have selected In addition you can also create multiple project notepads using the Project Notes window section 12 3 When more than one notepad has been created for a project you will see them appear in this menu as well There will always be at least one project notepad You can cycle forward and backward through all available document and project notepads with 3 6 and 3 6 17 4 DOCUMENT SUPPORT PANES 157 17 4 2 References The References table allows you to hold links to related material within the project itself elsewhere on your hard drive or on the internet Drag documents from the binder or the Finder and URLs from the internet into the table to create links or use the buttons in the References header bar to add and remove reference links Double clicking on the icon of the reference or selecting it and hitting Return will open the docu
145. cuments pasting them will just list the names of the documents This command will also build links back to each of the respective documents Copy Documents as ToC Will create a basic Table of Contents out of the se lected documents which is meant to be pasted into a Scrivener document See Creating a Table of Contents chapter 24 for further information Paste and Match Style 38 V This pastes the contents of the clipboard without any of its existing fonts and styles Useful for when you have copied a range of formatted text but want to paste it using the style of the text into which you are placing it A 3 EDIT MENU 235 Delete 3g Delete Moves the selected binder items to the Trash Scrivener works in the same fashion that the Finder does Items are not directly deleted but first moved to a Trash folder located in the binder Periodically you can review the contents of this and empty the trash to clear up space Select All 38 A Selects all of the content of the current text outliner view table view or corkboard Select Current Text x38 A When holding down the Option key this alternate method will be displayed It is useful for selecting on the current text in a Scrivenings session rather than the entire session Complete lt Esc Manually calls up the word completion service regardless of word auto completion settings Can optionally be invoked with 3 or simply Esc by itself on some keyboard layouts Com
146. cuments to Final Draft just select the documents you want to export in the binder and then go to File gt Export gt Files Select Final Draft 8 FDX as the export format The exported file should open in Final Draft 8 with all features intact 1 Compiling the Whole Draft to an FDX File To combine all of the scenes in the Draft folder of your project into one FDX file do the following Go to File gt Compile Draft Select Final Draft 8 FDX as the file format You may need to tweak the various settings of the Compile Draft sheet to get the script for matted correctly just as you would with any Scrivener project Click on Export and choose a filename Open the exported file in Final Draft 8 You should see that most elements are retained footnotes become script notes coloured text becomes re vised text and so on The header shows whatever is set in Scrivener s Compile Draft panel If for some reason you want the exported file to use Final Draft s default screenplay formatting and not to use the script formatting of the Scrivener project you can select 19 7 FINAL DRAFT 8 173 Use default Final Draft script element formatting for FDX export in the General pane of Scrivener s Preferences That covers the basics of importing from and exporting to the FDX format using Scrivener Chapter 20 Bibliography Management Scrivener offers simple integration with your favourite a bibliography o
147. d They work in an additive fash ion so if you have both Bold and Underline selected a successful match must be both bold and underlined Keep with next search for paragraphs that have the For mat gt Text gt Keep With Next marker added 14 5 3 Project Search The Project Search feature has been refined in Scrivener 2 to be integrated with the new collection system When you perform a project search the results will be placed into a temporary dedicated collection called Search Results If the collections inter face has been hidden this fact will be obscured from you but the collection will be created and can be accessed later so long as you do not run another search There are two ways to access Project Search You can either click in the search field in the toolbar or press 38 F to place the cursor focus there If the toolbar has been hidden a convenience window will be opened providing the same features as the toolbar search When nothing is entered in the search field greyed out text will inform you of the current search mode By default this is All Exact Phrase which means all searchable elements in the project will be analysed with the exact phrase operator The search scope data type and operator mode can be adjusted via the project search options menu by clicking on the magnifying glass to the left of the search field The options are as follows Search In Sets the data type of the search You can
148. d by Formatting panel This tool is quite powerful and has a wide range of options please see Searching and Replacing section 14 5 for full documentation Find Next Previous Formatting 38 G x8 6G As with Find Next and Find Previous will let you jump from match to match within a single document even without the Find by Formatting panel open Spelling and Grammar Accesses OS X s spelling and grammar tools Note that most of these can be set to different defaults in the Auto Correction tab sec tion B 8 Show Spelling and Grammar 8 Opens the standard Spelling and Grammar panel If you wish to change the base language the spelling and grammar checker uses you can set that here Check Document Now 3 Will start checking for misspellings from the current cursor position downward A 4 VIEW MENU 239 Check Spelling While Typing 8 Turns on the automatic spell checker which will underline in red unrecognised and misspelled words as you type Check Grammar With Spelling Also turns on grammar checking which will look for poor style or grammatical errors as you type and underline them in green Speech Controls for OS X s built in text to speech synthesis Two menu controls are provided to start and stop speaking The active text editor will be used as source text with these commands Writing Tools Provides a few OS X writing tools as well as some custom utilities Look Up
149. d into your Documents folder by default though you can choose to organise these projects however you like even after you ve created them Some find it convenient to rely upon the File Recent Projects menu item to organise their projects or simply just let Scrivener maintain which projects are open whenever they start Scrivener for the day These tools are valuable but shouldn t be a substitute for good organisation on your drive The intended use of a project is to store everything relating to a single major work be it your next novel screenplay for a film a doctoral dissertation or a serial col lection of articles for a magazine This can be approached in a flexible manner It is possible to use a project as a daily journal a collection of random things you intend to one day utilise in future projects and so forth Going a bit deeper the project file is a bundled package containing all of the pieces that make up your project This format is meant to be used as a last resort safe guard not as a way to allow you to edit a project in places where Scrivener is not available 7 1 Project Size Limitations Since Scrivener was primarily written with the large format author in mind much effort has been put into making it as robust as possible It can handle book length manuscripts with ease store large quantities of research material and handle many thousands of individual components even on a single corkboard Scrivener has been tes
150. d otherwise be titled by the compiler Insert subtitles between text elements When either Synopsis or Notes elements are enabled Scrivener will insert a subtitle to help set apart these sections from the main text which will also be titled These titles can be formatted like ev erything else in the formatting editor Place notes after main text The default is to place any Inspector notes above the main text for the item being compiled When checked notes will be placed below the main text area instead The Text Override Formatting Options section of this sheet lets you specify just how much formatting should be changed in the source documents Note that if you use these any applicable styling you ve done in the formatting editor will be ignored If you set the option to preserve line spacing then adding double spacing in the formatting editor will do nothing Override font only If all you want to change is the base font family checking off this box will disable the other options and inhibit the compiler from changing alignment and ruler styles z Preserve alignment Left centre right and full justification settings will be pre served throughout the manuscript z Preserve tabs and indents Actual tab characters will always be preserved This option merely inhibits the compiler from changing the ruler based tab stops and indent markers If you use blockquote indenting in your book and wish to retain that formatting globally
151. d to plain text all rich text attributes bold italics images and so forth will be lost The format of the exported text is defined entirely by the MultiMarkdown syntax you use For instance the text this is some text in Scrivener would be exported via MultiMarkdown as this is some text Note that you can convert rich text bold and italic attributes to MultiMarkdown syntax by using Convert gt Bold and Italics to MultiMarkdown Syntax in the Text menu However because rich text allows more flexibility in its use of bold and italics than MultiMarkdown for instance MultiMarkdown does not support the italici sation of partial words this command may or may not produce completely valid MultiMarkdown syntax it is up to the user to check this Tip Users who prefer plain text may wish to set their default font and paragraph settings in the Text Editing pane of Preferences to something that emulates a plain 226 CHAPTER 28 USING MULTIMARKDOWN text feel For instance you could set the font to Monaco 10 point Monaco does not draw bold or italics and set the paragraph formatting so that there are no indents and no inter line spacing 28 4 Importing MultiMarkdown Files You can import any existing MultiMarkdown files into Scrivener using File gt Import gt MultiMarkdown File This will parse the file you select and break it up so that it is imported into the binder with its hierarchy intact taking document name
152. dden means that you could use the translucent areas of the full screen window to look at the contents of the windows of other applications Note that in some circumstances having the main window visible during full screen mode can slow down typing so it is usually best to leave this checked as it is by default Open full screen window on secondary screen when available If this is checked and you have more than one display the full screen window will be opened on the secondary screen Scroller type Allows you to customise how the scroll bar looks in full screen mode Note that temporary attributes can only affect colour it is not possible to choose a different font in full screen for instance Some other plain text applications do allow you to change the font in full screen They can do this because the whole of the text only ever uses one font at a time plain text doesn t hold any font information fonts are used only for display However because Scrivener is a rich text application it is possible for a single piece of text to use multiple fonts It is therefore impossible to change these fonts to one font temporarily edit the text and then change the font back 272 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES Standard full screen scroller The scroller will look like the ones you would see in the full screen modes of iPhoto or other iApps the translucent grey white against black This scroller will always be visible if there is enough text
153. der Scrivener will at tempt to convert these outlines into Scrivener outlines This can be useful if you do your initial brainstorming in a dedicated outliner application Some of these applications support attached notes to each outliner header If notes exist Scrivener can be instructed to apply these notes either to the Synopsis alone the main text or the document notes for that heading in the outline Note that in the case of the last two options the synopsis will still be set automatically If you want dropped OPML structures to be generated inside of a special folder rather than directly into your existing Binder structure enable the Create folder to hold imported OPML items option Plain Text Import When importing plain text files usually they have a txt file ex tension you can have Scrivener either apply the current default styling prefer ences or optionally use a special font for these files Import Final Draft FDX script notes as Final Draft s export format saves your commentation notes Scrivener can convert them to linked Inspector Com ments inline annotations or footnotes Import RTF comments as inline annotations If this is unchecked RTF comments will be converted to linked Inspector Comments Import RTF footnotes and endnotes as inline footnotes If unchecked will con vert RTF footnotes and endnotes to linked Inspector Comments B 9 2 Export Options Microsoft doc export In most cases you will wa
154. ders is enabled by default the text contents of that container will be included in the Scrivenings session at the very top If you never use folder text or document stack text then disabling this will remove the empty entry at the top of the Scrivenings session 274 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES Open all documents files and folders in editor view in search results list Overrides default behaviour of opening folders and if Treat all documents with children as folders is set document stacks as well When this is enabled all container style search results will reveal their text when clicked on in the search results rather than revealing their children in accordance with the selected view mode This option is enabled by default because generally speaking most search results are based on the text of the matching item and so the reason the item is in the search list at all is because of its text Collapse auto expanded outline items after drag and drop When dragging items into containers if you pause over the container Scrivener will helpfully reveal the contents if hidden allowing you to drop items several layers deeper than you could initially see This option will close all automatically opened contain ers for you after dropping the items This setting impacts both the binder and the outliner view B 5 2 Return Key Behavior Return ends editing synopsis in corkboard and outliner By default the Return key will submit the edits b
155. different parts of the application without using the mouse The first lets you cycle be tween common elements while the rest will jump immediately to that element of the interface no matter where focus is currently placed Note that in all cases the elements you wish to cycle or jump to must actually already be visi ble These shortcuts will not automatically reveal parts of the interface that are currently hidden z Left Right Top Bottom Editor amp Binder Tab This menu item follows a chain of the three most common areas of desired focus the primary split second split and the binder It will cycle between these three going left to right and the label of this menu item will be changed to indicate where the next target will be z Binder B Moves focus to the binderbinder from anywhere in the interface if the binder is visible z Left Bottom Editor 38 E Moves focus to the Left or Bottom editor if the editor has been split Otherwise selects the primary editor if there is no split Right lop Editor R Moves focus to the Right or Top editor if the editor has been split If it has not been split this shortcut will not be available Inspect A continuation of the navigation functions these deal solely with the re vealing and focussing of elements within the Inspector All of them work on the following principle if the keyboard shortcut revealed the item it was hid den before then the action will simply
156. dified 2 By Clause any changes made within a clause as in a sentence will mark the entire clause as having been modified 3 By Word individual words will be marked producing the most precise and thus noisy results 17 5 LOCKING THE INSPECTOR 159 The Roll Back button will revert the current editor text to the text in the selected snapshot To use it select the snapshot you wish to revert to and click the Roll Back button Scrivener will request confirmation from you and give you the opportunity to snapshot the current text if you wish Note this cannot be undone Read more about using snapshots here section 14 10 17 4 5 Linked Notes Pane The final pane keeps track of all the comments and footnotes that appear in the cur rent text view This means that in Scrivenings mode where multiple documents are represented this display will show a combined view of all notes across the documents in the order that they appear Along the top of the pane you will find three buttons which in order of appearance from left to right do the following Add anew comment in the text at the current text position or selection ta Add a new footnote in the same manner as above Delete the selected comment s for footnote s Select multiple items in the same fashion you would select multiple documents with the Cmd and Shift keys Notes can be independently collapsed or revealed by clicking the triangles beside their title Opt cl
157. ditable fields much like you would in a spreadsheet 12 1 2 Using the Corkboard Material not finished 12 1 3 Corkboard Options The Corkboard Options pane contains settings which are specific to each split Changes made to this pane will only impact the active split they have been made in letting you have two entirely different visual appearances per editor split Any changes made will be saved with the project To access the pane click on the Corkboard Options footer bar button as shown Figure 12 2 Size There are two ways of arranging index cards within a corkboard The first is to set the size of cards and then let the corkboard wrap the cards as they fit the second is to provide a number of cards you always want to see in each row and let the corkboard resize the cards to fit that number When the latter method is in use see below for setting that the Size control will be disabled 86 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING Ratio Determines the size ration between height and width By default this will be 3 x 5 in order to emulate the appearance of real index cards If you write very long or very short synopses however you might find that adjusting this to produce shorter or taller cards will be of benefit Spacing The amount of space that will be drawn between index cards both vertically and horizontally To pack more cards into the display at once move the slider toward the left To spread out the cards and make them mor
158. dition This version of the manual is mostly complete with the exception of a few sections These are being worked on as quickly as possible but be rest assured if you note something missing we probably already know it is missing and will have an updated version available soon Latest copies of the PDF can be downloaded from our Support page http www literatureandlatte com support php v Acknowledgements Many thanks to the following people for very kindly donating time or code to Scrivener Heinrich Gliesen help with inline image scaling Jonathon Mah help with the bubble high lights around comments and footnotes Andreas Mayer NSBezierPath and table view extensions Andrew C Stone smart quotes code Todd Ransom returnself com filtering and page number author of Avenir at printing code Jesse Grosjean author of Mori and Write Room at Hog Bay Software auto saving code Split view code based on OASplit View from the excellent OmniGroup Andy Matuschak Scrivener uses the superb Sparkle framework for software updates cre ated by Andy Matuschak Matt Gemmell various code snippets in cluding the colour contrast code the use of QuickLook for the file link view and the corkboard options bubble window from his source code site Andy Matuschak and Matt Gemmell are also responsible for the basis of the code for Scrivener s HUD panels in Tiger code to be http ww
159. ds Anyway One of the issues that takes some adjustment to get used to is the relationship between index cards and the text of the book itself You can type titles and text onto the card just like you would the real thing but there is sometimes confusion as to why that text doesn t get dropped into the book So let s take a look at what an index card really is There are really seven different components to an index card but depending on your preferences you might not see them all at once 1 The document icon 2 The document location numeral 83 84 CHAPTER 12 PROJECT PLANNING E 3 A scene in your book This is the synopsis for the document represented by this card It is meant to be a short summary of what the document contains Figure 12 1 A fully loaded index card using the rounded card theme 3 The title of the document 4 The synopsis of the document 5 The colour label colour swatch in top right corner 6 The status stamp diagonal text stamped across the middle 7 Keywords indicators swatches along the right At its most minimal you ll only see the first four of those and the second can even be turned off in preferences leaving three core elements that cannot be removed The icon as you might have guessed correlates directly with the icon that is visible in the binder In most cases this will be one of the variations of a folder or text icon depending on its content status but in some cases i
160. e is the editor viewer This is an editable full power text editor when viewing standard file or folder documents and a standard media viewer just like the main editor when viewing PDFs images or QuickTime documents Below the editor viewing area you will find a compact footer bar which will display a word and character count for standard file or folder documents Beside that a drop down menu will give you access to some document meta data Unlike loading film and audio in a split the remove pause and resume commands will not work in QuickReference panes as you can have many audio files open at once and Scrivener would not know which one to trigger 161 162 CHAPTER 18 QUICKREFERENCE You might want to take a moment to examine the Navigation pane in preferences section B 5 to see how you can use QuickReference panels to open things you might otherwise have thought you could only open in standard editor splits See also z Inspector chapter 17 Meta Data Types section 10 1 18 1 QuickReference Mini lInsoector Each QuickReference panel has the ability to load up key components of the inspec tor s meta data into a split view Using the drop down menu you can select which type of meta data you wish to view 1 Synopsis the content of the index card 2 Picture the representational graphic if one has been selected 3 Notes standard document notes you cannot access project notes from a Quick Reference wind
161. e Markdown s syntax but to extend it to work with complete documents that could ultimately be converted from text into other formats including complete XHTML documents LaTeX PDF RTF or even shudder Microsoft Word documents In addition to the ability to work with complete documents and conversion to other formats the Markdown syntax was lacking a few things Michel Fortin added a few additional syntax tools when writing PHP Markdown Extra Some of his ideas were implemented and expanded on in MultiMarkdown John Gruber may disagree with me but I really did try to stick with his pro claimed vision whenever I added a new syntax format to MultiMarkdown The qual ity that attracted me to Markdown the most was its clean format Reading a plain text document written in Markdown is easy It makes sense and it looks like it was designed for people not computers To the extent possible I tried to keep this same concept in mind when working on MultiMarkdown I may or may not have succeeded in this For comprehensive information about MultiMarkdown and how to use it see Fletcher s website 28 3 MultiMarkdown and Scrivener The first thing to note when using MultiMarkdown in Scrivener is that because Scrivener is a rich text editor it has no plain text mode This means that you can add bold italics images and so forth to your text but when you export to a Multi Markdown format which requires the text to be converte
162. e Scrivener interface has been carefully designed to cover a wide range of uses At its most minimal the interface could look no more complicated than TextEdit Most projects will require some level of interface balance between these two examples In this section we will go over some of the basic interface elements that will be present in nearly every project you work in Advanced features such as many seen above will be gradually introduced in their own sections as they pertain to specific areas of the writing process 5 1 Interface Overview The main interface comprises six main elements not all of which are visible when a new project is created 1 Toolbar Frequently used tools displayed in a standard fashion familiar to most Mac OS X applications which can be customised as you see fit 2 The Binder A hierarchal list of all items in your project including the manuscript a general collection area for research materials notes and so forth a trash can for collecting deleted items and finally the top level area where you can create your own files and folders 3 The Format Bar Supplies frequently used text editing and formatting tools available to both editor splits 4 The Editor As shown in the screenshot the editor can be split into to panes which can show two parts of the same document or two different items alto gether This is where all viewing and editing is done 5 The Inspector A feature packed tool providing i
163. e are not ticked by default The following options are available Import selected documents into At the top of the Import pane you can choose the folder in the project into which imported documents should be placed the Research folder is used by default Only show containers in destination list limits the documents shown in the list to folders and containers if unchecked you can choose to import documents as the subdocuments of any file in the project If you are unsure just leave it ticked Remove blank lines between paragraphs in imported notes Allows you to choose whether or not empty lines should be removed in imported documents because Simplenote is plain text it is common to separate paragraphs using empty lines but in Scrivener paragraphs are less likely to need blank lines between them Note that when uploading documents to Simplenote Scrivener automatically places blank line padding between paragraphs to make them easier to read in Simplenote Delete from Simplenote notes marked for this project but not selected for syncing When checked any notes that appear in the Notes marked for this project list that are not ticked for syncing will be removed from the Simplenote servers Given that this could result in the deletion of the only copies of such notes you will be asked to confirm this deletion during sync Once you are happy with the documents you have selected for synchronization and import click on Syn
164. e contents of the current session for that split Favourites will not be shown when the menu is modifed in this way See also Editing Multiple Documents section 14 13 In Full Screen To use the Go To menu in Full Screen mode move the mouse to the top of your screen for a moment The application menu should drop down and you ll be able to access the View menu 9 3 Hoisting the Binder When you need to focus on one specific area of the binder you can use Docu ments Hoist Binder to isolate the currently selected container Only one item can be selected and it must be a container file or folder When a container has been hoisted the appearance of the binder will change The header bar will be replaced with the name of the container that has been selected including a small icon representation of its type and the list of items available will be reduced to only those items which are children of the selected container action hoisting png 9 4 LOCKING THE EDITOR 61 If you wish to select the container itself to for example view Scrivenings or its corkboard click on the header bar Once selected you can choose the view mode you prefer if necessary To return to standard Binder view either click the indicated X button in the footer bar of the binder area or select the menu command Documents Unhoist Binder 9 4 Locking the Editor The editor can be locked with View Editor Lock in Place or the X L shortc
165. e counts are less important Draft Character Count As with Manual Word Count inserts a token for the total character count Again rounding options are available Bookmark Annotations 738 B Inserts a special inline annotation at the be ginning of the current line used to populate a document s bookmark menu See Text Bookmarks section 14 12 Inserts a special inline annotation at the beginning of the current line This will start a new section in a document s bookmark menu See Text Bookmarks section 14 12 for more information Current Date amp Time 38 D Inserts a plain text date stamp based on your system s Long Date format A 3 EDIT MENU 237 Append Selection to Document Provides a sub menu populated with all of the text documents in your project By selecting one of these the text currently selected will be added to the end of that document If it is your intention to move the text instead of copying it after issuing this command you can simply press the Delete key Use the New sub menu choice to create a new document containing the se lected text You will be asked where to place this new document in a subsequent sheet Edit Add Link For use with hyperlinks If the cursor is currently placed inside of a link this command will let you edit the destination for that link If the cursor is not placed within a link you can use this command to make a new one It will be inserted into the curre
166. e current document you are editing within that session When the Scrivenings session is the result of a Multiple Selection it will be stated as such and the name of the currently edited document within the session will be suffixed to that reminder In all cases where the title is a composite of information you will lose the ability to edit the name of the document You will need to use the inspector or the binder to make this change or enable View Editor Show Titles in Scrivenings 14 6 4 Sidebar Navigation Moving to the right hand side of the header bar you will find two arrows pointing up and down These arrows allow you to navigate within the project sidebar be it the binder Search Results or Collection that is currently viewed as though it were a flat list This form of movement is unique in that the binder selection will update In most cases when you navigate to documents using the menus or the various controls available in the header bar the binder selection will not update to follow your select by design In this case however these two buttons are actually synonymous with clicking on documents in the sidebar Clicking the up arrow will move you to the document immediately above the cur rent document in the sidebar Ordinarily this will be the binder The selected docu ment will always be the one immediately above even if that item is currently hidden and on an entirely different hierarchal level Clicking the down arr
167. e deeper this is really a Collection that will be created and titled Synced Documents with each changed project document added to it Every time sync needs to change project files it will look for a Collection named Synced Documents and replace the contents of it with the results of the latest sync so if you wish to retain a list of changed files for future reference change the name of the Collection to something else New files can be created while you are away from your project Simply name them whatever you would like them to be called in the binder and save them to the Draft or Notes folder Scrivener will import files created in the external Draft folder into the project s Draft folder and files created in the external Notes folder into the designated auxiliary container Research by default when you sync Initially they will be imported at the bottom of their respective containers but once you sort them to their proper location they will sync from that point forward in an ordinary fashion When you have returned to your computer and wish to integrate any of the changes made simply load the project in Scrivener It will by default check for any changed files and alert you that your project is out of date If you have this option disabled or the project is already open you can manually activate the sync panel again using the menu item and click the Syne button Moments later your project will be updated with all of y
168. e prefix suffix option in Compile under Document Settings 3 A title prefix or suffix applied to the document level that contains the links This is a more advanced feature of Compile but in essence it allows you to create a list of document titles in the text which will be altered to match their final appearance in the compiled version Since titles can be added to or even entirely replaced by the compiler this set of features will ensure that referenced titles will remain valid after export An applied example The original text reads 66 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING To read more about this topic see How to Grow Better Tomatoes The phrase How to Grow Better Tomatoes is linked to a binder document of the same name in the final manuscript However in the compiler the author has arranged for this title to be prefixed so that in the book it will appear as Chapter 7 How to Grow Better Tomatoes With the above options configured correctly Scrivener will recognise that this link points to a title and that it should be updated to reflect the final version It will be compiled in the manuscript as To read more about this topic see Chapter 7 How to Grow Better Tomatoes The Table of Contents generator uses this trick to keep its list of documents up to date with the final manuscript version of titles Pro Tip If you link the special token lt p gt to a particular document in the Draft the com
169. e readable move the slider to the right This option is only available in linear corkboards Cards Across Set this to the number of cards you would like to appear in each row When this option is anything but Auto Setting this option will disable the Size slider This option is only available in linear corkboards Keyword chips Set the maximum number of keyword colours to be taped to the left side of the index card When a document has more than that amount as signed to it all keywords below the specified point will be ignored You may wish to adjust the Ratio to increase the height of the index card if you want to view large numbers of keyword chips at once Size to fit editor This option is not available when Cards Across is set to Auto When the Cards Across option is set to a number this option will resize the cards to fit the current editor width which was the default behaviour in Scrivener version 1 With this option off the card size option will be used and cards will be forced to wrap at the specified number regardless of the window size This option is only available in linear corkboards Use small font The small font settings can be configured in the Corkboard prefer ences pane section B 3 Note that since you have full control over this and the standard index card fonts small fonts might not actually be any smaller than the regular font size 12 1 4 Linear Corkboard Material not finished
170. e will block all compile attempts to change formatting within the range of text it has been applied to Using these options you can selectively weaken that feature to allow some types of formatting to be overridden anyway z Alignment Left centre right and full justification will be passed through to the preserved block z Tabs and indents Tab stops and ruler indents will not be preserved in the block za Font size The size of the font will be made uniform with the text around it but not the font family 25 3 3 Processing Options The Processing Options pane controls provide three options which alter various be haviours in the compile process 25 3 OPTION PANES 195 Compile ignoring levels outside of the current compile group This becomes use ful when the compile group has been set to anything other than the Draft Or dinarily when a portion of the Draft is selected for compile the formatting treatment and counter numbering will be displayed as though the rest of the manuscript existed When this option is enabled the smaller section of the Draft will be treated as though it were the entire manuscript Counters will start at 1 and the immediate children of the items of the selected compile group container will be treated as level 1 items in terms of formatting styles This option is disabled when compiling Collections or when the entire Draft has been selected as neither of these compile methods are relevant to external
171. e you get your script format right before you start using it widely 19 3 Importing a Script from Final Draft and Other Programs NOTE Final Draft 8 users should refer to the section section 19 7 on exchanging files with Final Draft 8 For users of Final Draft 7 and earlier you can import scripts created in Final Draft by using Save As in Final Draft to save your script in File Converter FCF format then import the resulting fcf file Scrivener will try to match the elements in the FCF script to the elements in the current script format For projects that use the basic screenplay formats this should be all you need to do to import a script with all of its elements recognised Because Scrivener is not a dedicated scriptwriting program the way it handles script elements is different from say Final Draft or Movie Magic Screenwriter Ded icated scriptwriting programs generally assign meta data to each text element that tell the program that for instance this line of text is a scene heading that paragraph is a piece of dialogue and so on Scrivener does little more than automate the process you would have to use yourself were you to use a standard word processor to format your script that is it just sets up the necessary paragraph formatting for each element and auto capitalises if necessary Scrivener recognises elements by their paragraph format ting for instance if a paragraph has a three inch left indent and single line
172. e you will find a checkbox for each content element that can be optionally included by the compiler Think of these as optional material you can include from your project for each item in the Draft As Scrivener proceeds down the list of items it has been set up to compile it will consult this table for instructions on how to handle it If that item is a folder it will look at the folder row and if Title and Text have been checked will add the binder title for that item into the manuscript 190 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Jj Level 1 jj Level 2 Level 1 E Level 1 RAA ENI O I If Y Level 1 P Level 2 v E Level 1 v Level 2 ape A Example Binder E Level 2 Level 1 b Figure 25 4 Example multi level formatting rule followed by any text that is in that folder file If the next item is a text file it checks the text file row If that row says only Text is exported then it will print just the text content of that file into the manuscript Using these checkboxes you can control the flow of information and produce a manuscript to your requirements Creative use of this feature can produce outlines Titles only for all types a document with only your notes and no manuscript text chapter break items that do not export their text and so forth Note that as you toggle elements on and off you ll see a live preview of how they will be inserted into the compile
173. e zip archived to save space and protect the internal files and Scrivener will rotate the files delete old backups to keep the maximum for each project under 25 backups In most cases the more automatic functions you activate here the slower things will get Finding a balance between frequent backups and usable settings will be up to you In cases where security is a concern if you are working with confidential files in protected area for example the automated backup system might present a security risk if it produces files in an unencrypted area of your hard drive If you are work ing in an encrypted environment make sure the backup location is set to also output to that area or use the File Back Up Exclude From Automatic Backups menu com mand to restrict the sensitive file from getting backed up with the rest Read about the various options available in the section on the Backup tab sec tion B 10 in Scrivener s preferences 7 6 2 Managing Backups for Large Projects Very large projects can conflict with what would ordinarily be good settings for the automated backup system If a project has reached a point where backing it up auto matically has become a nuisance rather than decreasing the amount of backup secu rity globally consider excluding the large project from the automated system While the project is open use the File Back Up Exclude From Automatic Backups menu command Once this option is checked off the
174. ed but all of the items with no label set at all 25 3 OPTION PANES 187 Example 1 No Filters Fiter include Documents with Pov i Eosen ay Example 3 Exclude oooooog rier Figure 25 2 Sample filtering options 188 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT The manner in which the status meta data filter works is identical to the label meta data so we will move on to the next example Notes on Collection Filtering The basic premise behind Collection filtering is the same as when using meta data fields Items which match the criteria will be included or if exclude has been set everything except those matching items will be included Also as we demonstrated with meta data the candidate items available for filtering must originally appear in the unfiltered compile group list Even though Collections can contain items from anywhere in the project they will not be selected for compile unless they originally fell within the compile group scope Contrary to the method of selecting a Collection as your compile group using a Collection as a filter will preserve any existing hierarchy within the original list Of course if the original list was itself the product of a Collection there will be none Thus filtering by Collections can often produce a similar result to selecting a Collection group while retaining outline structure The one other major difference between the two methods is based on the con
175. ed lets you drop index cards on top of other cards to store them as children beneath that card This action is similar to dragging items beneath other items in the binder Double clicking on the corkboard background Adjust the behaviour of what should happen when double clicking in a blank area of the corkboard Opens the parent corkboard will select the parent of the current corkboard If the corkboard you are viewing is already at the top of the binder it has no parent and nothing will happen Creates a new card follows a common behaviour amongst diagramming ap plications When in linear mode the new card will appear at the end of the list In free form mode the new card will appear beneath the mouse pointer Do nothing ignores all double clicking on the corkboard background B 4 Full Screen These options affect the appearance of the full screen mode B 4 1 Text Color If this is unchecked the text in full screen mode will use the actual text colour that is the colour it is normally in the main editor If this option is checked you can choose a different colour for the text in full screen using the colour palette Note that the real colour of the text remains unchanged if it is black in the main editor underneath it remains black even if you have chosen to override the text colour with green in full screen mode it will merely be displayed in green This colour can have B 4 FULL SCREEN 271 an opac
176. ed by double clicking on the colour chip to the left The order in which the these items appear in their respective menus is determined by their arrangement in this table Click and drag rows to rearrange them When you create new items in the binder either by adding items or importing they will automatically be supplied by a default label and status value Ordinarily this will be assigned to the No Label or No Status choices If you wish to change this behaviour select the alternate value by clicking on its row and then click the Make Default button Once you click the OK button the interface will update with your changes 10 1 2 Label Colours Labels can have a colour associated with them and are completely customisable you can even rename Label to POV or something that better fits your project see below Labels are one of the most flexible meta data types in terms of how visible they are in the interface so you can pick a colour to reflect how prominent you wish them to be depending on their associated material s content Label colour can be 70 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA depicted in the following ways many of which are optional and can be enable in the View Use Label Color In sub menu 1 Corkboard will be used to shade the upper right corner of the card when using the rounded card theme When using the classic card themes the pin will be coloured according to the label Use View Cork
177. editor is locked its header bar will turn a shade of red 14 6 3 Header Bar Title Next to the icon is the title of the current view This is a dynamic label depending on what you are viewing In the most simple cases it will display the title of the document you are currently viewing or editing Whenever the presented title consists of only the title itself you may edit the name of it by clicking within the text and pressing Enter to confirm When you are viewing a collection of items in a corkboard or cutliner the name of the viewed container will be displayed That is if you click on a folder in the binder the name of that folder will be displayed in the header bar regardless of which index card or outliner row you have currently selected 14 6 HEADER BAR 131 When viewing the result of multiple item selections in the binder the view will dis play the title Multiple Selection This is a unique view which lets you know that the corkboard or outliner you are viewing doesn t exist anywhere in the project You are viewing a selection of items but you will not be able to add new items or re arrange existing items because there relationship amongst each other does not cor relate with anything in the Binder In the case of a Scrivenings session that comes about as the result of clicking on a container the name of the container will be displayed first followed by Compos ite Suffixed to this will be the name of th
178. ee easy ways to snapshot it for future reference The key thing to understand with Snapshots is that they provide a way to set mile stones for individual documents They are not a tool for providing an overall snap shot of the entire project structurally speaking and are probably not the best tool for taking a quick snapshot of your entire draft In most cases large scale backups like this would be best created using the File Back Up Back Up To menu item That aside it is easy to quickly snapshot multiple documents Simply select the doc uments you wish to snapshot in the binder sidebar corkboard or outline and press 5 or Documents Snapshots Take Snapshots of Selected Documents to create a snapshot of each Snapshots can later be accessed individually in the Inspector pane You can jump straight to them with 3 M or Documents Snapshots Show Snapshots A second way of taking snapshots is to supply them with a title as they are created This can be done for single or multiple selections In the latter case the title will be added to each document in the selection Snapshots can be titled at a later time using the Inspector 14 11 AUTO COMPLETION 139 The third method for creating snapshots is from the Snapshot pane itself in the In spector Simple click the button in the header for this pane to create a new snapshot and you ll see it appear in the list below 14 10 2 Managing and Comparing Snapshots Exis
179. eep this enabled Cover page title You do not need to supply the name of your book here This is what will be used in the table of contents internally The standard Cover has been provided as a default Table of Contents Table of contents are often handled by the device using a special interface which lets the reader jump directly to a designated spot in the book like a hyperlink You will rarely need to create your own table of contents by hand Scrivener will generate a 25 3 OPTION PANES 209 Cover Image No Cover Image 34 Include iTunes cover art file for iBooks Cover page title Cover Select an image from the project using the Cover Image pop up button above sve gt Table of Contents __ Use flat list for table of contents Endnotes title Notes v Continuous Figure 25 9 Compile Cover amp ToC table of contents based on items which have their Page Break Before option set in the inspector Use flat list for table of contents By default the list will be nested according to the depth of the items in the binder To produce a flat list of items instead enable this option Endnotes title You can provide a custom section title where your footnotes will be stored This will be automatically generated and placed at the end of the book The chosen title is what will appear in the formatting for the page as well as the table of contents Continuous When enabled all notes
180. eing made to the synopsis in index cards and the synopsis outliner field To add carriage returns to the synopsis use Return If this is unchecked you will need to use the Esc key to submit changes and the Return key will add carriage returns Return creates new item in list outline and corkboard views If this is checked a new item is created whenever you hit the return key in the outliner binder corkboard or certain list views such as the keywords list Note that if you are editing the title of an item return ends the editing hitting return again will then create a new item B 5 3 Corkboard and Outliner Space Key Behavior Space key opens selected document in The spacebar can be used to quickly open selected items in Corkboard or Outliner By default this opens the item in the editor replacing the current view If you would prefer it to match the binder behaviour change this to QuickReference Panel B 5 4 Scrivener Links There are two conditions relating to Scrivener Links which both have the same set of three options You can choose to handle them by opening the link in a QuickRefer ence Panel which will preserve the current editing session the Current Editor which will replace the current editing session this was the default behaviour in Scrivener B 6 EDITOR 275 1 x or the Other Editor which will open the link in the other split creating a new one if necessary Newly created Scrivener Links refers to t
181. em a Corkboard will be presented to you However when splits are engaged each side has its own view preference This means the left side in a vertical orientation can be set to Outliner and the right side set to Scrivenings Quickly switching between editors It is easy to jump between splits without using the mouse by using x38 E and 1 38 R When the split orientation is ver 14 9 SPLITTING THE EDITOR 137 tical E will access the left editor and R the right when the split orientation is horizontal E will access the bottom editor and R the top 14 9 2 Controlling the Opposing Split There are a few commands that you can use to impact the editor your are not cur rently working in reducing the need to flip back and forth between them These are located in the View Editor Other Editor gt sub menu and have shortcuts for handy usage Remote scrolling To scroll the other text editor up and down use X 38 UpArrow and 3 DownArrow This command does not work when the other editor is viewing Corkboard or Outliner views or media that would not otherwise respond to scrolling Note that this form of scrolling is based on the scrollbar not actual text posi tion so the position of the scroll point will not be saved when using in con junction with the history button like cursor position is The exception to this are PDF files which are always saved by scroll point not cursor position Remote history access Just as you
182. emic theses the writer can often find him or herself battling against the tools of his or her trade Over the past few years a number writing solutions have appeared aimed at those who don t write in a linear fashion All have pros and cons and writers with vary ing styles of working fortunately now have a wider choice Scrivener is one such nonlinear tool Scrivener was developed because no other writing environment quite provided all of the features required for the sort of writing that demands easy access to research a quick overview of numerous documents and the easy restructuring of swathes of text The main concepts of Scrivener can be summarised as follows The software should allow the writer to use many of the formatting features familiar to word processors different fonts italics paragraph styles and so on It is up to the writer to avoid distractions not the software What looks good in print is not always the best way of viewing something on the screen the software should allow the user to completely reformat the text on export or for printing without affecting the original thus making it easy to export a manuscript in a format suitable for an editor and then export it just as easily in a format more suited to publishing on the internet There should be a synopsis linked with each document which can be viewed with other synopses to get an overview of the project as a whole z Linked to the above it sho
183. en if they are containers The difference between this command and s O or E O is that these latter two will respect the typical view load priority setting In other words if the selection is a container these commands will load that item in a view 38 4 will always load the selected item as a text file When more than one item is selected they will be loaded as a composite Scrivening in Multiple Selection mode Text Bookmarks Jump to places in the current document which have been book marked To insert bookmarks see Edit Insert The contents of this menu will be populated by existing bookmarks from the current document or Scrivening session QuickReference Similar to the Go To menu except that the selected item will be opened in a QuickReference window rather than replacing the contents of the editor The contents of this menu will be populated by the binderbinder in all cases Collections Provides commands for setting visibility and options of the Collec tions feature For documentation on how to use Collections see Using Collec tions section 8 3 Show Hide Collections Reveals or hides the collection interface which will appear above the binder Note the sidebar will need to be visible for this menu option to be available Convert to Standard Collection When a Search Result Collection is active this command will freeze the results and turn it into a regular collection that is no longer dynamically updated
184. ened regardless of the selection you ve made Creating New Presets To create a new preset you will need some exemplar text in your editor containing the styling you wish to preserve for future use If you intend to create a paragraph style the caret should be placed anywhere within the paragraph you intend to use as a default For character attributes you will need to place the caret in the text where that format appears It is often best to not select any text for this procedure as doing such will increase ambiguity where multiple styles and attributes are employed Invoke Format Formatting New Preset From Selection You will be presented with a sheet that will let you name the new style choose whether it will impact character attributes paragraph styles or both and optionally if font settings should be stored as well If you do not want the preset to change the underlying font family or size then make sure these checkboxes are disabled Once a name has been added to the sheet you will be able to save the preset for future use It will appear in the Format Bar menu as well as in the application menus Modifying a Preset Adjusting an existing preset is easy to do If you want to make a minor modifica tion to a preset the best way to do so is to apply the preset to some text and then modify the styling of the text With the caret still located in that text use the For mat gt Formatting Redefine Preset from Selection
185. eneficial to read both this section and Writing Part III The level of fuzziness between preparation and writing in Scrivener is very intentional because the same tools you use to build up initial structures and ideas will be the backbone of your actual text In Scrivener there is no separation between outline and book order This seamless approach will help you get straight into the writing phase The topics that will be covered in this part are Project Management chapter 7 Creating saving backing up and managing projects on the disk Setting Up the Binder chapter 8 Using the built in sections of the binder managing collections organising your work and setting up document tem plates a Navigating and Organising chapter 9 Optimise how you navigate within a project z Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 The various forms of meta data available for tracking progress and types Gathering Material chapter 11 How to collect material from other resources and applications Project Planning chapter 12 How to rapidly capturing your ideas and give them shape shapes that will eventually become your manuscript Cloud Integration and Sharing chapter 13 Introduces tools for integrating your project with various Internet services Chapter 7 Project Management As mentioned before Scrivener is a project based application and stores your projects as separate files These project files are save
186. ening what you were last working on Show start panel when there are no projects open Toggles the display of the start panel which lets you create new projects open existing projects on your drive or select from a list of recently worked on projects Automatically check for updates If this is checked whenever Scrivener is launched it will check the website to see if there is a newer version available and if so will ask you if you want to update Note that if you do not have this checked you 262 B 1 GENERAL 263 can still check for updates by choosing Check for Updates from the Auto matically check for updates if this is checked whenever Scrivener is launched it will check the website to see if there is a newer version available and if so will ask you if you want to update Note that if you do not have this checked you can still check for updates by choosing Check for Updates from the application Scrivener menu B 1 2 Saving Auto save after n seconds of inactivity Sets how long Scrivener waits to save changes after it becomes inactive Scrivener automatically saves changes made to projects So that it is not constantly saving and to avoid any slowdown this might cause when any changes are made to a project Scrivener takes note and waits for a suitable time to save them It then waits until the user stops interact ing with the program for more than than two seconds by default If the user makes no edit
187. ent or split will be used as the target In all cases you must have at least one project open for services to work If you wish to collect text into Scrivener but do not yet have a project created you can use the Scratch Pad subsection B 1 4 instead Each method has an alternate form that will bring the selected text in unformatted This can be useful when clipping text from the web which often has inappropriate text colour and other formatting applied to it All methods include an optional titling prompt If you supply a separator or title this will be placed into the document sep arating it from whatever content already existed When using the formatted services this title will be emboldened The following methods are available Append to Current Notes Targets active document split Selected text will be appended to the active document s Notes field which may not appear to do anything unless you have the Inspector open Append to Current Text Targets active document split Selected text will be appended to the active document s main text area If the current document in Scrivener is not one that can hold text for instance if it is an image document the Scrivener icon will bounce and Scrivener will display a warning panel telling you that you cannot append text to any open documents and asking if you would like to create a new clipping for the text instead Make New Clipping Targets active project Creates a new text doc
188. entire document or Scrivenings session To view the word character counts and targets for several documents at once use the outliner view and make visible the appropriate columns by clicking on the gt gt button in its header bar or by selecting View Outliner Columns You can use the Total Words column to collect aggregate counts for items which have children To view a combined word and character count of an arbitrary selection of doc uments use the outliner or corkboard to select several documents and then Ctrl click on the selection The combined word and character count for those documents will appear greyed out at the bottom of the contextual menu Note this method only counts texts within the actual selection not the implied se lection in the case of children beneath the selected items To count them too disclose the items in the outliner and select them along with their parent items Usage Tip The word frequency tool in Text Statistics only counts text within a current view which can include a Scrivenings session Thus to perform this analysis on the entire Draft or large portions of it create a Scrivenings session first and then use the Project Text Statistics tool 14 14 GOALS AND STATISTICS TRACKING TOOLS 145 14 14 1 Project Targets The project targets panel allows you to set goals for your writing either for the Draft as a whole or for the number of words you want to write during the curren
189. erful answers for the merging problem First for visualising smaller pieces of a document as a single document section 14 13 but only temporarily you can select any container in the binder or even just a scat tering of items and choose to view and edit them as a single document Second the compilation chapter 25 system enables you to publish your final manuscript as a single document no matter how many pieces it may be divided into within Scrivener For splitting long documents in some cases you may be able to utilise two im port tools which do most if not all of the splitting for you The first tool File gt Import Import and Split will let you supply a separator or a string of charac ters Whenever Scrivener encounters this separator it will automatically start putting the remaining content into a new binder item continuing to split into new binder items until it runs out of material The second tool special for MultiMarkdown users is File gt Import gt MultiMarkdown File This tool will examine the incoming file for its header structure and not only split files between headers but title them according to those headers and even reconstruct the hierarchy of the original document For most other cases read on 114 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Splitting The Document Often when importing material that you have composed in other applications that do not support an easy to use built in outline your text
190. ervice like DropBox this option will not only save space but will protect the project format from the sorts of damages which can occur when lots of files are transferred over the Internet However it will adversely affect the performance of your backups as Scrivener not only has to collect and assemble a copy of the project but compress it as well before letting you return to your work With very large projects this can take many minutes to complete Only keep n most recent backups To avoid the proliferation of hundreds of copies use this option to have Scrivener restrict the number of backups to a defined amount Once this amount is reached it will rotate through the copies over writing the oldest available copy Backup location The default location stores your backups in your user Library folder under Application Support Scrivener If you would prefer these back ups be kept somewhere more visible or on a synchronized external drive or secured area click the Choose button and use the folder navigator to select the destination folder If you choose a location that later becomes invalid a common example is external drives Scrivener will immediately warn you as soon as it tries to back anything up As a convenience you can quickly access the backup folder by clicking the Open backup folder button Appendix C Replacement Tokens Material not finished See help menu for a handy list 284 Appendix D Tips and
191. es will have renamed this folder to something else but its usage remains the same 20 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE Trash When you delete an item in the binder it is not really deleted but just moved to the Trash folder You can drag items in the Trash folder back into the main binder but you cannot create new items inside the Trash To empty the Trash select Empty Trash from the File menu This will permanently delete all items inside the Trash folder and cannot be undone The Collection interface can be toggled on and off with the associated toolbar but ton or the View Collections Show Collections menu item Collections and search results can also be dismissed by clicking the X button in the footer bar for the Binder This allows you to view search results save them for future use or collect arbitrary binder items from throughout your project For more information on how to use the Binder and Collections see Navigating and Organising chapter 9 5 1 3 Format Bar The Format Bar stretches across the top of the main application view right below the toolbar and provides easy access to the most common text formatting tools For more information read The Format Bar subsection 14 4 2 5 1 4 Editor Scrivener has two identical editor panes which allow you to view two parts of the same document or different documents entirely alongside one another The editors will look different depending on what sort of document you are displayi
192. essary go to Text gt Scriptwriting gt Re capitalize Script to capitalise scene heading and character elements The script should now look right in Scrivener and clicking into different parts of the text should cause the pop up button in the editor s footer view to update to display the element in which the cursor has been placed e g Character if you have clicked in a character element If the pop up button in the right of the footer view displays only General Text when you click into different areas of your script or if Re capitalize Script did not work properly then this is because the format mode you selected Screenplay Final Draft in this example does not exactly match the format of the script you imported If your script formatting was not recognised properly or if you imported a script that has no matching format mode in Scrivener you will need to create your own format mode that matches the script using the Text gt Scriptwriting gt Script Settings panel Here s how Export the script from your scriptwriting program as an RTF file Import the script either by dragging the RTF file from the Finder into Scrivener s binder or by using File gt Import gt Files Ensuring that the script is visible in the editor click into a line of text that represents one of the elements you want to be recognised for instance by clicking into a line of text that should be a scene heading Open the Script Se
193. esses features and options for displaying the text editor as a virtual page instead of filling the entire editor It is not intended to be used as a layout mechanism though it can provide a reasonable estimate of how your pages will look under certain conditions once printed Read more in Page View chapter 22 Show Page View 38 P Toggles Page View on and off These three options toggle between the three page size models Use Printed Page Size This is the most accurate model to use as it will size the pages and margins according to your current print The specific metrics and orientation used can be changed to either Compile settings or the settings from the File Page Setup pane This can be changed in the Editor tab section B 6 Use Preferences Page Size A custom layout can be created in the Editor tab as well which will be used to define the size and margins of the page These metrics can be changed in the Editor tab section B 6 A 4 VIEW MENU 245 Two Pages Across When enabled instead of displaying pages in vertical col umn two will be placed beside each other as though reading a book Corkboard Accesses features and visual options for the corkboard All of the set tings available in this menu are project specific and most of them will only impact a single split allowing you to have different view settings for each ed itor For more information on using the corkboard see The Corkboard sec tion 12 1 No
194. et up depending on your default system language This should go from right to left or left to right automatically If however you do most of your writing in a language that is different from your system settings you can manually override this here Note you can also manually override individual documents as well in Format Text Writing Direction this only sets the default Authors working in both Arabic and German for example will probably want to leave this setting at Natural and change each document according to the language it contains B 7 2 Edit Scrivenings Titles Style When View Editor gt Display Titles for Edit Scrivenings is enabled this font setting will adjust the appearance of the text used to show titles in the edit scrivenings session You can also choose to centre the titles in the editor instead of the default left align ment B 8 AUTO CORRECTION 2 9 B 8 Auto Correction The Auto Correction tab contains many of the options that were previously found in the Typography section in Scrivener 1 B 8 1 Spelling Check spelling as you type in new projects Displays red underlining for words that are not found in the built in dictionary as you type This setting only impacts future projects To change the behaviour of existing projects toggle this feature on in the Edit Spelling and Grammar menu Correct spelling errors as you type Will correct common spelling errors and typos automatically For example te
195. ew project based on an existing template click on that template to make it active or select the Blank template to start with a fresh project A descrip tion of the template if one has been provided will appear in the grey text box below the selection area Click the Choose button to proceed The next step is selecting where you would like to save the project file It is a good idea to choose a place that you will remember You might want to create a special folder in the Documents folder just for your Scrivener projects You can use the New Folder button to do so Type the name of your project into Save As field This can be changed later if you require so if your project doesn t have a final title yet don t worry At any point you can go back and change your initial selection if you change your mind by clicking the Cancel button The Create button will activate once you have supplied a name and valid save loca tion Click this button to proceed with the settings you have chosen 7 3 Saving and Making Copies While you work your projects will be automatically saved on a frequent basis By default this means that after two seconds of inactivity the project will always be saved You can monitor this process by watching the upper left corner of the window The left most traffic light button will have a dot inside of it whenever the project contains edits which have yet to be saved to the disk If you stop typing for a mome
196. exported in a variety of ways usually text based for maximum compatibility so you needn t fear having important organisational information get ting locked in with the project format Meta data can be exported in the following fashions 1 Compiling when compiling the Draft enabling meta data export is an optional feature of the Formatting pane The various types of meta data will be exported into the Draft in a variety of ways best suited the type of data involved 2 File export when exporting files from the Binder meta data can be placed into optional sidecar plain text files corresponding to the main document being exported This method is used to preserve the integrity of the original docu ment and to enable meta data export in formats which would not otherwise allow text data to be inserted into it such as QuickTime movies 10 2 KEYWORDS HUD 73 3 Outline and Corkboard printing both of these printing methods optionally allow meta data to be expressed in the printout Unlike the above two examples these allow for a more fine grained approach letting you export just the label or keywords if you want 4 Drag and Drop When dragging documents from one Scrivener project to an other all meta data will be preserved where applicable In some cases like labels and status these values will need to already exist in the target project 10 2 Keywords HUD The Keywords HUD holds all of the keywords in use by the project As
197. f a combined text view it might mean many documents 238 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Find Next Previous s8 G lt 38 G Jumps to the next or last matching text based on the criteria supplied in the Find panel Note these can be used even if the find panel is closed Use Selection for Find 38 E Sets the selected text as the current find term copying it into the Find text field if the find panel is closed Jump to Selection s8 J Will scroll the editor view so that your cursor po sition is centred on the page Useful if you have used the scrollbar or PageUp PageDown to briefly check other areas of the text Project Replace Shows the Project Replace sheet which allows you to re place text throughout the whole project This operation cannot be un done use with care Project Search 38 F Provides a shortcut for the toolbar Project Find tool If the toolbar has been hidden a separate window will be opened up for your convenience Both of these tools are quite powerful and have a wide range of options Please read Searching and Replacing section 14 5 for more information on how to use them If you are looking for the old menu commands to Find Annotation and Find Highlight these operations have been rolled into the new Find by For matting tool which now also allows a much wider range of formatting that can be searched for Find by Formatting 38 F Opens the Fin
198. f affected documents before updating F Check for changes in external folder on project open Import Import new non Draft items into C3 Research A Only show containers in destination list Format Format for external Draft files Rich Text RTF Format for other external files Rich Text RTF Mv Automatically convert plain text paragraph spacing Figure 13 4 Sync External Folder Sheet keeps your computer synchronised For DropBox users this will be the DropBox folder in your home directory Keep in mind that the folder you create will need to be dedicated to this Scrivener project and so must be initially empty When you sync documents with this folder Scrivener will create one or more of the following three subdirectories to store the synced files Draft stores documents contained inside Scrivener s Draft folder a Notes stores text documents contained elsewhere in the project Trashed Files stores documents that had been synced but have since been removed from Scrivener or which had some sort of conflict You should occa sionally review these files and trash them if they are no longer required 98 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING Do not select a folder which has already been used to synchronise another Scrivener project The only time you should choose an existing Scrivener sync folder is if you are certain it is for the same project and that you have total control over the project
199. f the DOC 25 3 OPTION PANES 207 format has been set to use the standard OS X doc exporter it will not have access to these controls The header and footer area is divided into two tabs the first tab Headers Footers will control these settings for the entire document The second tab Options will control how the first page is considered for page counting and secondary header footer settings Each line has three fields which allow you to enter different information at three different points of alignment left centre and right respectively It is possible to have all three in use at once or only one or two Scrivener does not support recto verso page treatment Consult your word processor for setting this up after compiling The tab titled Options contains an identical set of fields for header and footer which if the Different first page header footer option is checked will allow you to supply an alternate header and or footer for the first page Leave these fields blank to produce no headers or footers on the first page Page numbers count first page This option will cause the page counter token to start counting at the first page rather than skipping it If you are not including a title page in your manuscript this option may be useful Formatting can be done in these fields using mark up You can choose between using simple BBCode or Markdown to indicate bold underscore and italic ranges Examples have bee
200. f the collection list If an item already exists in the collection it will not be added again Removing items by selecting them and then clicking the key Figure 8 3 in the lower title bar or by simply pressing Delete on your keyboard Delete the entire Collection by first selecting the tab you wish to remove and then clicking the key in the upper title bar Items can be re ordered within the list using click and drag or the same 3 ArrowKey combinations used in the Binder Note that since there is no hierarchy in a Collection you will not be able to promote or demote items Where new items go In Standard Collections you may create new items using all of the ordinary tools available for doing so Since collections are uncoupled from the Binder structure in every way new items will be placed into folders with names corresponding to the name of the collection they were created within These folders will be created at the top level of the binder at the very bottom of the list An example might be a new text file called Joseph in the Characters collection When you return to the binder you will find a new text file called Joseph in a folder named Characters New Collections take advantage of the same view modes that containers do Click the coloured header bar title not the tab to view all of the contained items using the default view mode This can be used to view Scrivenings Corkboard freeform and linear o
201. f the text of one document had been deleted in the process Scrivener would have to decide whether to delete that document too These are all decisions that are better left to the user hence the limitation Since Scrivenings is now a proper view it affords a greater latitude in how inte grated it is with the outlining process especially with a locked editor 38 L 14 14 GOALS AND STATISTICS TRACKING TOOLS 143 While editing new documents can be created with N inserting them below the current document that is being edited likewise with splitting documents With titles turned on it is possible to create new items without ever switching back to the Binder making this combination of actions one of the most seamless ways to flesh out your outline while you write Moving documents around in the Binder will automatically update the order in which they appear in the Scrivenings session Deleted documents will be removed from the session Merging documents from the Binder will make this change in the session 14 13 3 Useful Tips Navigating with the sidebar navigation buttons If you click one of the navigation buttons subsection 14 6 4 in the header bar and that navigation action will result in movement within the boundaries of the active session you will be navigated from section to section without disturbing the session If you leave the boundaries of the session or if the original selection was the result of a
202. far back in time as possible reducing the frequency of these backups the further back in time you go This presents a unique problem with Scrivener in that the hourly backup routine is likely to run while you are working in Scrivener This means that Time Machine will be capturing your project while it is open and in progress a state that could produce corrupted backups if you try to restore from that particular point in time Frequent users of Scrivener may very well keep their projects open for weeks at a time meaning good backups of their project will be few and far between There are fortunately a few tips you can use to help Time Machine work effectively with Scrivener 1 Time Machine can be set to run manually at any time of your choosing using the menu status icon in the upper right hand portion of your display You can thus control when Time Machine makes a backup of your projects making sure they are closed first 2 As Time Machine starts to erase hourly backups that are old it saves only the last backups made in a single day In conjunction with the first tip you can make certain that your safe backups are retained once Time Machine starts erasing old backups by always running Time Machine manually at the end of every day 3 Always use Apple s Time Machine interface to restore projects The way they are stored on the backup disk means they are in actuality held at scattered loca tions throughout the disk It only sa
203. for this to work Chapter 12 Project Planning 12 1 The Corkboard The corkboard provides a familiar visual way of viewing documents in your Binder You can arrange index cards in direct correlation with their order in the outline struc ture or alternatively as a freeform corkboard where cards can be freely moved about without directly impacting the structure of the book We will explore the various features in depth shortly but first let s take a look at the index card itself In Scrivener every document you create is a document and an index card and a corkboard and an outline This can be a little confusing at first for in the real world an index card clearly cannot also be a corkboard In Scrivener though you can choose to view any document as a corkboard Each index card on the corkboard represents a document held within the selected document in the binder that is represented by the corkboard itself Another way of looking at it the corkboard displays the sub documents of the selected document as editable index cards At the same time the document displayed as a corkboard or outline also is also an index card which holds the synopsis of that document and itself could also be viewed as an index card on a corkboard or a row in the outliner If that is as clear as mud I d recommend going through the Quick Tour chapter 6 which introduces these concepts in an interactive tutorial fashion 12 1 1 So What are Index Car
204. for use with several popular scriptwriting applications Application Best Format Notes Final Draft 8 FDX Final Draft 5 7 FCF Movie Magic TXT Screenwriter CeltX TXT Montage RTF or TXT Supports comments and footnotes as script notes synopses which become scene sum maries titles dual dialogue dialogue marked using Preserve Style in Scrivener becomes dual dialogue in Final Draft revision marks custom element formats FDX is always better so only use this if you don t have access to Final Draft 8 FCF is essen tially a plain text format and so any formatting such as bold or italics will be lost Also note that it only supports the basic script elements Scene Heading Action Character Dialogue Paren thetical and Transition See below for important tips which will help avoid strange characters ap pearing in the export See below for important tips which will help avoid strange characters appearing in the export and ensure proper element conversion As for Movie Magic Screenwriter Montage will do a decent job of importing script files saved in either the RTF or TXT formats if you use TXT follow the same rules as for Movie Magic Screenwriter and CeltX The guidelines below should be followed when exporting to the FCF or TXT for mats for use with scriptwriting programs To avoid strange characters appearing in the export the following preferences should be enabled in the Text Options co
205. g so z The dot fill used between the title and the page number is an OS X text engine underlining feature which may not be visible in all word processors See Also Compiling the Draft chapter 25 Printing and PDFs subsection 25 4 3 Scrivener Links section 9 5 Creating an eBook subsection 25 4 5 Chapter 25 Compiling the Dratt The main purpose of Scrivener is to gather together material that will help you write a long piece of text whether novel thesis or factual book which may be structured as individual files in the binder but which can easily be output as one large file Thus you write gather and organise the material for your manuscript in the Draft folder and when you are ready to export or print the manuscript as a whole you use Com pile Draft lt 38 E in the File menu which takes the contents of that folder formats it as you specify and outputs or prints it as a single document Using the various settings available in these panes you can export or print your manuscript however you like and regardless of how the files are formatted in Scrivener itself Compile settings are an intrinsic part of your project They will be saved with the project and travel with it if you move it to another machine The available presets are global however and can be applied to any of your projects You can also save custom setups as your own presets to be used in this same fashion Select from a number of
206. g automated syncing tools be sure to double check your settings and backup frequently Scrivener uses automatic Snapshots to protect your work by default This can mean a lot of automated Snap shots may build up over time but given the unpredictability of all the many factors involved it s generally a good idea to leave it turned on 13 1 Simplenote The Simplenote Sync wizard allows you to easily sync documents in your Scrivener project with Simplenote so that you can work on or create documents while on the go using an iPad iPhone iPod Touch or the Simplenote web application To use this feature you will need to create a Simplenote account by downloading the Simplenote app to your iPad iPod or iPhone 13 1 1 How It Works Simplenote is a general purpose note taking system and knows nothing of Scrivener P 8 purp 8 Sy 8 or Scrivener projects When uploading documents to Simplenote Scrivener therefore places some information on the first line so that it is able to find and recognise these documents again later when you want to sync them The information Scrivener 8 y y places on the first line is formatted like this http simplenoteapp com http www dropbox com 88 13 1 SIMPLENOTE 89 MyDocumentName MyProjectKeyword ID MyDocumentName represents the document title as it appears in the binder MyProjectKeyword is the keyword you assign to the project in this wizard see below and ID
207. g document navigate to an existing document in the Binder and create a non literal link Non literal links are useful when you wish to link phrases in your text without directly referencing the name of the item you are linking to Once substitution has been performed the brackets will be removed As with other substitution types wiki linking works only on newly typed ma terial If you have previously typed in double bracketed words and then enable the option you will need to re bracket them 9 5 2 Removing Links Any type of link can be deleted including URLs to external web pages with the Edit Unlink menu command Any link falling within the currently selected text will be removed so there is no need to be precise about what you select This is an easy way to wipe out dozens of links at once something which is of particular use when pasting text from webarchive files or other Scrivener documents with links Note that linked comments and footnotes will not be deleted with this command sheet new_link new png Referring to these links as wiki links does not imply that your project can become a wiki It merely refers to the appearance of the syntax as it is typed in Scrivener links must always point to an existing resource unlike true wiki links which can be placeholders for items which do not yet exist 9 5 SCRIVENER LINKS 65 9 5 3 Configuring How Links Work in the Interface Most of the configuration options
208. g on an image that has been placed within the text stream subsection 14 4 6 Save As Picture Available if you have clicked on an inline image Allows you to save the image to disk You can also drag images into the Binder z Scale Image Available if you have clicked on an inline image Brings up the image scaling panel Read more about Inline Images here subsection 14 4 6 Linked inline images section 14 4 6 also provide the ability to edit the image in your default image editing software via Open in External Editor 112 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Tables Contextual Menu When right clicking within a table in the editor additional options will be provided z Table Accesses the standard OS X table palette which provides formatting cell dimension and nesting and cell split and merge features z Add Row Above Below Will insert a new table row of empty cells above or below the row in which you right clicked Add Column Before After Inserts a new table column of empty cells to the left or right of the column in which you right clicked Delete Row Column Will delete the entire row or column in which the cell you right clicked upon is located Borders This sub menu provides some handy border tools Distribute Rows Columns Evenly Adjusts the height or width of all rows or columns so that every cell has the same dimensions 14 2 3 Spell Checking Scrivener uses OS X s built in
209. ges for that matter will be converted to MMD syntax and the images themselves will be gathered into the compile folder for you Linked Inline Images Linked images are useful when the actual graphics in your project text are incomplete or placeholders for larger production ready graphics If you are familiar with desktop publishing tools like Adobe InDesign then the manner in which linked images work will be familiar to you For those not aware linked images are the placement of graphics in your text in such a way that the representation of the image in your editor is being generated by files outside of the file Note that for increased performance Scrivener uses a cached version of your image when you create a link to it while the project is open Whenever you re open the project this thumbnail will be updated with the current image on the disk To create a linked image use the Edit Insert Image Linked to File menu com mand When compiling with linked images the current version of those images on disk will be used to create the embedded copies used in the compiled version Since nearly all of the compilation formats do not support active image linking Scrivener must take the current version and embed it in the final copy So if you are in a workflow that involves external help from designers be sure to get your external images up to date before producing final compiled copies 14 5 Searching and Replacing 14 5 1 Document
210. gical order in the binder In fact some people break things down into pieces as small as paragraphs but the size of these chunks of text are entirely up to you You can use index cards to represent beats scenes whole chapters or even a mix of these depending on how much attention you need to give that portion of the book It s all very flexible and in many ways you can use the Scrivener outline to structure things according to how you think not according to how the book will appear Scrivener also contains features intended to make that balance a little easier to work with Unlike most applications of this type you can choose to view many different sections at once and edit them as if they were a single file without actually merg ing them all together permanently Doing this is easy Select the Draft item in the binder by clicking on it once with the mouse You ll get a corkboard again now invoke View Combined Text or press 3 1 You are now viewing the collection of documents as a Combined Text View rather than a Corkboard View Each section will be divided with a horizontal rule letting you know where one ends and the next begins Try clicking in the blank line between the two sections you ve already added text to and keep an eye on the Header Bar note the title changes to let you know where you are Chapter Two We can do one more thing to make this even easier select View Editor Show Titles for Combined Text You sh
211. good brainstorming tool as you can build your outline with links while typing Links appear much like URL links do on the Web They will sport a pale blue appearance and be underscored The link colour can be customised in the Appearance tab under Customisable Colours in the Editor section The underscore cannot be removed so even links set to same colour as the base text can be identified Richard Stengel managing editor of Time magazine on why he chose to run on the magazine s cover a photo of a young 62 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING 9 5 1 Creating Scrivener Links Links can be created in a variety of ways to suit different styles of working Drag and drop To create a link to specific item in the binder drag the item into the text where you would like it to appear while holding down the Option key The blinking cursor will help show you where the final location of the drop will occur When creating links in this fashion they will be automatically titled by the name of the document that was dragged z It is possible to drag more than one item into the text area at once Select mul tiple items in the binder and drag them over as above Links will be separated one per line z Items can be dragged into the Notes Pane and the Project Notes window as well as the main text area in this fashion Select Items and Copy When you want to create links to items in multiple places it is usually easier to use
212. gory Which section to add the template to Description A brief description on what the template provides You may not find this useful for yourself but if you intend to share the template with others it is a good idea to explain what the template is meant to provide The Icon box on the right gives you options for setting the appearance of the template thumbnail You can choose from a number of available presets or if you wish to make your thumbnail stand out from the built in templates you can click the Save Icon as File button which will generate an image file for you based on the currently selected thumbnail After you have edited this image in your favourite image editor and saved it as a PNG file you can use the drop down menu to select Custom and choose the saved file from your computer After clicking OK the template will be saved into the system and you can either go ahead and continue working in the new project you started setting up it won t be associated with that template any longer or close it safely 7 5 TEMPLATES Template Variables 41 In addition to the standard project elements you can include in a template there are a few variables that might be of interest to you especially if you intend to share the template with others For example if making a template for yourself you could just write in your name and address on the manuscript submission cover page you designed This wouldn t work
213. gs Page Setup Margins 21 59cm x 27 94cm Top 1 inches re Left 1 inches A Bottom 1 inches B Right 1 inches Ee Header and Footer Options Header bold italic lt p gt for pg no _underline_ Footer bold italic lt p gt for pg no _underline_ Font Optima Regular 13 Use BB code or and _ to add bold italics and underlines to header and footer text Insert lt p gt for page number and lt pagecount gt for total pages Figure 25 8 Compile Page Settings RTF this pane and amonst those not all support headers and footers For these that part of the pane will be removed Use project Page Setup settings The Page Setup settings 8 P will be used to de termine the paper size and printable area You can also click the Page Setup button to access these settings from this pane section 27 5 The Page Settings button will not be available for the FDX format as it does not store paper size in the document Margins Margins set how far from the edge of the paper stock the text container will extend to This measurement does not include the non printable area which is printer specific so when using very low values it is a good idea to check how close to the edge of the paper your printer can go to avoid truncating the text RTFD DOCX and ODT format cannot access the following controls as their exporters or formats do not support headers and footers Additionally i
214. h will be corrected to the With grammar check Displays green underlining for words and phrases which the built in grammar checker deems to be in poor style or in violation of grammar rules B 8 2 Auto Capitalization Fix capitalization of sentences Will fix letter case issues if a lowercase letter follows a period and a space Capitalize i If the letter is found by itself will automatically capitalise it B 8 3 Word Auto Complete Word auto completion is usually used to speed up the entry of places and names and other common project specific terminology However it can be set up to use the entire language dictionary and attempt to auto complete every word you start typing By default this is not enabled as most users find it too intrusive Suggest completions as you type Enables auto completion in general When this is unchecked no auto completion will every be dynamically performed but you can always manually request word completion by pressing the Esc key In script mode only Disable the auto completion feature unless the editor has been set to script mode Only suggest completions from custom auto complete lists Will restrict the auto completion list to only those words that you have specified in Project Edit Auto Complete List When disabled will attempt to find words using the exhaustive built in language dictionary 280 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES B 8 4 Substitutions Enables a wide array of commonly
215. han the entire project use the Text Goals subsection 14 7 3 tool in the footer bar If you delete lots of text session statistics will not start showing any progress until you have written as much again it is perfectly possible to have a negative session word or character count In other words it shows your net gain during the session The session target only counts anything typed or pasted into a main text view either of the editors or the full screen text view it does not count imported documents or appended text and so forth so you can t cheat Project Targets Options Click the Options button in the Project Targets panel to configure how these progress bars are calculated and what Scrivener should do if you meet your goals Draft Target e Count documents included in compile only will only monitor those texts which have the Include in Compile checkbox set If your work style has note documents scattered about in the Draft folder they will not be counted toward your final goal unless you disable this option Session being defined as the period between the project being opened and closed again 146 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Target applies to the current compile group only takes this a step further and only calculates off of documents that have been chosen in the Content pane of the Compile interface For performance reasons this only works off of the top drop down selection in the Content pane dyn
216. hat folder 11 1 1 Supported File Formats Scrivener supports the following text types for importing RTFD rich text format directory the standard Apple rich text format RTF rich text format the rich text standard note that this is often the best format to use for importing from word processors as Scrivener can import footnotes comments and images from RTF files but not from DOC files DOC amp DOCX Microsoft Word format as with TextEdit Scrivener ignores images footnotes and comments in DOC files so if you have these elements in your documents and need them preserved when importing re save the file as RTF in Word and import the RTF file into Scrivener instead of the doc file TXT plain text note that Scrivener tries to import all plain text files using Unicode UTF8 encoding this should be absolutely fine in most cases but if a plain text document gets imported as gibberish you may need to convert it to UTFS format using TextEdit before importing it into Scrivener et FDX Final Draft format using the standard document format for Final Draft you can import scripts directly into any area of the Binder and have those im ported documents converted to Scrivener s script formatting Better yet use the Import and Split command to automatically split an FDX file into smaller documents with the ability to select where splits occur OPML Outline Processor Markup Language 11 1 FILE IMPORT
217. he creation of new links with the 38 L shortcut or the menu command Edit Scrivener Link New Link If the item which is being linked to is not a document full screen will ignore this setting and always open it in a QuickReference Panel This is because full screen can only display text and there is no split view in full screen B 6 Editor The options for the main text editor control how text is displayed within the editor it self For options pertaining to fonts see the Formatting tab section B 7 and options pertaining to text input and typography in the Auto Correction tab section B 8 B 6 1 Editing Options Smart copy paste Unknown Typing clears search highlights When using the Project Search feature Scrivener will highlight the matching search results for you If this is enabled the high lights in the current editor will be temporarily removed as soon as you start typing To restore them select another document from the search result list and then use the Back button to return Use hyphenation When full justification is turned on it can increase readability to use hyphenation at the expense of not being as pure to the actual text you have keyed in Consequently this is off by default Highlight current line Enabling this will place a background highlight colour be neath the current virtual line not paragraph making it easier to see where you are in your text To change the colour of this highlight use
218. he other and do not want Scrivener to adjust things for you In particular those working in the MultiMarkdown workflow require double spaced paragraphs and so will not want Scrivener to remove these spacings upon import Note that this option only affects plain text TXT documents Additional settings which impact export and import can be found in the applica tion preferences under Import amp Export If you prefer to work with inline annotations and footnotes make sure the default setting in this pane has been changed otherwise your RTF comments will all become Inspector comments after a sync cycle For further documentation on this pane see Import amp Export Preferences section B 9 13 2 2 Usage After clicking the Sync button for the first time Scrivener will export a copy of every item according to the options above If the export folder is located in an area where it is accessible to other computers and mobile devices you can log on to DropBox with your external application and start browsing the files as soon as they finish uploading Note that folders in the Scrivener project will appear as ordinary files in the sync folder because Scrivener folders can contain text Scrivener will export all items associated with your manuscript into the Draft folder If you choose to export non Draft files everything else will be placed into the Notes folder If you intend to start editing these files immediately it would be a good idea t
219. hen a sub folder is selected it will be loaded with the default view mode Corkboard by default The header bar menu is provided as a convenience and more readily applies the navigation action to a particular split whereas one must first ensure the right split is active before using the application View menu Standard Mode In standard mode the Go To menu will list every item in the binder organised in such a way that containers will be converted into sub menus Go To is one of the menus which is modified by the list of favourite items in the project Favourites will be placed at the very top of the menu in a flat list allowing quick access to frequently visited areas of the Binder See also Using Favourites section 9 6 Scrivenings Mode When the active split contains a Scrivenings session the Go To menu will be transformed into a table of contents for that session letting you quickly jump to sections within the session The main application Go To menu will adhere likewise to this model but if a split that is not in a Scrivenings session is activated the menu will return to presenting the entire binder The 60 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING Binder LJ Chapter 1 TE Draft Scene a E Introduction E Scene b F scenec E Scene a E Scene b El Scene c Y jy Chapter 2 Scene d B Scene e E Scene f b Research Oy ar a e Figure 9 2 Hoisting Before and After header bar menu will always show th
220. hen they have been selected the interface will change giving you a selection of elements to choose from You can select any one element to split by such as scene breaks The imported FDX file will be split into multiple binder items at these break points and the script formatting will be converted to Scrivener s internal formatting 11 2 Scrivener Services Scrivener installs several services that aid in grabbing text from other applications and getting them straight into Scrivener without having to worry about manually opening Scrivener and then pasting in the text yourself The Services menu is not 11 2 SCRIVENER SERVICES 81 found in the main menu bar but in the Services submenu of the application menu which will be named according to whichever application currently has the focus In all cases you will need text to be selected for the appropriate services to become available In versions of OS X prior to Snow Leopard the menu options will appear greyed out but in all newer versions they simply won t appear until text is selected Services never show up In some cases you will need to log out of your account and back in after installing Scrivener for the system to properly register the ser vices Where the clipped text shows up will depend in part on the service chosen In all cases the active project the last project in use even in Scrivener is in the background will be used as a target and in some cases the active docum
221. her spot outside of the template folder in case you ever need it again Chapter 9 Navigating and Organising 9 1 General Navigation Moving around within a large project is an important part of writing efficiently es pecially in an application like Scrivener which lets you cut your work up into small pieces An average book might have anywhere between several dozen and a few hun dred sections arranged into many folders Along with the binder there are two pri mary tools for making sense of all of these pieces the Outliner section 12 2 and The Corkboard section 12 1 covered later in this portion of the book For now we will concentrate on how to use them as navigational tools and as your skills increase you ll find other uses for them beyond mere navigation Beyond the three primary navigation tools there are a number of other features which can be used as needed to enhance the main three and these will be covered in this section as well Some navigation features which are common to both the corkboard and the out liner are Double click on an icon to load that document in the editor H O to load the selected item in the editor or when more than one item is selected isolate the focus on just the selected items E O to load the select item in the other split Both views have an Auto Load feature which when enabled will load any se lected item s in the other split if one is opened The Auto Load butto
222. herefore all of the features of OS X s rich text editing system which are showcased in Apple s TextEdit application are available Scrivener also provides some extra basic word processing features Most of these features are available via the Text menu so it is recommended that you familiarise yourself with the Text menu help section sec tion A 3 The text engine and Mac OS X Please note that because Scrivener uses the OS X text system its behaviour in this regard is defined by Apple The way double and triple clicking on text works the occasional awkwardness of features such as tables and bulleted lists font changes and so forth are all governed by the OS X text system which is programmed by Apple and is out of my hands On the other hand this also means you get access to many sophisticated tools which would otherwise take years to program 14 1 Rich Text Editing Philosophy Scrivener supports a rich text editing environment which means that it is loosely what you see is what you get Unlike word processors or desktop layout applica tions however the precise formatting that you use when writing in Scrivener may in fact look nothing at all like the final product The compiler will be covered in greater detail in a later section chapter 25 but suffice to say that you can work in one font say the default Optima but publish in an industry standard font like Courier with out having to change your source text What th
223. hese items are selected You may toggle the appearance of the inspector with View Layout Show Hide Inspector or by pressing 3 1 17 1 Synopsis Card At the top of the Inspector for the Notes References and Keywords panes you will find a depiction of the document s index card using whatever index card theme and appearance options you have set in preferences Corkboard specific display features will not be rendered on the card such as the pin stamp or keyword colours As with the index card on the corkboard you can edit the title and synopsis right on the card updating the documents corresponding representation on the corkboard To the right in the header bar you ll see a drop down menu with an index card graphic in it Click here to select between text synopsis and graphical synopsis In graphical mode you can drop an image from the Finder or the binder which will be used to represent this document on the Corkboard The text synopsis will not be erased and in fact will still be used on the outliner and various export methods but in the Inspector and Corkboard the graphic will be used instead When in text synopsis mode the button on the far right will automatically generate a synopsis based on the current text in the document It will take the first few lines of text and place it into the card for you Clicking this button is synonymous with the Documents Auto Generate Synopsis menu command The Synopsis se
224. hing out rough ideas so take a moment to play around with the view mode buttons in the toolbar or use their corresponding shortcut keys to see how you can get the most out Scrivener s unique file and folder structure The default view mode will prefer whatever mode you have selected last If you choose Outliner then this is the mode that all containers will default to when clicked 24 CHAPTER 5 INTERFACE upon The section on Project Planning chapter 12 goes into greater detail on how to use corkboard and outliner modes to their maximum power The section on Editing Multiple Documents section 14 13 will cover the Combined Text mode in detail 5 2 1 Corkboard Scrivener has made the corkboard metaphor popular in the modern Macintosh com munity and even outside of it The concept of representing many documents as index cards letting you move them around to restructure your book or opening them up to edit their text is unique but Scrivener 2 takes this even further Now you are no longer constrained to viewing index cards in columns and rows you can use the new free form mode to move cards around as freely as you might on a desk or a real corkboard Group together cards that are related but spread throughout your draft spread things out in a chronological order the choice is yours While you can choose to commit your free form ordering back into your draft you can also feel free to just leave things as they are as an alternate
225. ht now Invoke the File New Project menu command 88 N You should see the template selection interface Figure 6 1 We ll stick with the blank template for now so simply click the Choose button in the bottom right or just press Return A sheet will come down asking where you wish to save the file feel free to choose a location you will remember the default is your Documents folder but you might wish to create a special sub folder just for Scrivener projects and give the project a name This name should be considered an internal name it won t be printed on the final draft and should just be something that you ll easily 28 CHAPTER 6 QUICK TOUR remember 6 2 The Main Window Once you ve clicked Okay the project will be created and you ll be presented with a fresh Scrivener project window interface new_project png The left blue grey tinted panel is your Project binder where everything stored or created in your project will be represented in an outline structure On the right side of the window we have the editor which is more than just a text editor as we will shortly see In most cases what you click on in the binder will be displayed on this side of the window Along the top is the Format Bar which provides access to common formatting tools such as font selection justification line spacing and so on If you cannot see all of the tools try expanding your window horizontally If you want to see tab stops and
226. iMarkdown XHTML compile specify xhtml toc xsit in the XHTML XSLT meta data field Table of contents for MultiMarkdown to LaTeX is handled by the specific XSLT in use but in most cases it will be included automatically and dynamically when you typeset the tex file Creating a table of contents is a simple process but because it is a static list you will probably want to save it for one of your final steps as any changes in outline order addition or removal of sections will not be reflected in the list The first step you will need to take is to select in either the binder or the outliner you could use the corkboard as well but since that only shows one level of depth at a time it would be less useful for a large book all of the items you wish to have represented in the contents The easiest way to do this is using the outliner 1 Select the Draft item in the binder and change the view mode to outliner 2 Reset the disclosure states by selecting all 88 A and pressing LeftArrow 3 At this point you need to decide what depth you wish to have available in the ToC Repeatedly press RightArrow followed by 38 A until the desired depth is reached 4 Press 38 A once again if necessary 179 180 CHAPTER 24 CREATING A TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 Select the menu item Edit Copy Special Copy Documents as ToC 6 Create a new text document in the Binder near the top of your book and paste the ToC data into this file Pro T
227. ibility without adjusting the underlying font size Zoom In 8 lt makes the text larger Zoom Out lt 38 gt makes the text smaller Go To Offers an alternate way to jump to a specific binder item without using the binder If the binder is hidden a collection is selected or a sectino is hoisted for instance will let you navigate to other areas of the project without having to alter your work environment The contents of this menu will be populated by the binder or by the current Scrivenings session Also provided are some contextual navigation and focus functions which will let you move around in the binder from the editor itself Previous Document 3 UpArrow Jumps to the previous document in the binder according to strict outline order ignore hierarchy Next Document lt 38 DownArrow As with Previous Document but se lects the next document in the strict outline order A 4 VIEW MENU 241 Enclosing Group 8 R Will display the currently edited item in context with its siblings using the current view mode In most cases this will select the immediate parent of the document selecting the document s index card or outliner row that you came from for your convenience e Editor Selection 38 4 jumps directly to the text component of any se lected item This works as an isolation feature in Scrivenings or can also be used to quickly open selected item s from Corkboard or Outliner as text ev
228. ibly transformed into a fashion that Scrivener can use better into the project file itself The original copies on your disk will not be removed or altered in any way While it is possible to easily edit many file types from within Scrivener with an external editor if you wish to retain maximum external control over the files you might wish to use References subsection 17 4 2 instead There are two ways to import documents from other programs 1 Drag and Drop In the Finder select the files you wish to import and then just drag them straight into the binder in Scrivener Note that you cannot drag files from the Finder into the corkboard or outliner but only into the binder 2 The File Import sub menu provides a number of handy methods for bring ing existing material into your project binder In cases where the imported material has some sort of innate or optionally defined structure Scrivener will attempt to convert that into outline hierarchy Files and folders will be turned into likewise in the binder documents with split markings can be set up to cre ate many documents upon import and MultiMarkdown files with their innate header structure will be converted to outline hierarchy The first time you import anything you will be presented with an informative sheet describing important information pertaining to the various limitations of the import feature If you do not wish to view this warning every time you import files be s
229. icking these arrows will collapse or expand all notes Likewise the 38 0 and 3 9 universal shortcuts for collapse all and expand all work as well Press the Esc key to return to the main text editor at any time even while editing a note Using notes as bookmarks Clicking on a note will scroll the text editor to the position that they appear in within the text This means you can use notes as a form of bookmark or quickly jump through your text point by point to areas that need addressing See also Annotating and Marking Your Text chapter 16 for full usage notes on the comments and footnotes themselves 17 5 Locking the Inspector You can lock the inspector to the current editor so that when the other editor in the split view receives the focus the inspector does not change contents but instead continues to display information about the document in the first editor To lock it just click on the icon of the padlock in the bottom right of the inspector in the footer view near the window resizing area 160 CHAPTER 17 INSPECTOR 17 6 Advanced Inspector Keyboard Usage The following keyboard shortcuts may be used to access the individual Inspector panes AX H Notes A 38 N References AX J Keywords 3 M Snapshots A X3 K Comments and Footnotes These five keys are all placed under the right hand in ascending order making it easy to memorise them and use them without leaving the home row These
230. ided accordingly For more information read Compiling the Draft chapter 25 3 0 5 iPad Workflow Support While the iPhone and iPod touch gave people a taste of mobile writing the iPad has made this more practical In response 2 0 features integration with the popular Simplenote service and the ability to syncfiles with an external folder The latter provides integration with plain text editors on the iPad that can access DropBox and can also be used as a collaboration tool To read more about these new features see Cloud Integration and Sharing chapter 13 3 0 6 Better View Integration The relationship between corkboard outliner and editor was for many a stumbling block when learning Scrivener A lot of thought has gone into making this rela tionship more intuitive You no longer have to worry about choosing between Edit Scrivening modes now called Scrivenings but we ll come to this later or setting preferences to change the behaviour of clicking on items in the Binder Whatever view you used last is what Scrivener will use the next time and the toolbar buttons 10 CHAPTER 3 WHAT S NEW for selecting modes have been refined to make it clearer that you are changing the way you view a binder item and or its children items 3 0 7 QuickReference Windows There are still occasions where it is fruitful to have more than two documents open at once Now Scrivener provides a QuickReference window It s a bit like Finder s Qui
231. if Scrivener can display that file type in the editor 252 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Snapshots Provides commands to manage a documents snapshots make new ones and commit large scale snapshot actions on selected items or even the en tire project For more information on how to use snapshots see Snapshots Note that in some cases these shortcuts will not be available Generally this happens when the selection includes items which are not text items or the text of the item s are empty Take Snapshot 38 5 Available when viewing any text or folder document this command will take a snapshot of the current text and store it for later use When more than one item is selected the title of this item will change to Take Snapshots of Selected Documents All selected items will be snapshot Take Snapshot With Title 38 5 As above but will prompt you for a de scriptive title prior to taking the snapshot which will be displayed next to it for future reference When more than one item is selected the title of this item will change to Take Titled Snapshots of Documents The supplied title will be applied to each snapshot taken for all selected items Show Snapshots Will reveal the Snapshots pane in the inspector revealing it if necessary While this menu item does not have a shortcut an identical function in View Inspect Snapshots provides the shortcut key 38 M Show Changes When a snapshot
232. ile panel is arranged into two main sections On the left is a list of op tions pertaining to the currently selected export format at the bottom of the window Clicking on the options in this list will reveal an associated pane on the right side Below that are two buttons which let you save your current settings to presets Note that all changes you make here will be automatically saved with the project These buttons are only necessary if you wish to share settings between projects The Load button lets you import saved settings that you may have downloaded from the Internet Ordinarily you can access saved templates via the Format As drop down At any point you can hold down the Option key This will convert the Cancel and Compile buttons to Reset and Save respectively Reset will revert all changes you have made back to the last saved version or preset default if you have never used compile for your project before The Save button will dismiss the Compile sheet but save your settings before doing so This is useful when you want to make a change to your export settings but do not want to actually compile the document yet 29 3 Option Panes Each export format has a variety of features available for customisation Some of the tabs will be available to all formats but some are only available to certain types and others only appear for single specialised formats Since there is a good deal of duplication this section will go over each of
233. iliar with OS X s standard text engine it might be a good idea to take a look at the Help file of TextEdit which can be found in your computer s Applications folder which covers the basics of text editing on OS X in some detail The bare essentials can be found below 14 2 1 Keyboard Shortcuts and Modifier Keys 4 ArrowKeys Extend current selection in the direction of the arrow key that is used 4 LeftArrow or RightArrow Extend the selection by word 110 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING X UpArrow or DownArrow Extend the selection by paragraphs 4 38 UpArrow Select from the caret position to the top of the editor 43 DownArrow Select from the caret position to the bottom of the editor 38 LeftArrow or RightArrow Select from caret position to beginning or end of line respectively Note the definition of line is not paragraph To select to the beginning or end of the paragraph use X UpArrow or DownArrow 4 MouseDrag Extend the current selection using the mouse MouseDrag By holding down the Command key and selecting using the mouse you can select several areas of non consecutive text Double click Select word Can be used in conjunction with dragging to select a range by word z Triple click Select paragraph Can be used in conjunction with dragging to select a range by paragraph 14 2 2 Contextual Menu for the Text Editor The text view s contextual menu contains the
234. ill be found in the full screen sub section of the Cus tomizable Colors area in the Appearance pane section B 2 Due to limitations in the OS X text system it is not possible to temporarily over ride the font family in full screen The text colour can be overridden but changing the font would be an irreversible adjustment to your formatting 15 5 Using Full Screen with Multiple Displays When using two monitors you can configure Scrivener to use the secondary display as the full screen window instead of the primary display This can be adjusted in preferences Also if you don t mind taking a performance hit you can choose to leave the main Scrivener interface open on the primary display When doing so Option clicking on text or folder items in the Binder will load these items into your live full screen session As with the standard editor using the Command and Shift keys will select 152 CHAPTER 15 FULL SCREEN multiple documents and form a Scrivenings session To utilise this in the active full screen window just add the Option key to these modifier keys Chapter 16 Annotating and Marking Your Text Material not finished Important note Although you can create tables and bulleted lists inside anno tations and footnotes in Scrivener they are not supported inside annotations and footnotes in the RTF RTFD and Word exporter This means that if you create tables or bulleted lists inside annotations or footnotes in
235. ill be stored in your Docu ments folder under a special folder that Scrivener will create for them Note that in secured working environments you might wish to alter the loca tion of this to also reside in the encrypted area of your drive B 1 5 Warnings When you first start using Scrivener actions which have a destructive nature such as importing in such a way that original formatting might be lost will produce a warn ing dialogue You can choose to disable these as you see them The Reset button will clear all of these dismissals and make them appear again the next time it is appropriate Bibliography Citations Manager Scrivener can integrate with several popular bib liography management programs Use this option to select your favourite from the Applications folder The reset button will clear your choice B 2 APPEARANCE 265 B 2 Appearance Most preferences relating to the appearance of Scrivener can be modified here In a few cases things which modify appearance but are more related to the specific function they fall within will be located in the special section for them A good example is the background texture for corkboards which is located in the Corkboard section B 2 1 Options General and miscellaneous appearance options Binder uses source list style If this checked the highlight bar in the binder takes on the gradient that it does in programs such as the Finder and iPhoto that is it will have a blue or
236. in document meta data fields Label and Status by default but these can be re named as well as the custom meta data columns for this project For further information on using this panel see Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 Set as Templates Folder Clear Templates Folder Will convert the selected binder item into a special template folder though note it could also be a document stack Each project can only have one template folder at a time If more than one item is selected in the binder this menu item will be disabled When a Templates folder has already been set in the project this menu item will changed to Clear Templates Folder removing its designation but not it or its contents Text Preferences Displays a sheet which presents a configuration pane very sim ilar to the one found in the Formatting tab section B 7 of application prefer ences Changes made to this panel will override the application level settings It works in the same way as the application defaults affecting all new documents but not existing ones Edit Auto Complete List Displays a sheet which lets you manually add and re move terms to the project s auto complete list Depending on your auto completion settings this will let you add custom names places and workflow indicators to assist in typing out repetitive items Modify how agressive auto complete should behave in the Auto Correction preference pane section B 8 Empty Trash
237. in for writing notes down by hand and adds extra information to the folder titles one 25 3 OPTION PANES 189 WW Override text and notes formatting Title Meta Data Synopsis Level 1 V E Level 1 o O z D v E Level 1 z z B z v Title Prefix amp Suffix Page padding 4 lines A B U abc 1 3 Style o gt Dp D gt D gt Db Dp gt Db dD To T T T T T ar TT T T3 Ty T ar T T Is ee ee ee ee le CHAPTER One pi v Title Proof Copy Not for distribution Main text Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur adipisicing elit sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua Ut enim ad minim veniam quis nostrud Figure 25 3 Compile Formatting Pane of which warns readers that they are holding a proof copy All of this might seem like black magic right now even if it gives you a taste of what the compiler is capable of so let s take a look at the provided features By the time you are done with this section you should be able to see how all of this fits together and in no time you ll be designing your own documents Structure and Content Table The structure table by default has three rows which correspond to the three binder item types folders file groups text files that have subdocuments and text files For a moment ignore the Level 1 labels we ll get to that in a moment In the columns to the left of each typ
238. in Dictionary and Thesaurus Sends the currently selected word or the word that the cursor is currently located within to Apple s Dictio nary application You can also use 3 D to do quick spot checks z Search in Spotlight Google Wikipedia Uses the currently selected text or active word to search the selected resource for results Google and Wikipedia searching requires an active Internet connection Name Generator A unique Scrivener tool which will generate names based on a wide variety of criteria Read more in The Name Generator chap ter 23 A 4 View Menu The View menu contains all of the commands related to changing the way documents are viewed allowing you to show and hide various elements navigate between views and customise the way information in the current project is displayed View Modes represent various ways in which you can view the presentation of multiple items in the editor For and overview of how view modes work see View Modes section 5 2 Document Scrivenings 8 1 If multiple items are selected in the editor displays the current editor as a Scrivenings text editing session showing the text of each document as if they were a single file Also sets your preferred collection view mode to Scrivenings See also Editing Multiple Documents section 14 13 Note this option is only useful if the editor is displaying documents media will not be mixed into an Scrivenings session If a single item
239. in Scrivenings mode by the gradated horizontal divider lines that will be drawn between each section represented in the session Meanwhile the header bar will state the name of the currently viewed container followed by Composite in parenthesis or Multiple Selection followed by the title of the doc ument you are currently editing within the session As you switch from document to document the inspector will follow along and the header title suffix will update This feature was known in prior versions as Edit Scrivenings but it has been renamed as the feature is no longer an action you have to set up 142 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Scrivenings sessions are one of the few areas in Scrivener that consider your text from a flat perspective or how it will appear once it has been compiled There is no indication of depth while editing documents This is intentional so you can concentrate solely on the same flow of text that your readers will have The footer bar will switch to an alternate mode which disables the per document goal meter as it no longer has any meaning in a multiple document setting Addi tionally the word and character counter in the footer will count the entire session making Scrivenings a great way to quickly view the word count of a particular section of your book If you would like for titles to be displayed more prominently you can enable them by switching them on in View Editor Show Tit
240. in a word processor which can both read RTF well and produce a good doc or docx file This limits your choices to Word itself or in most cases OpenOffice org You ll want to be careful with the latter if you rely on bullet lists as OOo has difficulty reading RTF bullets but it is free and thus a good solution when you don t have a lot of lists in your work RTF comments will also be dropped using this word processor 3 Once you ve produced a doc or docx file from one of the above applications this can then be opened in Pages Since Pages does a relatively good job of opening doc and docx files you ll have much more success using this method than trying to use RTF or doc x directly from Scrivener It can however be beneficial to give plain RTF atry first While Pages doesn t fully support the RTF specification for many authors this won t be a problem in practice With the exception of page breaks the features it omits are features not often used in works of fiction such as images and footnotes Another option as recommended above is to use RTFD This will give you images but no true footnotes which will be flattened into pure text endnotes and so will require further formatting in Pages if you wish to convert them into real footnotes 25 4 AVAILABLE COMPILE FORMATS 25 4 3 Printing and PDFs 25 4 4 Exporting Scripts 219 The following table shows which file format constitutes the best option when export ing
241. indicate the type of split that is available horizontal vertical or none close split Option clicking on this button will change the split type clicking on this button when both editors are visible will cause the editor associated with that header view to take over and the other editor to close Below each editor pane is a footer view This will change depending on the type of document visible and the current editor mode When a text document is being viewed for instance it will display the word and character count along with a pop up button for changing the text scale and a button for setting document targets In scriptwriting mode it will provide shortcuts for accessing various script entry macros Various types of multimedia and PDF will display their own appropriate relevant information in the footer bar 5 1 5 The Inspector The inspector displays all meta data associated with the document shown in the editor pane that most recently had the keyboard focus Note that the special root folders in the binder Draft Research and Trash have no meta data associated with them and therefore the inspector just shows the project notes or references when these items are selected Project notes and references can also be viewed in the notes or references pane of any document see below The Inspector has five different sub views which can all be accessed via buttons along the very bottom of the Inspector If an associated view has h
242. ing it possible to edit your project s content on an iPad or iPhone and later merge those edits with your main project Important Note Note that this feature is not intended for keeping two versions of the same project in sync and should not be used in such a manner you should never try to syne two different projects with the same folder Rather this feature is intended to allow you to edit or share project files with other applications or on other platforms and then to have any changes made to the shared files reflected in your Scrivener project It also cannot be used to perform structural or outline order modifications just simple text content modifications 13 2 1 Setting it Up To access the feature select the menu item File Sync with External Folder A sheet will drop down in the active project with some basic settings The first thing you will need to do is select a new empty folder which Scrivener will take over and use for syncing files with this project from this point forward Click the Choose button 1 and navigate to the location where your cloud service 13 2 SY NCHRONISED FOLDERS 97 Sync with External Folder Shared Folder Choose a folder with which to sync files from this project Choose Options M Sync the contents of the Draft folder Sync all other text documents in the project _ Syne only documents in collection Search Results M Use file numbering M Take snapshots o
243. ional tools for text management Copy Special This menu allows you to copy text or binder items in a variety of ways which can apply or remove data depending on the specific menu com mand Copy as HTML Reproduces most formatting as HTML codes using inline CSS The resulting HTML should look very similar to the text you copied in Scrivener including some ruler settings colour highlight and so on Copy as HTML Basic using lt p gt and lt span gt Applies minimal inline CSS formatting Ruler styles and some types of formatting will be lost This is often the best choice for pasting into blogging and Content Management Systems which provide their own stylesheets Copy as HTML Basic using lt br gt Applies very basic HTML 4 01 com pliant code When constructing HTML e mails or working with an older website this is what you will want to use Copy as BBCode Translates most basic formatting into BBCode suitable for forum posts Because BBCode does not support as many formatting features as full HTML CSS some elements will be lost Copying without Inline Annotations or Footnotes 4 38 C will strip out all inline annotation and footnote text but retain all other formatting Most often this is useful for producing clean snapshots section 14 10 The following menu commands operate on selected documents not text Copy Documents as Scrivener Links Ordinarily when you copy a selection of do
244. ions by wrapping them in square and brackets Inline footnotes will be similarly wrapped in curly braces and However since Scrivener only updates changed paragraphs unless you edit a paragraph with one of these types no loss of notation should occur in the rest of the document In the case that you do edit a paragraph with notes in it the bracket notation will be retained so that you can manually fix the formatting A helpful tip to remember is that you can copy and paste from snapshots Inspector comments and footnotes will not be exported If the retention of this information is important to you it is recommended you use inline no tation with plain text You can easily convert your notes to inline with the Format Convert tools z Inline images will be stripped from documents that have been edited outside of Scrivener 104 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING 13 3 SimpleText ws The SimpleText ws service is very simple and only supports one way import access to files which have been created with tools that support the SimpleText ws environ ment The feature can be found in the File Import From SimpleText wsmenu item sub section 11 1 5 13 4 Index Card for iPad Material not finished http www simpletext ws Part III Writing 105 106 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING When it comes to the process of writing itself nobody can tell you how it should be done Each auth
245. ip If you need to create a mini ToC in the preface for each part of a book as is common with technical guides you can follow these instructions to produce a smaller scale list of sections You will just want to select the relevant section instead of the entire Draft and paste the ToC copy into the preface area for each part The resulting list will be formatted with the name of the section on the left and a special token on the right with an amount of indenting applied to each line in accordance with its outline depth relative to the highest level item that was copied if the portion of the book is at level 3 then a level 5 item will be indented only twice not five times An additional left tab stop will be inserted into each line allowing you to make use of a tab in the Scrivener Link prefix compile setting if you wish to offset numbering from the standard title The token lt p gt will be calculated and expanded during Compile to produce page number references In addition to page numbering Compile will examine the final title output and update it in the list accordingly In conjunction with counter tokens in the title and use of the title suffix and or prefix the resulting title could end up looking completely different from how it appears in the list in Scrivener You also can create your own table of contents by hand if you need custom for matting There is nothing special about the Copy Documents as ToC command that can
246. is means for you is that certain aspects of your editing can be conveyed through the compiler like a range of italicised text while the base font itself can be changed beneath that Scrivener s editor can thus be used like a typical word processor but with the knowledge that rich text format ting can be altered later on to produce different results Scrivener is not intended to be a full blown word processor but rather a word generating environment It is The only exception to this is that in Scrivener you are not allowed to paste QuickTime files into the text This is because of a bug in OS X that can cause crashes or strange behaviour when a QuickTime file is contained inside a single piece of text that is being viewed in two panes such as Scrivener s split view 108 14 2 EDITING BASICS 109 not a layout tool but a tool for cutting the text that will become your book Many authors who have stricter formatting requirements such as scriptwriters will start their projects in Scrivener and end in a word processor or desktop publishing or some other specialised application You might be wondering if Scrivener offers a plain text editing environment as well There is no plain text option as Scrivener is a writer s tool rather than a strict text editor and many of the tools that are made available to you for writing rely upon rich text to function such as highlight annotating and marking revisions Even if you do not require
247. is provided by the operating system so if your favourite program isn t showing it you can resolve this by sorting out why it isn t showing up in the OS making sure it is in the Applications folder will solve most issues of this nature Beside this button you ll see a reload button You will need to click this after saving your edits in the external image editor in order to see the changes 14 8 2 Viewing PDFs The PDF view is displayed when a PDF document is selected Its main view looks and acts exactly the same as Preview app You can control the display of the PDF document via the View Media PDF Display sub menu and you can zoom in and out of it using the Zoom In and Zoom Out controls in the View Zoom sub menu You can also access many of these tools via right click on the PDF display itself The footer bar contains arrow buttons on the left which allow you to browse back and forth through the pages of the PDF document and text in the centre showing the number of pages the PDF document has and which page you are currently viewing 14 8 VIEWING MEDIA IN THE EDITOR 135 As with images you can open PDFs in external editors for annotation or more full featured browsing and use the reload button to load PDFs from the disk if changes are not showing up immediately 14 8 3 Viewing QuickTime Documents The QuickTime view is used to display movie and sound files It should be familiar to most OS X users Fr
248. is selected from the snapshot list it is possi ble to view the changes between that snapshot and the current document Note these features are also accessible from the snapshot pane itself in a button at the top of the inspector If two snapshots are selected these two snapshots will be compared between each other using the oldest snapshot as the exemplar Compare Original Toggles visibility of the change tracking mode Comparison Granularity These options can be toggled on and off individually to determine how closely changes will be tracked with the finest level selected being the used method By Paragraph will only mark changes at the paragraph level By Clause only marks changes made at the phrase level By Word is the most detailed level of change tracking available Use these settings to fine tune the results if what you are getting is too precise or vague to be useful Next Change 3 Scrolls the view to the next available difference in texts A 6 DOCUMENTS MENU 253 Previous Change 8 1 Scrolls the view to the previous difference Roll Back When a snapshot is selected this will roll back that selection to the main editor The option to snapshot the current editor before making this revision will be given Delete Permanently removes the selected snapshot from the disk Duplicate There are two different methods you can use to duplicate the selected item s with Subdocuments and Unique
249. is selected in the editor this menu item will be labeled Document and switch the editor focus to its text or media view 240 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Corkboard 3 2 Display the current editor as a corkboard If the selection is a container its children will be shown as index cards Also sets your preferred collection view mode to Corkboard See also The Corkboard section 12 1 Outline 38 3 Display the current editor as an outline Also sets your preferred collection view mode to Outliner See also the Outliner section 12 2 Enter Full Screen x8 F Enters the full screen writing environment switching to text editing mode if necessary In the case of Combined Text mode the entire session will be opened in full screen Note this option is not available to media and web pages Full Screen Backdrop Choose a background image for your full screen environ ment rather than just using the plain background colour The image will be stretched vertically to fit the screen For your convenience all of the image resources in the project will be listed in this menu or you can select Choose to select an image from your computer To remove the selected image select None The menu items Go To and Text Bookmarks are also available from the header bar icon menu Zoom Provides shortcuts to the zoom menu located in the footer bar for text documents Temporarily zooms the display of the font up or down to increase leg
250. isk based files and folders Read more about syncing in Cloud Inte gration and Sharing chapter 13 with External Folder Method for creating folders with plain text rich text or Final Draft files on your system This export location can be anywhere including network mounted or monitor drives such as iDisk Dropbox SugarSync and so on Read more in Synchronised Folders sec tion 13 2 with Simplenote Method for synchronising individual files or folder con tent as plain text to the Simplenote server which can be used with a vari ety of applications and devices Read more in Simplenote section 13 1 with Index Card for iPad Index Card for iPad is an application which lets you view items on a corkboard in a manner similar to Scrivener s corkboard Using this tool you can sync a collection section 8 3 from Scrivener to a special plist file that Index Card can use to import your material Read more in Index Card for iPad section 13 4 Back Up Functions for managing backup copies of the current project For more information on back up strategies see Backing Up Your Work section 7 6 Back Up To Generates a backup copy of the project to a specified location Backup copies unlike Save As will simply be created and then ignored by Scrivener you will keep working in the current version of the project Optionally you can choose to compress the backup in a zip archive which takes longer but is the recommended me
251. items you ve added to projects on your own They can be deleted modified duplicated or set aside and ignored In fact you can create your own templates for future use which will be covered in more detail in the following pages 7 5 TEMPLATES 39 7 9 1 Using Built in Templates Most of the built in templates will provide you with an explanatory readme style file explaining what the purpose of the template is what has been modified and set up for you and how best to use it to develop your project For templates that do not come with a Help file here are a few things to keep in mind as you explore templates Templates are just starter projects With the exception of a few and somewhat technical differences there is nothing in a template generated project that is dif ferent from a blank project In fact a blank project is just another template that is extremely minimal Everything that you see in a template can be handled just as you would handle any other items in the binder They can be dupli cated deleted modified turned into document templates or what have you Scrivener templates do not provide you with forms wizards or parts of the interface that you must fill out before proceeding A sample chapter folder with a header in it is just that a folder with some rich text in it that is of a large font size and bold To change it edit it as you would any other text If you want another one to make a second
252. iterature amp Latte website It has been written using the MultiMarkdown formatting syntax and so also is a demonstration of that system as well The manual itself has been split into four primary sections and an appendix The first section introduces Scrivener s terminology and interface and has a quick tour for those who want to start writing as fast as possible It is highly recommended that you also go through the separately available interactive tutorial as well which can be accessed via the Help menu in Scrivener to get the most out of Scrivener and elim inate confusion over some of its unique features but if you want to start writing as soon as possible the quick tour chapter 6 should have you writing using Scrivener s basic main features within half an hour Scrivener has a wide variety features to accommodate many different purposes from novels screenplays academic papers and dissertations general non fiction jour nalism blogging and much more While it strives to present as simple an interface as possible once you start digging into the application you will find a degree of flexibil ity and complexity to suit even the most esoteric needs To help organise all of these concepts the other three sections take a pragmatic look at the primary stages of any major project Preparation Part II Writing Part III and Editing and Submission Part IV In each section the features most useful to you during those phases will
253. ity assigned to it which will allow you to blend the text colour with the page background This uses OS X s built in temporary text attributes feature which allows text to be drawn using a different colour without affecting its real underlying colour B 4 2 Options Highlight current line Enabling this will place a background highlight colour be neath the current virtual line not paragraph making it easier to see where you are in your text The colour of this will be determined depending on your Text Color settings If overriden it will use a lighter shade of this colour behind the text Otherwise it will use the preference for Current Line Highlight under the Editor section in the Appearance tab section B 2 Fade between modes Gracefully fades the screen between full screen and regular editing mode Close full screen when the Escape key is pressed When disabled you will need to use the keyboard shortcut for full screen mode Opt Cmd F by default to tog gle between modes Hide main window when entering full screen mode Check this to hide the main window during full screen sessions If this is unchecked you can see the main window beneath the translucent areas of the full screen background unless you have set the opacity to opaque using the slider in the full screen control panel and you can also have the main window visible on another screen if you have a multi screen set up Checking this so that the window is hi
254. ject This makes it very easy to create a document in Simplenote and mark it for importing into a particular Scrivener project just write the document title followed by the project keyword in brackets on the first line of the note e g MyNewNote MyProjectKeyword The two hyphens on the second line are optional Note that there is no numerical ID in square brackets in this case because that is something only Scrivener can assign and when you sync these documents Scrivener will indeed add a numerical ID Do not try to guess and assign your own The doc uments in this first list are usually all ticked by default The exception are documents that Scrivener thinks might have been deleted from the project but are still on the 94 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING server such documents appear in this list but are coloured red and are not ticked These are documents that contain the project keyword on the first line and a docu ment ID in square brackets but for which the ID does match any existing documents in the project If you see notes coloured red in this list the most likely explanation is that you synced them in the past but have since deleted them from the project If you leave them unticked and have Delete from Simplenote notes marked for this project but not selected for syncing checked then these notes will be removed from the Simplenote servers too The second list contains all other Simplenote documents and thes
255. k on the Manage pop up button in the bottom 172 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING left Select Load from Final Draft FDX In the open panel that appears select the FDX file that contains the elements and formatting you want to use and then click OK and OK again on the Script Settings panel to accept the changes This doesn t import the actual script it just imports its elements and formatting for use in the current project To test the new format create a new document choose scriptwriting format Text gt Scriptwriting gt Script Mode FDX Script Settings or cmd 3 and start typing changing elements using tab and enter or using the pop up menu in the footer view beneath the editor You will see that the script uses the formatting of the FDX file Now that this is set up you are ready to import the contents of the FDX file 1 Importing FDX Files You can import FDX files into Scrivener in one of two ways Drag an FDX file into the binder Go to File gt Import gt Files and select the FDX file that you want to import Note that many features are retained script notes become Scrivener footnotes revisions are marked up in red highlighting is retained and so on If you wish the FDX file to be part of the script that will eventually be exported be sure to import it into the Draft folder or drag it there after importing 1 Exporting Individual Documents to Final Draft To export individual do
256. keeps track of everything you ve visited Using these commands you can navigate back and forth in the history Note you can also use the Forward and Backward buttons in the header bar Each split keeps its own history When selecting a number of documents in the binder prior to entering Full Screen mode the history queue for full screen will be pre stocked with these selected items Other Editor Provides controls to manipulate whichever split is not cur rently active The Forward and Backward in History commands lt amp x8 operate just like the above commands only in the opposing split without moving focus there The Scroll Up and Down commands lt UpArrow amp X8 DownArrow act like PageUp and PageDown only in the opposing split again without moving focus there Clear Document History Use this command to wipe out the document his tory for the active split Media Controls and options for various types of media These commands will only become available when viewing the appropriate type of media PDF Display This sub menu controls how PDFs are displayed in the editor Most of these options should be familiar as they are common to many PDF viewers Automatically Resize Keeps the PDF sized to the width and height of the editor window Actual Size Zooms the PDF to 100 even if it is too large to display all at once Size To Fit Like Automatically Resize but only resizes the document on
257. l be disabled Include footnotes in word and character counts This will impact only counters which have been inserted into the document such as lt we gt which prints the precise word count of the project It does not impact the rest of the interface such as project statistics and targets Export inspector footnotes as endnotes When enabled this will export all linked inspector footnotes as endnotes If the next option is not set as well this will require using a word process that can handle both endnotes and footnotes in the same document Export inline footnotes as endnotes Similar to above but only exports inline foot notes as endnotes If you only wish one type of notation to be used in your manuscript make sure to check both of these options one way or the other Footnote numbering restarts on each page Instead of keeping a running tally throughout the manuscript each page s footnotes will restart according to the numbering methods available 25 3 OPTION PANES 203 Footnote format Using the drop down menu you can select how footnotes should be numbered in the final manuscript For formats which support real footnotes this will set an instruction in the manuscript file which word processors need to read and understand in order for the setting to have an effect For formats which do not support footnotes such as RTFD and TXT this option will impact how Scrivener numbers items itself as it creates plain text footnotes
258. large that it will take 20 minutes to copy then you should be prepared to wait at least that long for the project to update as part of the update process is creating a backup of the original You will also want to keep this fact in mind when considering drive space Do not attempt to update a multi gigabyte project file on a drive that does not have enough space left on it to accommodate a duplicated copy 4 3 UPGRADING FROM SCRIVENER 1 17 In some cases you may need to keep a copy of 1 x installed If you are working with a colleague which has yet to upgrade to 2 0 you will want to make sure to not update these collaborative projects and use 1 x to interface with them until they upgrade If you elect to keep a copy of Scrivener 1 x installed you will need to take the following items into consideration scriv files will open in Scrivener 2 0 by default To open older projects in Scrivener 1 x you will need to drag these items onto the Scrivener 1 x icon in the Dock or use the File Open menu command from within Scrivener 1 x So long as you have both versions installed the Mac might get confused over the clipping services which can be used to clip information from other programs into Scrivener Once you have fully uninstalled the old version of Scrivener these clipping services should work just fine z It is safe to run both copies at once as they both use different preference files Chapter 5 Intertace Th
259. le whether or not notepad style ruling is used in the project notes pane This also will apply to the project note window Label colour tint opacity Define how much blending Scrivener should use between label colour and the underlying icon Moving the slider right to High will cause icons to be coloured more vividly moving the slider left to Low will cause the effect to be more subtle 266 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES B 2 2 Outliner Options for adjusting the appearance of the Outliner view mode Uses alternate row colours Draw alternative background colours behind rows in the outliner When this is turned off the background will be a solid shade You can define the actual colours used in the section below Has horizontal grid lines Draw seperators between rows in the outliner Has vertical grid lines Draw seperators between columns in the outliner B 2 3 Fonts Options for setting application fonts If you wish to adjust the editor fonts visit the Formatting tab section B 7 Binder font Choose the font which will be used to display the text labels of items in the binder and Collections Note that some font choices will not allow all of the checkbox options available because they do not have the proper font variant The default font choice Lucida Grande for instance does not have an italic variant If you wish to use these options make sure to choose a font which has the proper variants available to it Outliner f
260. lenote but if you need to changing anything you can return to this pane by clicking on the Change Settings button in Step 1 Note that the project keyword is shown in the top right of the wizard in steps 1 and 2 13 1 3 Step 1 Synchronizing Existing Documents You will next be asked to choose which documents in the project you wish to sync with Simplenote You can choose to sync all documents in the current project or to specify individual documents It is generally recommended that you don t sync all documents in a project because this can clutter up Simplenote and severely slow 13 1 SIMPLENOTE 91 Simplenote Sync Project keyword MyNovel 7 Step 1 of 2 Select existing project documents to sync with Simplenote O Syne all text documents in project Select documents to sync recommended M Take snapshots of affected documents before updating v Delete from Simplenote any project documents not selected for syncing Q Draft Folder Other Text Documents B Introduction O Chapter 1 M scenea M sceneb VM Scenec C Chapter 2 Scene d Scene e a Scene f Opt click on checkboxes to select or deselect all Cancel gt Change Settings Figure 13 2 Simplenote Sync Step One down synchronisations Because Simplenote notes are stored on the cloud that is online Scrivener has to download them into memory every time you sync so the more notes you have in Simplenote the longer the sync process will take If
261. les in Scrivenings The appearance of these titles will be dictated in Formatting preferences pane section B 7 These titles can be edited in the same fashion as editing any other piece of text in the editor though formatting will not be allowed 14 13 2 Editing with Scrivenings For the most part editing in Scrivenings mode is no different than editing a single document one at a time most of the tools that you have learned thus far will be available to you You can select all of the text and format it copy and paste it to another application create snapshots of individual portions of the session and so on You will not be able to do the following z Select text from more than one document and delete it this includes implied deletions like selecting some text and then typing over the selection z Select the entire last paragraph of any document and delete it to do this be careful to only select the characters of the paragraph not the the whitespace at the end These limitations are unavoidable Each block of text is separated by protected characters which separate the documents and draw the divider line and the title if this option has been turned on These characters are of course not part of any document so deleting them has no meaning Moreover if you were to delete a range of text that spanned two or more documents Scrivener would have to guess where one document now ended and the other now began and if the whole o
262. liar to new users Rather than arbitrarily splitting the interface any number of times and ways the editor uses a two way split system so that you can actually control the flow of infor mation in the opposing split while you work in a number of ways 14 9 1 Horizontal and Vertical Splits The editor interface can be split in one of two orientations In vertical mode the di vider will be drawn down the middle of the screen and is most suitable to viewing two documents side by side as it maximises vertical space Horizontal mode creates a split that is familiar to many applications like Mail with content on the top and bottom In either case both sides of the split have the same degree of power in loading various views media types and text editing You can easily switch between orientations by choosing the opposite split type in the View Layout gt sub menu or Option clicking the split icon in the header bar section 14 6 When the editor has been split a header bar and footer bar will be created for each split This means that each side has its own history queue view modes zoom settings and so on Everything that you can do to a single editor window can be done to a split window and those changes will be remembered for that side of the split An example of this would be view modes With a single editor interface if you choose to view containers using the Corkboard model every time you click on a container or select more than one it
263. ling was an innovation of the Blue Tec Group s Ulysses When it is switched on just as with a typewriter the line of text you are typing will remain centred vertically in the editor This means that your eyes do not have to be glued to the bottom of the screen all the time when typing in a long piece of text 14 4 Formatting Tools 14 4 1 The Ruler The text editor in Scrivener uses a slimmed down ruler which can be shown or hidden via Format Show Hide Ruler or 3 R This will present a simple margin indenting and tab stop interface editor ruler png The following elements can be found in the ruler Tab Stops Stops can be created by clicking on the line between the grey and num bered area or by right clicking in the grey area and choosing a type Once placed they can be moved via click and drag and the numerical value of its position will be printed above the mouse pointer as you drag These will be depicted by type using icons The various tab stop types available are 14 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 117 T P amp ds ep eee LEERE lLett Stop Centre Stop Right Stop First line Indent Right Indent Left Indent Figure 14 1 Example Ruler Settings Left This is the standard default type Text will be left aligned with the first line indented to the position of the tab stop Center Text will be centre aligned using the position of the tab stop as an anchor point this can be anywhere on the line Right Will
264. ll be included when navigating this way XUpArrow and XDownArrow jump to the top and bottom of the binder Note this is different than the Home and End keys which will only scroll the view but retain your current selection 8 3 USING COLLECTIONS 51 8 3 Using Collections Collections are a new feature to Scrivener a way to augment the binder method of organisation which will temporarily supplant the binder view in the sidebar allow ing you to reorganise or arrange collections of items in a flat list regardless of their position in the actual project You can think of collected items as being a bit like an alias or a shortcut to that item Changes made to items within the collection will also be made to the original item in the binder A single item can be outside of the collections or in one or even in many Each instance all points back to the same original item in the binder When setting up a new project you might like to create a few starting Collections to help organise material as it flows into the project or as you generate new outline ideas If you find yourself creating a sequence of common Collections at the start of every project you might want to design a custom template subsection 7 5 2 for yourself Here are some example uses for Collections Experiment with an alternate scene flow without disrupting the original layout Collect all scenes which still need to be edited Designate items which you wish to sh
265. located in the General meta data section of the Inspector Created Date The date and time the document was first created Modified Date The date and time the document was last changed and saved Include in Compile A checkbox determining whether the document should be in cluded in the draft when exported or printed via Compile Draft from the File menu If checked the document is exported or printed if not it is excluded from the export print this can be temporarily overridden in Compile This way you can have documents in the Draft folder that act as notes and that are never included in the final draft Note that this setting really only has any meaning for documents that are inside the Draft folder though it can be set anywhere allowing you to modify text documents outside of the Draft in cases where they might at some point end up being compiled or used as templates for files that will be compiled The checkbox never has any meaning for media entries as these items can never be compiled Page Break Before If this checkbox is ticked a page break will be inserted before the document when compiled Useful for instance if the document marks the beginning of a chapter As with Include in Draft this only has any meaning for text documents inside the Draft folder Compile As Is All options set in the formatting pane subsection 25 3 2 will be ig nored for the checked document This means no extra material will be added 72 CHAPTER 10
266. lt Removes custom icons from the selected item s If no custom icons are in place this menu item will do nothing Manage Icons Reveals the Manage Icons Palette where you can add or remove your own custom icons either to the project or make them avail able globally to all Scrivener projects For more information on managing and creating icons see Custom Icons section 12 5 A 7 Format Menu The Format menu contains all commands that deal with formatting the text of an individual document It contains all of the usual OS X commands previously found in the Text menu in older versions of Scrivener for changing the font setting line spacing creating tables and lists and controlling the ruler along with commands for highlighting and setting the current text mode Additional Scrivener specific tools for formatting the text can be found here as well including various forms of notation text conversion utilities and bibliography software integration Font Displays the standard OS X Font submenu which contains useful tools for controlling the character level appearance of your text Fonts family variant and size can also be controlled with the The Format Bar subsection 14 4 2 z Show Fonts 38 1 Access the system wide standard font palette which will change the font you type in from that point forward or alter the existing font of a selected range of text A Z FORMAT MENU 257 a a E Bold I
267. lt 38 you can set up custom names for both the label and status and the interface will adjust accordingly no longer referring to them as label and status for that project If you wanted you could have POV and Location instead of Label and Status or Focus and Type or Monkeys and Bananas or anything else you want This document will continue to refer to them as labels and status for convenience They are also after the title the most visible items in the entire interface They can be represented in the corkboard and outliner views are best administered in the inspector are given a priority position in the QuickReference panel are displayed in search results and are given priority placement in most of the printing methods The default blank project and many of the templates come packaged with a few example status amp labels but you will most likely wish to create your own To add or remove project labels use the Project Meta Data Settings menu item or press 3 The interface provides tables for three meta data types we ll discuss custom meta data below For each of the first two tabs you can provide a custom title which will replace the generic Label and Status designations throughout the interface Labels and status can be added or removed with the and buttons Edit an existing label by double clicking on the text For labels the colour can be chang
268. ly already have a Scrivener serial number in the box When you buy a licence for Scrivener online you will be e mailed your unique serial number which will have the following format scrivenXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Make sure that you keep this serial number along with the exact name under which you registered Scrivener the Serial Number Name in a safe place as you will need both to register Scrivener remember that you may need to re register at a later date too for instance when installing Scrivener on a new computer or re installing after wiping your hard drive for whatever reason so it is very important to store this information safely 4 1 3 Registering Scrivener After purchasing a licence and receiving your unique serial number you can register Scrivener by clicking on the Enter Licence button in the Scrivener is Unreg istered box that appears whenever you launch Scrivener Alternatively you can choose Register from the application Scrivener menu Either way you will be presented with the registration panel or sheet Enter the exact name under which you registered Scrivener referred to as the Se rial Number Name in the e mail you received with your registration details in the User Name box and your unique serial number in the Registration Code box and then click on the Register button You must make sure that both the user name and serial number are exactly
269. m You can also configure in the General section to have all projects left open when you last quit reopened for you automatically when you start up Scrivener You can open older projects using File Open 8 0 or click the Open an Exist ing File button in the Project Templates window As with managing projects that have been saved you can also use the Dock Finder Spotlight or other system tools to open files stored on your drive Simply double click the project you wish to open in the Finder Mac OS X Tip If you cannot find a project often it is easy to locate it using Spotlight and typing in the name of the project If you cannot remember the name you can search for scriv to find every Scrivener project that your computer has indexed It is not possible to delete old or test bed projects from within Scrivener To remove projects you no longer want use the Finder 7 0 Templates Simply put templates are ordinary projects which have had some basic structure and settings added to them In some other applications templates are almost a way of modifying the way the entire application behaves but in Scrivener it s best to think of them as starter projects Many of them will come with a few example items added to the binder but these are meant to be helpful guides for laying out your book not forms that you have to fill out or features that must be worked around The items added to templates are like any other
270. margins use the menu command Format Show Ruler or press R Directly below the Format Bar is the Header Bar The title of the current document is printed here and as well there are some tools for moving around in your project both spatially and temporally but we ll get to that later Below the editor text area is the Footer Bar You can magnify or shrink the dis played text here and it also shows a real time view of how many words and characters are in the editor above The cursor is blinking in the text editor and with zero words so far it s time to get to work 6 3 Outlining Your Draft Let s take a look at the binder for a minute and discuss how best to use Scrivener s Draft section Unlike a word processor Scrivener s design philosophy revolves around creating and organising your writing project in small pieces The binder displays these pieces like an indented outline Let s try it If you haven t touched anything yet the cursor should still be blinking in the main text editor if it isn t just click in the middle of this white text area with your mouse Type a few words in here and then press the Return key to create a new paragraph Glance up to the top left and note the far left window button which is red on most Macs You should see a little dot in within the button This means you project hasn t been saved yet If you don t see a dot try typing another word into the editor By the time you finish
271. mbined Text and titles turned on can be very efficient If you click the arrow icon to the left of Chapter One in the binder you ll see Scene A tucked away inside it No doubt you can see that Scrivener is very comfortable with the notion of split ting things up and with this feature you can feel free to work in small portions with out losing sight of the big picture Use the View Corkboard menu item to return to the Corkboard view What you are looking at is the corkboard for the Chapter One folder which currently only contains one card Scene A Try clicking the draft again in the binder Now you are viewing the index cards that belong to the draft again Scene A has disappeared because it is a child item of Chapter One The corkboard can only show you one layer of depth in your outline at once but you can tell when index cards are folders or files that contain sub items by the stacked appearance of their index card Double click on the Chapter One index card s icon and you ll return to where you were at the start of this paragraph You ve navigated into the Chapter One folder Hopefully by now you understand the relationship between index cards the binder and the text within the items in the binder a bit better Feel free to play around with things a bit more if necessary before proceeding to the next step If you want to import some text from an existing work in progress you
272. ment either inside Scrivener or in the default application depending on the reference type Clicking the header bar of the references area will bring up a pop up menu from which you can select Document References or Project References As with notes document references are attached to the current document whereas project notes are global and remain the same no matter which document you are viewing References to files on your disk which are supported by Scrivener s editor can be dragged into the header bar for viewing even without importing them into the project URLs and unsupported file formats will not allow a drop on the header bar When you create a Scrivener Link to a document in any way a Reference back to the originating document will be placed in its references list This way you can easily track back links while browsing your project These links are however not dynamic They are created once upon linking and can later be removed or altered Pro Tip If you change the URL for internal links which otherwise just state Internal Link in the URL field to a single asterisk that item will be placed at the very top of the header bar icon menu If accessed from there it will load that file in accordance with your navigation settings for internal references Use this to create a more visible soft link between one or more documents such as frequently used research material instructions for preparation
273. method which emulates a printed page much like in many word processors Margins Sets the margin spacing between the text and the edge of the view You can select a different distance for horizontal and vertical margins The top and bottom margin will only affect the very top and bottom of the document in the editor Default Editor Width This value in pixels is used to determine the overall width of the project window when using the menu command Window Zoom Scrivener will attempt to scale the window so that your preferred editor width fits in with the binder and optionally the Inspector if it is open Click the User Current button to capture the current width from the active project Setting this to 0 zero will cause the editor to always take up as much space as possible in effect making Zoom act like Window Zoom to Fit Screen Use fixed width When this is enabled Scrivener will also use the above setting to artificially restrict the width of the editing page no matter how wide you make the editor itself The area not used by this page will be filled in with a background colour which you can set in the Editor section under Fixed Width Background in the Appearance tab section B 2 B 6 3 Wrap to Page Mode Show page layout in new projects By default Wrap to Editor mode is the default Enabling this will force Wrap to Page mode in all new projects Draw shadow around pages Add a shadow around the virtual page offsetti
274. more logical and accessible Better Keywords Keywords are now stored centrally for each project and can be assigned colours which you can optionally choose to display on index cards in the corkboard This raises the visibility of keywords making them more useful when viewing large groups of documents together Custom Binder Icons Create or import your own custom icons and assign them to documents and folders in the binder hetp www literatureandlatte com scrivChangeList html 12 CHAPTER 3 WHAT S NEW Project Specific Formatting Preferences In addition to the global application editing formatting preferences you can now set up each project to have special for matting defaults Improved Project Templates Creating a new project is now even easier Scrivener comes loaded with a number of useful starter templates and it is even simpler to make your own and sort them using the new topical category system New Index Card Appearance In addition to the existing choice of index card styles the new Rounded theme gives both the card and the pins an entirely new look Revision Marking Set up revision marking pens that automatically colour new text according to the revision number as you type it in New Format Search You can now search by a wide collection of format based criteria For example you can look for all italic or bold texts search by revision markings in line annotations highlights and more Titles i
275. more features of RTF including footnotes comments and images MultiMarkdown gt RTF relies solely on OS X s TextUtil command line tool which does not support such features MultiMarkdown gt HTML Parses the draft into MultiMarkdown format and then pipes it through MultiMarkdown to generate an HTML file Note that when exporting via MultiMarkdown using any of the above methods all rich text formatting is lost because MultiMarkdown expects plain text input 28 6 UPDATING MULTIMARKDOWN 227 28 6 Updating MultiMarkdown Scrivener comes with MultiMarkdown support built in so you don t have to worry about installing anything extra However there may be times when Fletcher up dates MultiMarkdown between Scrivener versions in which case you may want to ensure that you have the latest version of MultiMarkdown installed To ensure that Scrivener uses the most recent version of MultiMarkdown rather than the version built into Scrivener you just have to install the new version of MultiMarkdown into either Library Application Support MultiMarkdown or Library Application Support MultiMarkdown Fletcher provides an installer that will install MultiMark down to one of these locations over at his website 28 7 Further Information Fletcher T Penney the creator of MultiMarkdown is actively involved in supporting MultiMarkdown in Scrivener He has generously contributed time and effort in writ ing tutorials and answering users q
276. mpile pane Straighten smart quotes Convert em dashes to double hyphens Convert ellipses to triple periods In the Separators pane z Set all separator types to Single return 220 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT When using the TXT format along with the above settings Convert indents and paragraph spacing to plain text should be enabled when exporting to scriptwriting programs such as Movie Magic Screenwriter and CeltX This ensures that they will recognise the elements correctly as these programs read the whitespace and use it to convert the text to the relevant script types 25 4 5 Creating an eBook Scrivener will dutifully attempt to replicate your formatting preferences in the ePub stylesheets to the same degree that it will format HTML files However many e readers will substitute the fonts for their own internal fonts since many of the fonts available to your computer will not be available to e readers Text sizes and other styles will be set though base size is often determined by the device and the reader s preferences within that device or application Additionally since many e readers han dle text flow your justification hints will often be ignored Most will honour centre and right alignment Since many e readers use greyscale technology colour should be used sparingly In general try to format your e books with these limitations in mind doing so will produce an e book that can be comf
277. mply select the entire range and use this same menu command 122 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Preserved formatting will also protect your text when using the Docu ments Convert Formatting to Default Text Style tool which is useful for homogenis ing the look of your document according to your editor preferences Any text con tained within these blocks will retain their original formatting and not be touched by this tool MultiMarkdown users can define preserved formatting ranges to define code blocks Any paragraphs located within a Preserve Formatting range will have a tab character added to the front of the line informing the MMD engine to treat the text like a code block 14 4 6 Inline Images While images themselves cannot be placed into the Draft you can insert an image into the text either by dragging an image file in from the Finder dragging an image docu ment in from the Binder Outliner or Corkboard or by selecting Edit Insert Image From File The image will be placed at the current cursor position Images placed into documents in this fashion will create a new copy of that image even if it was dragged in from the Binder This becomes important when working with placeholder images If you intend to later edit your images or replace them with updated copies from a graphic designer you may wish to use Linked Images instead below Viewing inline images full size To view an image contained inside text on its
278. n filtering There are four columns in this list It is usually a good idea to briefly scan these columns to make sure everything will act in the manner you expect it to On any of the checkbox columns you can Option click the header to toggle checkmarks for all visible items Include Linked to the Inspector option Include in Compile if unchecked the item will not be visible in the final product See below for an exception to this Title The visible name of the item in the Binder This might be altered in subsequent compile option panes or updated with a counter if it includes a token Page Break Before Linked to the Inspector option Page Break Before Inserts a page break control before the checked document A common usage for this is to use folders to contain the chapters of your book Compile As Is Linked to the Inspector option Compile As Is All options set in the formatting pane subsection 25 3 2 will be ignored for the checked document This means no extra material will be added including titles and no reformatting of the text will be done Text will always be included even if it would otherwise be excluded In the lower right corner marked as 3 is an override which can reverse the settings of the Include in Draft checkmark By default the behaviour follows the logic of the document settings You can however inverse the logic and only export those items marked to not be exported or just ignore
279. n is located in the footer bar and will appear blue when switched on nav auto_load_button png Figure 9 1 The Auto Load button will appear blue when activated 58 9 2 GO TO MENU 59 9 2 GoTo Menu In most cases it will be easiest to use the binder or views to select and navigate to various components in your project However there are a few cases where this will not be true If you prefer to work with the binder hidden are working in Full Screen mode or just would rather not drill down to a particular spot solely to select an item the Go To menu is an easy substitute for other methods and in some cases can even be faster than traditional navigation The Go To menu always takes action on the activated split even when it has been locked There are two locations where this menu appears The main application menu View Go To The main application menu ver sion also provides three shortcuts for navigating within an editing session Previous Document lt UpArrow Selects the previous item in the binder no matter what the relative depth Next Document 38 DownArrow Selects the next item in the binder no matter what the relative depth Enclosing Group 3 R Selects the parent container which the cur rently selected item is within in effect traversing up the hierarchy Via clicking on the item icon in the editor header bar In both cases both sub folders and items can be selected W
280. n Scrivenings Display and edit the titles of documents right in the editor while working in Scrivenings Integrated Title and Synopsis in Outliner The outliner no longer requires a second column for both the Title and Synopsis they can be displayed in a single integrated column familiar to users of outlining tools like OmniOutliner giving you more space for other columns View Enclosing Group It s now easy to jump straight to the corkboard or out liner that contains the document you are currently editing With a single menu com mand view the current document with its neighbours Expanded Scratchpad The Scratchpad has been modified to work better as an out board research collection tool You can now store multiple scratchpads and these files will be saved right on your disk in Documents The Scratchpad has also been approved to better enable the transfer of data from it to documents in your open projects Optimised Text Engine Snow Leopard introduced changes in the way text is ren dered Scrivener 2 has been optimised to better work with these changes improving performance when working with large documents Character Name Generator Authors of fiction will be pleased to find that a pow erful name generator has been built into the application You can supply it with a wide range of criteria including ethnic background gender forenames surnames or both alliteration the ability to add your own custom name lists and more
281. n above for footnotes when checked this will include the text in all comments and anno tations in any word count and character count tokens that are placed into the manuscript Also as with the footnotes option this will have no impact on the other counting features in the application Export to RTF as Several options are available for handling all annotations and com ments This drop down menu is only available to RTF and the DOC format when export preferences have been set to use RTF internally with the DOC format this is the default a Margin comments When using a word processor that can read RTF com ments it is most often a good idea to use this option as comments will be placed out of the way and not be regarded as part of the actual text z Inline comments If comments are not showing up for you using the above option this method will produce comments using the method described above for other rich text formats This method is the safest to use but will embed the content of comments directly into the manuscript text and is thus only useful for proofing scenarios and scattered other workflows Footnotes All annotations and comments will be inserted into the foot note stream along with any other footnotes if any exist This option shouldn t be used unless it doesn t matter if commentary and footnotes comingle For purposes of ordering they will be inserted into the stream relative to the position of the fo
282. n provided in the placeholder text for these fields You can also use tokens in the header and footer fields some of which are only available to these fields The three tokens Table 25 2 listed as available only to headers and footers only have an alternate usage whereby if the token name is typed in using all caps the final result will be transformed to all caps as well For example if the title of the Draft folder is My Novel and the token MANUAL is used in the header it will be printed as MY NOVEL in the manuscript 25 3 10 Cover amp TOC Available only to the ePub exporter the Cover amp ToC pane sets various options and material which will give your e book a professional finish The cover image will be placed at the very beginning of the e book opposing the table of contents and can optionally be included as the thumbnail image that will appear when the book is viewed on the shelf in the iTunes library and within iBooks mobile Cover Image Cover images can be selected from resources within the current project If you have a cover that you wish to use with your book make sure you have imported into the binder first All images will be listed in this drop down menu and will displayed in the grey preview area in the middle of the pane 208 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Table 25 2 Some useful header and footer tokens Token Description Available to Header and Footer fields lt compilegroup gt The
283. n that can be disabled All other compile options that restrict or modify output quantity will still be factored into the count Count footnotes Footnotes are by default included in the count If your publishing environment demands these be considered separate here is where you can disable them in the total count Selection Statistics Options Selection works a little differently than above Since a sample compile is not produced in the background and such might be mean ingless if the selection is outside of the Draft some of the filters that would otherwise be a part of the compile option setup are provided to help you hone the results Count all documents In this context all documents means regardless of whether the document meta data flag Include in Compile is on or off Count only documents marked for inclusion Only those documents that have Include in Compile checked will be counted z Count only documents not marked for inclusion As above only with the inverse logic z Exclude comments and annotations All inspector comments and annota tions will be disregarded by default If you wish to count them too check this option z Exclude footnotes Footnotes are by default included in the count Count sub documents When disabled only the literal selection will be counted With this option on the selected items and all of their children will be counted all the way down to the bottom of the ou
284. n the header for the structure table click the checkbox labelled Override text and notes formatting When this option is engaged your entire manuscript will be given a uniform appearance which can if you choose be radically different from how it looks in Scrivener In a moment we ll discuss just how much can be reformatted but for now assume the entire look and feel will be altered This area of the pane has a condensed Format Bar a Ruler some special options at the top and a large text preview area This cannot be typed in it shows you what elements have been selected in the structure table and how they will be formatted in the manuscript You can otherwise treat it just like an ordinary editor If you click in the Title area you should see the formatting controls adjust to represent whatever formatting has been applied to the title Try clicking the Underline button Unlike with standard text you are editing areas of text so there is no need to select the en tire title you can just place your cursor anywhere within the title and click Underline 192 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Refer to the documentation on using the The Format Bar subsection 14 4 2 if you are unsure of what these various buttons do Title Prefix amp Suffix The Title Prefix amp Suffix button provides the option to input text before and after the title itself This is text that will only appear when you compile it will not be added to
285. n use the Retrieve Lost Serial button which will take you to a web page with further instructions on how to retrieve it Check for Updates You can use the Check for Updates menu item to check to see if there is a newer version of Scrivener available for download 2 x updates are free Scrivener uses the Sparkle framework to check for updates This means that you can check for updates and then download and install them all without leaving the application Services The items in this menu are provided by the core system and other third party applications They will let you perform various functions mostly based on selected text Scrivener provides its own services which are also available hetp sparkle andymatuschak org 229 230 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS in this menu and from other applications as well See Scrivener Services sec tion 11 2 for further documentation Quit Scrivener Leaves the program Any projects that are currently open will be saved to the disk if necessary automatically Under the default preferences these projects will be marked and opened automatically the next time you run Scrivener A 2 File Menu The File menu contains everything that handles creating files on your computer in cluding creating new projects saving backing up importing and exporting It also deals with printing and project specific settings New Project 38 N New Project creates a new Scrivener projec
286. n your web browser Thus it can be useful to store a number of common research portals in your Binder for quick access Note that since this uses an archived version of the web page if the host site changes their searching protocol your archived search might break this generally only happens rarely 14 8 5 Viewing Unsupported Document Types By default Scrivener will not let you import files into the Binder that it cannot dis play in the editor You can remove this restriction by disabling Import supported file types only in the Import amp Export section B 9 preference pane When unsup 136 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING ported file types are dragged into the Binder they will use whatever icon they have been assigned by the system When loaded in an editor the file icon and its filename will be displayed Double click on the icon to load the file in its default external editor or right click on the toolbox icon to select an alternate application The toolbar will also feature a Quick Look icon Clicking this will produce the same effect as using QuickLook in the Finder As with supported files unsupported files are imported into the project package itself 14 9 Splitting the Editor Scrivener s editor uses a powerful technique known as editor splitting You may have encounter split screen editing in other applications but the level of integration and power between the two splits in Scrivener is likely to be unfami
287. nage gt Save to File and save a copy of the format somewhere safe in case you ever need to reformat your hard drive On the right of the panel is the tab view This is used for setting the format for each element Select the element from the list on the left and then set the formatting for that element using the controls in the tab view on the right The setting controls are grouped under four different tabs 166 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING 19 2 1 Font The Font pane see the image above provides options for setting the font and charac ter appearance for the selected element as follows Font Allows you to set the font for the current element By default Use script font set in Preferences is selected With this selected the font set in the Text Editing pane of the Preferences will be used Note that Scrivener does not use the font to identify elements so you can change the font in the preferences without messing up Scrivener s recognition of script elements Size Allows you to set the font size provided Use script font set in Preferences is not selected above Style Provides a number of options for determining the appearance of the current element mostly self explanatory Bold emboldens the element s font Italics itali cises it you would never have guessed that would you Parenthesis encloses the current element in brackets when you hit tab or enter No Underline Single Under line Double Underline
288. nd to use those to reset its appearance For more information on conforming document styles see Homogenising Format Styles 256 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS z Script Format Useful when you need to switch from one scripting stan dard to another Note that if all you wish to do is change the current doc ument writing mode you can press 8 8 to do so This function is strictly for converting between pre existing scripts to bring them up to spec For more information on scriptwriting see Scriptwriting chapter 19 Auto Generate Synopsis For single items you can click the button in the upper right hand side of the index card in the Inspector When you wish to perform this automated function on many items at once use this menu command The command will work in the same fashion as imported text documents taking the first 500 characters of text in the document Note this cannot be undone do not run this command on cards you ve already manually entered synopses for unless you are sure you want to replace them Scrivener will warn you if it looks like you are about to overwrite custom synopses Change Icon Provides access to existing icons and lets you change the document icon to a custom icon for the selected item s Icons can also be managed either globally or by project from here Your custom icons will be available as well as many built in icons that you are free to use in any of your works z Reset Icon to Defau
289. nformation about the cur rently active split The Inspector has five separate sub panes which address various aspects of the viewed resources Not all of them are available for all media types Most of the main interface sections binder editors and Inspector can be resized within the window via the grab handles located at the bottom or in the case of splits by the divider line between splits 18 5 1 INTERFACE OVERVIEW 19 5 1 1 Toolbar Scrivener has a customisable toolbar which includes many common functions in cluding a project search bar To adjust the icons available or their appearance use the View Customize Toolbar menu item or right click anywhere in the toolbar background area It is possible to hide the toolbar by clicking the clear pill shaped button in the top right corner of the window or by using the View Hide Toolbar menu item Note that when the toolbar is hidden you can still access project search via the Edit menu or 38 F which will provide a pop up window featuring the same controls available as on the toolbar 5 1 2 The Binder The binder is so called because it really acts as the ring binder of your project It provides a hierarchical list of all items in your project You can drag items around to restructure your project and double click on any item to rename it Selecting an item in the binder displays its content in the editor pane that most recently had the keyboard focus see below
290. ng and which mode you are in combined text corkboard outliner standard text editor or media view mode See the section on views section 5 2 for more information on the dif ferent editor modes The editors can be displayed alongside one another in a vertical or horizontal split for referring between them or you can just view one editor Above each editor pane is a header bar This contains navigation buttons the arrows which allow you to navigate backwards and forwards through the document history Next to the navigation buttons is the title of the document along with its icon Clicking on the icon will display a pop up menu that displays some common editor commands all of which can be found in the main menus too The entire header bar has three colour status modes z Plain grey is the default and is what you will see unless you have split the view ea Blue appears when you have split editors and indicates the active editor ea Mauve appears when the editor has been locked 3 L which inhibits it from receiving binder clicks 5 1 INTERFACE OVERVIEW 21 On the right side are two vertical arrows which allow you to navigate through the binder in a flat list fashion You can also use the keyboard shortcuts 38 UpArrow and 3 DownArrow Using these navigation tools will also focus the binder on what you are selecting On the far right of the header view is a button that controls the split The icon in the button will
291. ng it from the background colour Center pages horizontally Instead of always pegging the virtual page at the left side of the editor no matter how wide Scrivener will place the page in the middle of the editing view B 7 FORMATTING 277 Show margin guides Will draw a border around the printable are of the virtual page Spacing between pages When more than one page of text is displayed the number of pixels entered here will buffer the pages from one another If you enter a value of 1 one a single line will separate pages vertically If you enter a value of 0 zero pages will flow from one to the next but will still have top bottom margins separated them The following two options are used when Use Printed Page Size from the View Page Layout menu is set to off This will let you work in a different layout configuration than what will eventually be printed Margins Sets the margin spacing between the text and the edge of the view You can select a different distance for horizontal and vertical margins The top and bottom margin will only affect the very top and bottom of the document in the editor Page Size Using pixels define a custom page size Scrivener already provides for a 3x5 card custom page size for those wishing to work in a smaller format and a page size that will conform to your print settings This will let you set up a third display page which like the 3x5 setting does not impact your print output
292. ng the zoom tool in the footer bar section 14 7 In full screen this same tool is provided within the HUD section 15 2 You can also use the menu commands 1 View gt Zoom Zoom In 7 38 to increase the size of the text 2 View Zoom Zoom Out A 38 to decrease the size of the text If you prefer to always work from a certain zoom setting the default zoom level for both standard editors and the full screen editor can be adjusted in the Editor preference pane section B 6 and the Full Screen preferences pane section B 4 re spectively Note that this setting will impact all new projects or recently upgraded projects not projects that have already been created 14 3 2 Managing Documents with Split and Merge The ability to expand and contract the outline in a fashion which best suits how you work is important and Scrivener provides several tools which make it easy to fashion your outline into as broad or detailed a map as you require Before discussing the specific tools which let you cut apart documents or sew them back together it would be useful to also discuss a few methods that you can use to mitigate the regular need for these tools When you wish to merge two or more documents together it is good to ask whether or not this action is necessary With most applications and thus the habits we have cultivated from using them the answer to whether or not one should merge is yes However Scrivener offers two pow
293. not be replicated manually So if you do not like the default look you can either adjust the formatting after pasting or generate your own from scratch by using the lt p gt token and linking it to the section you wish to reference with Scrivener Links The title should be linked as well if you wish for it to acquire any prefix or suffix information Read Scrivener Links section 9 5 for more information Using this feature with PDFs is more portable since page numbers are baked into the file and do not rely on features that only a few readers support However since the PDFs are generated via the OS X Print Preview feature they will not have a dedicated PDF ToC embedded in them and are thus better for producing a printed copy rather than a digital PDF with hyperlinks and a ToC Some things to watch for When first opened in Word you will need to generate the ToC numbers by running a test print preview once they will appear as question marks until doing so Nisus Writer Pro will format the list correctly as soon as you open it The RTF feature requires word processors capable of understanding the RTF PAGEREF command Page numbers will appear as question marks in the list if they do not 181 If you are not using title generation in compile and are instead relying on a formatted title within the draft text itself you may find this feature less useful and might wish to create your own from scratch using the above tips for doin
294. nt the dot should disappear after a brief pause You can change how rapidly this happens by adjusting the inactivity interval in the General section of the Preferences tab At times or if you have selected a very long interval for some reason you might wish to manually save the project This can be done as per normal in any application by selecting File Save or pressing S It is also possible to save a separate copy of the project while working and continue working in the new copy To do this select File Save As 88 S and choose a new name for the project Upon clicking the Save button the active project will become 38 CHAPTER 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT the new one you created and the old copy will be closed This can be a useful tool when you wish to experiment with a series of radical structural changes or simply as a way to leave a trail of history as you work Additionally since Scrivener projects are just files on your system you can use the Finder to manage projects create duplicates and archive old versions Always be sure to close your projects before doing so 74 Opening Existing Projects Existing projects can be opened in a variety of ways For convenience Scrivener keeps track of the last several projects you have opened and stores them in a list accessible from File Recent Projects In addition this list can be accessed from the Project Template window via the Open Recent drop down menu in the botto
295. nt document at the cursor position automatically selecting the nearest word if necessary The sheet will provide you with several common prefix options or optionally no prefix Scrivener Link Creates a new Scrivener Link to a chosen document at the current cursor position Note you can also create a link to a document that doesn t exist yet The New Link command L will ask you for the title of the new document and where to place it or which existing document to link to in the second tab After providing this information a link to this document will be placed into the current editor Read more about Scrivener Links section 9 5 Unlink If the cursor is placed in the text of a link this command will destroy it If you select a range of text all links within that range will be destroyed Useful when pasting text from the Web when you want to get rid of all the links that are brought over Find As with many OS X applications you will find familiar tools for finding things both in individual documents with some additional things Scrivener provides including tools for searching your entire project This list briefly explains the various functions For full documentation on how to use Scrivener s extensive searching features see Searching and Replacing section 14 5 Find 38 F The standard find and replace panel This panel only works within a single editing window Most often this means one document but in the case o
296. nt to leave this set to the default RTF based doc file Scrivener s enhanced RTF export engine supports a great many features that OS X s built in exporter does not This setting will affect the manner in which compile produces doc files as well 282 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES HTML Export Document type refers to the web standard that should be used dur ing export If you are unfamiliar with web standards chances are the default setting of the older HTML 4 01 Strict will suffice If you intend to publish your writings within a modern blogging system however in most cases using one of the XHTML formats will be more compatible Styling can be set to three levels Embedded styling will declare CSS styles at the top of the exported file allowing you to easily adjust them with your own custom stylesheets Inline CSS puts the styling directly into the HTML elements themselves and so is useful in situations where you wish to override default stylesheets Finally No CSS will export devoid of any styling In many blogging and content management systems all presentation formatting is already handled for you and this will be the best option Preserve white space will attempt to convert your ruler settings into the ap propriate CSS style codes This setting will affect the manner in which compile produces html and we barchive files as well MultiMarkdown export SmartyPants language The MultiMarkdown exports run the c
297. nto the Terminal defaults write com literatureandlatte scrivener2 SCRNoSinglePixelSplits 1 To remove this setting defaults delete com literatureandlatte scrivener2 SCRNoSinglePixelSplits You will need to restart Scrivener after executing either of these
298. o helped beta test during the early stages your feedback led directly to the freeware release of Scrivener Gold and a much enhanced Scrivener Special mention to Alexandria Pallas Weinbrecht for all the help in testing Scrivener s full screen mode on a dual monitor set up Ernesto Salcedo for help with a bug in viewing webarchives And in the best Oscars speech style thanks to Kurt Vonnegut for making me want to write and my father for buying me a ZX Spectrum when I was a boy and thus forever turning me into a geek http code google com p shortcutrecorder http homepage mac com nathan_day pages source xml Shttp www lorem ca http www codehackers net http skim app sourceforge net Part I Introduction Chapter 1 Philosophy Most word processors and text editors aimed at writers assume the creative process will take place in linear form that is they assume that the writer knows how his or her work will begin and will start at the beginning and continue through un til reaching the end Planning and restructuring is therefore forced into a separate workflow the writer must either plan before beginning and keep track of hundreds of different files using the Finder or face the laborious task of cutting and pasting numerous chunks of text to restructure a long piece of work at the end For shorter pieces of writing this is not a massive problem but for longer texts such as novels or acad
299. o close your Scrivener project at that point While Scrivener will make scrupulous copies of everything it changes unless you ve disabled snapshot generation it s best to work in an alternating pattern to reduce confusion between which file is the most up to date In a collaboration environment it may not be possible to wait until the other per son is finished It is safe to work in both the project and the exported copies at once so long as changed files are looked over after syncing In most cases Scrivener will select the best option for you but in cases where both you and your colleague have changed the file in between syncs you might need to resolve the differences using Snapshots and the Compare feature For more information on using Snapshots see the Snapshots Pane subsection 17 4 4 When performing a folder sync only resources which have changed either in the project or on the disk will be synchronised to save time In the case where project binder items have been updated from the disk a list of these changed items will be presented to you upon completion The list will not contain items which have only 13 2 SYNCHRONISED FOLDERS 101 changed on the disk Use this tool to browse through the changed items and review them with the Snapshot Compare feature This interface is much like Project Search and can be dismissed by clicking the X button in the bottom corner of the binder footer bar For those that want to dig a littl
300. o on so don t worry too much about adhering to any 6 4 COMPILING THE DRAFT 33 standards Scrivener has no standard except for your standard which will develop in time as you become more familiar with the interface If you have a spare hour or two it would be really beneficial to go through the full interactive tutorial or watch the introductory videos available on the Scrivener homepage Together they cover Scrivener s features in much more detail and should address most things you should know to get the best results out of Scrivener Further recommended reading 1 Interface chapter 5 2 Navigating and Organising chapter 9 3 Gathering Material chapter 11 4 Writing and Editing chapter 14 5 Compiling the Draft chapter 25 For now happy writing http www literatureandlatte com videos index php Part II Preparation 6 4 COMPILING THE DRAFT 35 One of the principle goals of Scrivener is to be your first stop when a new major project is embarked upon The program therefore contains a variety of tools which address the early phases of a writing project These include brainstorming outlining collecting and organising research gathering prose snippets building background and world building information and so on This section will cover the majority of the tools that you may use to accomplish these goals If your method of writing couples the process of writing with preparation you might find it b
301. o the ePub format If you wish to adjust the HTML DocType specifications for exported HTML files the technical details for how CSS is included or not and whether or not most ruler styles will be converted to style see the Import amp Export preference pane 25 3 7 Replacements Replacements are a way for you to set up your own substitutions which works in a manner very similar to Search and Replace though without changing the underlying documents in Scrivener A table with three columns has been provided z Replace The text which you wish to instruct the compiler to look for z With Whatever has been supplied in the Replace column will be replaced with what you type into this column z Case Sensitive When checked the letter case in the Replace column must pre cisely match otherwise it will be ignored by the compiler Some example usages would be to replace an abbreviated version with a full proper name to make typing it in freqently easier or inserting common editing notes Table 25 1 Example replacements Replace With Case Sensative AdT Arc de Triomphe X myprotagonist Amy Holmes lt needCite gt Needs Citation figCapt Figure 1 X z These sequences will be replaced wherever they occur You shouldn t choose replacements that might fall within other words in typical usage ea Use of case sensitive replacement can often help reduce accidental occurences 25 3 OPTION PANES 201 Footnotes _
302. ol and text substitution Accesses the system level substitution engine for OS X Snow Leopard and higher To modify the list click the System Text Preferences button B 9 Import and Export Scrivener supports a wide variety of file formats both for import into a project and exporting and compiling The options in this tab adjust how these functions operate B 9 1_ Import Options Import supported file types only By default Scrivener will only allow you to drag file types into the binder if it can internally display them When this is enabled Scrivener will store unsupported files with the rest of the project but will not You can only ever drag text files into the Draft B 9 IMPORT AND EXPORT 281 be able to display them You will still be able to load them using their default applications HTML Import You can set how HTML files will be handled if you drag them into Scrivener The WebArchive option will package the document into Apple s We bArchive format which is viewable in many Macintosh applications Do note that if you plan to work with colleagues using the Windows version or wish to share project resources universally you should use the Text option instead Text will preserve basic formatting but complex page formatting will be lost Optionally you can also choose to convert dropped WebArchives or imported web pages directly from the Internet to text as well OPML Import When OPML files are dropped into the bin
303. ollection Binder Binder b Research gt H Trash Figure 8 2 The basic Collection interface The are three main types excluding the Binder of Collections 1 Standard Collections allows you to freely add and remove items as you work This is the most flexible form of Collection 2 Search Results Collection a special collection type that cannot be removed Any project searches will have their query and results stored in this collection This is persistent between project sessions 3 Saved Search Collections indicated with the same magnifying glass used for Search Results on the left side of the label they will be dynamically populated with a search query 8 3 2 Standard Collections Creating a new standard Collection is as easy as pressing the button Any items that you have selected in the active view including the Binder other views or even other Collections will be automatically added to it Once a Collection has been created you can add or remove items to it so it is not critical to select everything before you create it To add existing items to a Collection simply click and drag them to the appropriate tab they will be added to the bottom 8 3 USING COLLECTIONS 53 Collections Remove Collection Q Search Results Add Collection New Collection Change Colour El Chapter Two Remove an Item E A scene in your book Figure 8 3 Standard Collection Controls o
304. om the control bar beneath the viewing area above the footer view you can play or pause the movie change the volume or step backwards and forwards through it On the lower right you ll see a rewind symbol with a pause button in the middle of it This is an optional mode which will show up as blue if engaged which will rewind your media by a set number of seconds whenever you pause This interval can be configured in the Navigation pane section B 5 of prefer ences Read Transcribing Media chapter 21 for more practical information on using these tools while writing 14 8 4 Viewing Web Pages The web view displays imported web pages Note that clicking on any links in a page displayed in the web view will open the link in the system s default internet browser Scrivener does not allow internal browsing simply because this would mean integrating many of the features of a browser into the web view such as back and forward buttons a refresh button maybe even a download manager and this is outside of Scrivener s scope When the web view is shown the content of the footer will display the original URL a as a link that can be clicked on to open the original page in the system s default browser You can increase and decrease the size of the web page font using the standard View Zoom sub menu Pro Tip If you archive search forms such as http www google com and searches that you perform will have their results opened up i
305. ommand is also available from the header bar icon menu Binder Affects Adjusts where binder clicks will be sent By default all clicks will be sent to the active editor so long as it is not locked This will adjust that behaviour so that the clicks go to a predetermined editor in all cases depending on the choice made below If the editor is not split this menu will be deactivated as all clicks will naturally go to the only available editor A 5 PROJECT MENU 249 Current Editor Default behaviour as described above Other Editor Whichever editing split is not current active Left Top Editor The left top editor no matter which editor is active Right Bottom Editor The right bottom editor split no matter which ed itor 1s active Show Hide Toolbar Toggles the visibility of the main application toolbar Customize Toolbar Lets you configure the toolbar of the main window so that it contains the commands that you most use in the order most intuitive to you This can also be done by right clicking on the toolbar itself A 5 Project Menu The Project menu addresses commands and configuration options which are specific to the active project such as document format over rides custom meta data statistics and more If more than one project is open this menu will target the foremost project window New Text 38 N Creates a new text document below the current selection When a folder is selected the new file will be
306. ompiled draft through the SmartyPants document cleaners These are lan guage specific so choose the language converter most appropriate to what you are writing in B 10 Backup Scrivener 2 has a fully automated backup system The options in this tab will control the various aspects of it Turn on automatic backups Enables the automated backup system It is best to leave this turned on unless for performance or security reasons you wish to control the process manually Back up on project open Whenever a project is opened a backup will be created before you can begin working Back up on project close Whenever a project is closed either directly or via appli cation shutdown a backup will be created Back up on each manual save Will create a backup copy whenever you manually save a project with s S Note this is not the same as Scrivener s auto save fea ture which by default is triggered after every two seconds of idling Backups will only be triggered if you select the menu command manually B 10 BACKUP 283 Back up every n minutes In addition to the event based backups above you can set Scrivener to create a new backup while you work In the case of very large project this can be the setting that most adversely impacts your writing experi ence as Scrivener will restrict you from editing during the backup Compress automatic backups as zip files If you are storing your backups on a net work drive or Internet syncronised s
307. on This is quite easy to do Simply select all of the items 8 A in the search result and click the button to create a new Standard Collection Saved Search Collections can be removed in the same fashion as Standard Collec tions by selecting the tab and clicking the key as shown here Figure 8 3 See Also Project Search subsection 14 5 3 8 4 Document Templates Document templates give you the ability to designate a set of items which can be used to create new items Much as with project templates section 7 5 everything that you add to a template item will be added to new items created off of it This includes the various meta data notes keywords references synopsis and of course any text Additionally folder items designated as templates will create copies of their children too allowing you to quickly generate complex repeating structures Document templates do not provide forms that you can fill out with the tab key They are simply a convenient way to reproduce ordinary folders and files with their meta data intact 56 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER EF Research Templates oy Minor Character Sheet gt 7 Major Character Dossier Y i Location amp Geography ol Principle Buildings t Notes Figure 8 5 Example Document Template Structure 8 4 1 Setting a Document Template Folder Templates are designated by placing them into a special folder marked as being a template container which can
308. on You can also normalise the width and height of columns and rows respectively with the Distribute functions Lists Supplies basic list styles and few advanced controls for bullet and enumerated list management Unless you need custom list styles you can generally make do with the list button supplied on The Format Bar subsection 14 4 2 List Build your own custom list type using the standard OS X tool for doing so z Next Previous List Style lt 38 RightArrow X8 LeftArrow Selects the next or previous built in list style available and converts the current list to that style Formatting Provides tools for creating and applying ruler and font presets to your text For more information on using the presets system see Formatting Presets Styles subsection 14 4 3 Scriptwriting Although Scrivener is not a dedicated script writing application such as Final Draft or Montage the Scriptwriting submenu does make it rela tively straightforward to create first drafts which can be later fine tuned in these applications For full documentation on this see Scriptwriting chapter 19 Show Hide Ruler 8 R Toggles the visibility of the tab stop and page margin ruler for the active editor Note that all formatting tools have been moved from this ruler to the format bar Show Hide Format Bar 738 R Toggles the visibility of the character and para graph formatting bar which provides quick access to many of the most com mon
309. on preferences are split up in different areas so that you can supply new projects with some starting preferences Once these projects have been created they will maintain their own individual settings from that point forward One step beyond that there are a sub set of preferences which apply at the document level and each document will diverge from the project and application preferences Not all preferences work in this cascading fashion The ones that do will be indicated as such in their notes Many of the preferences which are wholly project specific and make no appearance in the application preference system at all A good example of this is whether or not pins are displayed on index cards By default they are but you can turn them off for a project and it will remember that setting There is however no way to change that behaviour globally All of the project specific preferences are located in menus and most of these are in either the Project menu or the View menu This section will not cover these specif ically though some might be mentioned in passing where applicable Instead this section strictly focusses on the application preferences dialog For information on spe cific menu options see the appendix Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix A B 1 General B 1 1 Startup options Reopen recent projects on program launch Reopens recently opened projects whenever Scrivener is launched thus saving you the effort of op
310. on settings provide settings to alter how Scrivener reacts to the various actions you can take to navigate around in your project There are numerous ways of doing so from clicking directly on items to using buttons to scroll through doc uments like a flip book to using menus to jump directly to a specific place in your book and more In nearly all cases unless otherwise indicated navigation options are globally ap plied that is no matter how you select an item these options will apply If you are coming to Scrivener 2 0 from older versions you may note that a lot of the preferences pertaining to default group modes have been removed This is be cause they have been replaced with a smarter dynamic system that no longer requires maintaining preferences B 5 1 Folders and Files Treat all documents with children as folders When this is checked any document that has subdocuments will act like a folder that is the options selected above will affect any document that has children subdocuments If this isn t checked a normal text document or image file that has subdocuments any type of document can act as a container for other documents in Scrivener will be opened in editor mode when it is selected If this is selected it will be opened in whatever mode folders are set to open in above Include enclosing group in Scrivenings When clicking on a folder or document stack if Treat all documents with children as fol
311. on with a good word processor There are a few features in Scrivener that have no comparison in RTF such as multi colour annotations and comments and Scrivener links which will be normalised or lost respectively z If you use sequential annotations separated only by colour it would be a good idea to move them so that they have a word or two in between them or separate them by putting them on different lines Expect loss of some features when using RTF editors that do not fully support the RTF specifications such as TextEdit Pages and similar Footnotes com ments lists images and tables are the most common items which have limited support Using fully featured word processors with good RTF support such as Word or Nisus Writer Pro will help you avoid this and even be quite useful as comments can be used to aid in the collaboration process Plain text Limitations Since it is impossible to convey formatting in plain text without some sort of visible mark up Scrivener takes steps to protect as much of your formatting as it possibly can As with RTF only those files which have been edited will be transferred back to your project but further each changed file will be analysed at the paragraph level and only replace those paragraphs that have been changed leaving the rest of the file untouched with its original formatting To avoid having inline notation become confused with standard text Scrivener will export inline annotat
312. once a structure begins to emerge Scrivener lets you work the way you find most comfortable There is no need to build out a strict outline if you ve always worked text first but if you like to work in outlines or use the snowflake model of expansion you can accomplish these with ease An outline can literally emerge out of your book or the book can be built onto an outline It s all up to you and how you work best In Scrivener the concept of a Folder is fluid It s an important concept to grasp be cause organising your book will inevitably mean a hierarchy of documents and wher ever that hierarchy takes you it will take so in the form of folders or their cousins the document stack The concept of hierarchy is important because it means you can keep the parts of the book you aren t currently working on tucked away and that means you can feel free to break things down as far as you want no matter how many hundreds of items you make in the binder if you sort things into folders or file groups you can always keep the clutter at bay 50 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER 8 2 Binder Controls Revealing and Hiding Elements Click on the arrow to the left of any container to reveal or hide its contents in the binder Use the LeftArrow and RightArrow keys In conjunction with the Option key with either of the above methods expand or collapse an entire portion of the outline tree at once Reveal and Hide All View Outline E
313. onding columns in the active Outliner view These settings are stored by individual editor split letting you have custom columns for the two views and are saved in the project file You can also manage columns using the gt gt button above the scrollbar in the outliner itself Use Label Colour In A document s label colour see Setting Up Meta Data chap ter 10 for more information on labels can be applied as a tint to various inter face elements throughout Scrivener This menu contains a list of toggles which will enable tinting to the corresponding elements Binder Rows in the binder will have a background bar placed behind items with labels in a fashion similar to how Finder applies labels to files Icons Only the icons will be tinted throughout the project Wherever the icon for a binder item shows up such as in the Header bar next to the title in Corkboard in the binder and so forth it will be tinted using the colour of the assigned label ea Index Cards The entire background paper for index cards will be tinted using the assigned label colour This includes the index card which appears at the top of the inspector Outliner Rows As with binder tinting the background for the entire row will be filled in with the label colour A 4 VIEW MENU 247 Move Focus To Provides application focus navigation tools Rather than navigat ing around in your project these commands will let you quickly select
314. ons Shortcut Recorder is Contributors of ShortcutRecorder thanks to Jesse Gros jean for pointing me in the direction of this project Nathan Day the PDF Services alias file is created using Nathan Day s NDAlias class Mark Onyschuk help with the window flip ping code for the templates panel which is based on his LIFlipEffect Kino the Snapshot comparison tool was in spired in large part by Kino s Compare Doc uments macro for Nisus Writer Pro Robert Warwick the improvements to text table support are based on code Robert wrote for Stone Hill Invoicer Beta Testers vu Improved PDF anti aliasing was provided by a line of code from Skim The redoubtable Douglas Davidson Apple engineer and guru for responding so help fully to so many of my enquiries about the intricacies of the Cocoa text system Aki Inoue at Apple for advice about the word count code Fletcher Penney for contributing so much time and effort in helping me get MultiMark down implemented in Scrivener Everyone on the Cocoa Dev list for their help and support with special mention to Bill Cheeseman Malcom Crawford Max and Marcus at Blue Technologies authors of Ulysses J Nozzi at Bartas Technologies author of CopyWrite Stephen Kochan author of Programming in Objective C for answering my questions when I was getting started Too many to mention everyone but a big thanks to all of you especially those wh
315. ont Sets the display font in the outliner You can also select font variants to be used to alter the appearance of items in the binder The font variants you wish to apply must be available to the font you have selected Folders and document containers can be treated separately if you wish B 2 4 Customisable Colours The number of interface elements you can customise has been dramatically increased in Scrivener 2 Consequently interface colours are now chosen using a selection tree as it would take many pages of preferences to display them all together To alter the default colour for the desired interface element first select the major category in the left most column and then the item itself from the centre column Click on the colour well at the right to assign a new colour or click Use Default Color to reset the option to the system default B 3 Corkboard Provides options and settings which will impact the way the corkboard functions and appears B 3 CORKBOARD Category Interface Element Description Views Binder Background Background colour for the Binder Search Results Background Background colour for the search results collection and its tab Outliner Background Background colour for the Out liner Media Background Colour displayed around im ages PDFs movie clips etc Comments Pane Background colour for margin and footnote comments in the inspector Editor Text Background Main editing background or paper col
316. ontents of the Draft folder and for any documents selected in the binder use Project Project Statistics To calculate the Draft statistics Scrivener internally generates the actual draft based upon your Compile Draft settings so you need to remember that if you have only got Compile Draft set up to print off syn opses only the synopses will be counted This can also mean that there will be a delay in displaying this panel with larger projects To get word character paragraph and line counts for the current document and a breakdown of word frequency the number of times you use different words select the Project Text Statistics menu command this will only be avail able if a text document has the keyboard focus To set a target word or character count and track your progress for the entire draft or the current session select Project Show Hide Project Targets To set a target word or character count and track your progress for a single document click on the target button in the bottom right of the footer view this is not available in scriptwriting mode though where word and character counts are rarely useful anyway See information on the footer view for more information To get the word or character count for a selection of text select some text in a document and examine the footer bar of the editor The word and character count will appear in blue text When there is no selection this area will be used to count the
317. onvert to HTML styled text Since MultiMarkdown has no good analogue syntax for comments by default Scrivener will insert a styled HTML container around the comment Both inline annotations and linked comments will be treated identically in this fashion Since MMD will pass HTML straight through its engine the result will be a range of text coloured with whatever colour the annotation text or comment background was set to The appearance sans the bubble around the text will thus be identical When this option is disabled annotations and linked comments will be ex ported in the same fashion they are for plain text files enclosed in brackets TIPBOX Pro Tip In cases where an annotation falls entirely on its own para graph Scrivener will use a styled lt div gt instead of a styled lt span gt to wrap the com ment in This means you can use complex MultiMarkdown within annotations that are on their own Annotations embedded within a paragraph of otherwise normal text in any way will use spans in order to preserve the original document flow and thus cannot contain complex syntax They can however utilise inline formatting such as bold italic footnotes and so forth 25 3 9 Page Settings Various print settings can be set up with the Page Settings pane such as margins paper size and headers and footers Only formats that support page settings can use 206 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Page Setup __ Use project Page Setup settin
318. oom Zooms the window in or out the same as the green button in the top left of the window Scrivener will try to zoom intelligently to best fit the contents of the window taking into account your preferred editor width Hold down the Option key to change to Zoom All Zoom to Fit Screen 3 Zooms the window in and out so that it takes up the whole of the screen Float Window Floats the project window above other application windows so that you can have it visible at all times should you wish even when switching to other programs Be sure not to use this in conjunction with Zoom to Fit Screen Project Notes lt 3 P Displays the project notebook in a separate window For more information on using project notes see Project Notes section 12 3 Show Hide Scratch Pad s8 gt Displays or closes the floating Scratch Pad Panel section 11 3 useful for collecting information while using other applications Show Keywords HUD 4 38 H Displays or closes the Keywords HUD sec tion 10 2 Bring All to Front Brings all Scrivener windows to the front Hold down the Op tion key to change to Arrange in Front Window List The rest of this menu will be populated by all of the windows ex cluding panels like the Keywords HUD that are currently open in Scrivener Selecting from this list will bring that window to the front A 9 Helo Menu Appendix B Preferences Because Scrivener is a multi project applicati
319. or has their own methods their own rituals and their own favourite tactics Scrivener was designed to recognise that everyone is different and as a result the program features an extraordinarily amount of flexibility and interface power You will find workflows and tools for all manner of writing projects from a doctoral thesis to a novel to a collaborative scientific article to biographies and much more Because of this you will find that there are many features you just won t need That is fine because Scrivener has also been designed to keep these features out of your way unless you need them This section contains a few chapters which could be considered optional In par ticular screenwriting collaboration and bibliographies can be safely skipped unless your works require these functions Everyone should read the chapter on Writing and Editing as this will introduce the full power of the editor and if you haven t already done so at least skim the prior section on preparation Vital concepts have been introduced there and many of the following chapters will build off of those concepts The topics that will be covered in this part are Writing and Editing chapter 14 Full documentation of the various editor views full screen formatting layout and tools to enhance the editing and revi sion processes Full Screen chapter 15 Scrivener s full screen feature Wipe aside all distrac tions and just write
320. or the prefix and suffix can be handled independently It is possible to have three different styles affixed to each of the three components prefix title suffix If you wish to maintain a uniform look use the mouse to select all of the visible title elements before styling The Page padding control to the right of the Title Prefix amp Suffix button controls how much padding will be added to the top of the page if it happens to fall on a page break Use this to offset your titles from the top of the printable margins if you prefer that look This option will not be previewed in the formatting editor Special Formatting Options Returning to the structure table the Options button will open a sheet which lets you set just how much of your custom formatting will actually be applied to the compiled manuscript as well as a few other options Selective Opt Out You can always set specific parts of the Draft to ignore all for matting no matter what settings you choose in the compiler by using the Compile As ls Inspector option Note that this will even ignore selected elements from the 25 3 OPTION PANES 193 structure table Only the text of such items will be output even if it otherwise would not output text and it will be output precisely as shown in the main editor While there is no formatting to override in the MultiMarkdown workflow this option will still inhibit the generation of automatic titling even if the document woul
321. ord but also any parent keywords under which it is grouped You don t have to use the HUD to create keywords of course you can also en ter keywords directly into the keywords table in the inspector subsection 17 4 3 to apply them to the current document Note that whenever you apply keywords via the inspector they will automatically be added to the list in the HUD if they are not already contained there so that the HUD should always contain a complete list of the keywords you are using in your project no matter how you have created them Keywords can be managed from the HUD By changing the name of a keyword in the HUD all of the associated keywords in the project will be updated instantly in the background When removing keywords from the HUD they will also be 74 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA Yellow Marker wn Orange Marker j Fink Marker Green Marker O Blue Marker ia Dark Green Figure 10 1 Scrivener swatch set removed from all of the documents they had been assigned to To change the colour that represents the keyword double click on the small colour rectangle to the left of the keyword 10 3 Naming Text Highlights The default text highlight marker names can be changed to something less generic on a universal level When you first ran Scrivener it installed a custom colour swatch file Swatch groups are OS X s way of letting you create selections of colours and giving them useful names To change the
322. ormat modes by using the Extras Installer that comes with Scrivener This will install a format for comic script writing and the standard formats for both UK and 19 2 CREATING YOUR OWN SCRIPT FORMATS 165 US stage play scripts It will also install an extra screenplay format entitled Screen play Final Draft which has elements that have been tweaked to match the ones in Final Draft You can also create your own script formats tailored to your own requirements To create your own script format mode select Scriptwriting gt Script Settings from the Text menu and use the panel that appears to name your format and define its various elements At the top of the panel is the Format Title text field Enter the name of your format here e g Television BBC Comedy On the left of the panel is the Elements list This is a list of the parts that make up your script such as Scene Heading Dialogue and so on You can add new ele ments and delete existing ones using the and buttons beneath the list and you can rename elements by double clicking into them You can also reorder elements by dragging and dropping them Note that General Text and General Text Cen tered will be added to the end of any element list you create but will not appear here At the bottom left of the panel is a pop up button entitled Manage This allows you to reset your script elements to the default screenplay set
323. ortably read on a wide variety of devices 25 4 6 Web Formats 25 4 7 MultiMarkdown Formats Chapter 26 Exporting 221 Chapter 27 Printing Material not finished 27 1 Document Printing Material not finished 2 2 Printing Index Cards Material not finished 27 3 Printing Outlines Material not finished 27 4 Compile and Print Material not finished 27 5 Page Setup Material not finished 222 Part V Advanced 223 Chapter 28 Using MultiMarkdown For those who prefer structural writing solutions to rich text and if this means noth ing to you you can happily skip this section Scrivener allows you to import and export using Fletcher T Penney s MultiMarkdown syntax MultiMarkdown makes it easy to generate documents in any number of formats for instance LaTeX and XHTML using a basic markup syntax for instance using asterisks to define bold and italics It is important to note that if you have happily used normal word processors such as Microsoft Word or Mellel and rich text for years and have never heard of Multi Markdown structural writing or been bothered by such formats as LaTeX you can ignore this aspect of Scrivener Scrivener was designed primarily as a rich text applica tion MultiMarkdown is implemented in such a way that those who want it can access it easily but those who have no need of it need never be bothered by it 28 1 What is Markdown The MultiMarkdown
324. other areas of the project without having to alter your settings Your favourites section 9 6 will be placed in the top of this menu making it easy to jump to them from anywhere in the project When viewing a Scrivenings session the contents of this menu will be replaced with the contents of the current session only thus providing a miniature table of contents for the current session Pro Tip If you want to use the Go To menu to access other portions of the Binder while viewing a Scrivenings session quickly isolate the current document by itself with Cmd 4 Once you are in single document viewing mode the standard Go To menu will be revealed Bookmarks Displays any text bookmarks section 14 12 that have been added to the current document in a handy menu Header style bookmarks will be offset and set to bold making it easy to cut a larger document into sections of bookmarks If you are viewing a Scrivenings session all of the bookmarks in the entire session will be displayed together Bookmarks can be added to your document using 3 B or from the Edit gt Insert sub menu Take Snapshot This command will take a snapshot section 14 10 of the current text and store it for later use Match Split Document s Will open the currently viewed item in the inactive split This command will not be available if no splits are open Lock In Place 38 L Locks the editor or split so that no Binder clicks will affect it When an
325. otnotes endnotes around them Endnotes This works the same as with footnotes only they will be in serted into the endnote stream 25 3 OPTION PANES 205 Footnotes and Comments with MultiMarkdown The MultiMarkdown compile formats handle footnotes uniquely from the other for matters Scrivener will by default automatically generate and ID the necessary foot note syntax for you An MMD marker will be inserted wherever the footnote has been placed in the document and the appropriately matching footnote text syntax will be inserted elsewhere in the compiled MMD file Whenever Scrivener is set up to work in this fashion linked inspector footnotes will use a different ID prefix than inline footnotes In ordinary MMD usage this will make no visual difference to you MMD does not care what the footnote ID is so long as it is unique to the document However using a distinct prefix for linked footnotes gives you the option to write an advanced XSLT file to handle them differently such as mixing endnotes with footnotes if you wish to Inline footnotes will be prefixed with fn followed by a serial number Linked footnotes will be prefixed with cf again followed by a serial number The following extra options are available to MultiMarkdown users Convert footnotes to MultiMarkdown syntax This is the default behaviour as de scribed above When disabled Scrivener s footnote generation will mimic that of plain text C
326. ould now see the titles of the sections shown right in the text and you can edit these titles right 6 3 OUTLINING YOUR DRAFT 31 here as well Try adding some text to the second empty section then select that section in the binder all by itself Note that your edits have been made directly to the document Now we will do something that is impossible in many programs Right click on Chapter One and select Convert to Folder The icon will change to a blue folder with a small page in the corner That page means the folder has text stored in it Note that the text you added to this document earlier is still there that s what the small page icon means in the corner of the folder icon Let s move that text into a child document You can select just the text of a document by clicking anywhere in the text holding down the Option key and invoking Edit Select Current Text Now cut the selection with 3g X and note the folder icon loses its page icon badge it no longer has any text in it Press 3 N which is another way to create new documents and is especially useful with Combined Text mode as it will insert new sections while you are writing If you turned on titles for Combined Scrivenings you should be able to immediately enter a name in the editor call it Scene A and press Return to start editing the document Then press 8 V to paste the text you cut As you can see expanding a portion of the outline as you write with Co
327. our Combined Titles BG Background colour behind ti tles when enabled in combined scrivenings mode Fixed Width Background Colour displayed around the pseudo page in fixed width mode Notes Background Notes editing background or paper colour Project Notes Background As above but for project notes Search Highlights Highlight used to accentuate search results in the editor Invisible Characters Text colour used to draw special symbols depicting invisible char acters Index Cards Index Card Background The paper colour for index Index Card Status Stamps cards Will be blended with the label colour when View Use Label Color Index Cards is enabled so it is often best to choose a subtle shade Text colour used to draw status stamps on index cards in cork board view 267 268 Full Screen QuickReference Snapshots Revision Colours Target Progress Bars Paper Combined Titles BG Background Text Selection Paper Notes Background Text Selection Comments Background Background Deleted Text New Text All elements Start Colour End Colour Midway Colour APPENDIX B PREFERENCES The paper colour for the edit ing area in full screen Background colour behind titles in full screen when enabled in scrivenings mode Colour displayed around the pseudo page in full screen Choose an alternate text high light colour for selection Of ten the system defaults are too b
328. our documents in it Normally if one document is selected the text of this document will be displayed in the main editor as below This is similar to how many notebook sidebar applications work In Scrivener you can select several documents and then edit them all together or a folder like the Draft itself Scrivenings mode is only available when the entire selection or contents of the selected container are text or folders 14 13 1 Viewing Multiple Texts as One Document Scrivenings mode is like corkboard and outliner view modes another way to view multiple selections of documents How you view more than one document changes depending on your approach Viewing more than one document can be as simple as clicking on a folder By default this will view the items within that folder as index cards on a corkboard However using the Group Mode segmented control you can easily switch your view over to Scrivenings the left most icon showing a stack of papers Another way of switching is to use the View Scrivenings menu command or pressing 8 1 on your keyboard As with corkboard or outliner you can also form scrivenings sessions by selecting multiple items in the binder or clicking on the header bar of a collection or search result Usage Tip Unlike corkboard and outliner scrivenings can be taken into full screen mode Simply press the Full Screen button in the toolbar lt s F after setting up the session You can tell when you are
329. our external changes 13 2 3 Tips for Working with Synced Folders Here are a few guidelines which if followed will prevent problems in everyday use z Alternate between external files and the project This is a rule of thumb not a strict rule Scrivener reads the modification date of each file and uses the latest one to determine which should be the binder copy It does not examine the contents of files It is thus best to alternate between using the external files and the project folder rather than working in both separately for a while and trying to merge them later Never try to sync one project s folder with another Even if those two projects originally came from the same identical project over time there will be differences in each project that you cannot see and these differences will lead to confusing results at the best and a loss of data at the worst A sync folder is meant to allow you to work without Scrivener for a while and then come back later and update your project with those changes If you try to break this rule you will be warned by a dialogue box 102 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING When working from multiple computers sharing the same sync folder always make sure your project file is the most current It is perfectly safe to use the same project to sync to a shared folder from multiple computers provided you are always using the most recent version of the project and are not trying to bend
330. ow 4 Keywords document keywords this table also serves as a drop point for key word drags from the HUD 5 References the list of document references as with notes project references cannot be viewed 6 Comments amp Footnotes this is the only view that will pop up on its own if you add a comment or footnote while writing in the editor This pane works identically to its inspector counter part 18 2 Using QuickReference Panels in Full Screen Since QuickReference Panels float over the Scrivener interface they will remain visible even when entering full screen mode making them useful for bringing reference material into this dedicated writing environment Additionally you can open new QuickReference windows while in full screen by accessing the View QuickReference sub menu Chapter 19 Scriptwriting Please note this chapter is not up to date yet Although Scrivener is in no way intended to be a dedicated scriptwriting program for such a program you might want to try Final Draft or Celtx if you have not done so already it does allow for basic script formatting 19 1 Formatting a Script in Scrivener To format a script in Scrivener select the format you want to use from the Scriptwrit ing menu inside the Text menu When in scriptwriting mode the top item in the Text gt Scriptwriting submenu will be checked and will display the name of the format you are using In the above example the standard Sc
331. ow you can show only the tools you need rather than having to keep one large all in one tool at the top of your editing window The new format bar is slim and stays out of your way at the top of the editing session Chapter 4 Installation and Uperading If you purchased the boxed version of Scrivener insert the CD ROM into your com puter and wait for it to appear in the Finder Create a new Finder window with 3 N and choose the Go Applications menu item Drag the Scrivener application from the CD to your Applications folder For online downloadable purchases download the trial version from the Litera ture amp Latte website The trial version can be unlocked with the registration serial number that was sent to you when you purchased the application When the DMG finishes downloading double click on it in the Finder if it hasn t opened for you automatically and follow the above instructions to drag the Scrivener icon to your Applications folder Scrivener will not be correctly installed on your system if you drag the icon from either the CD or the DMG straight into the Dock It must be dragged into the Applications folder or if you have do not have administrative rights to the computer into your user folder After copying the Scrivener application to your hard drive you can then drag a copy to the Dock from the Applications folder if you wish To install the optional bonus material including starter templates export p
332. ow will always move you to the document immediately below in the current sidebar list If you are viewing a container as a Scrivenings session the behaviour of this feature will modify slightly The nature of selection will still be the same in terms of linear above below selection but the current session will not be dismissed It thus can be used as a form of navigation within a Scrivenings session Note that if you navigate above or below the boundary of the selection it will be dismissed This feature is an augmentation of the basic behaviour It is not available to multiple selection based sessions If you wish to navigate within a multiple selection based Scrivenings session use the Go To menu instead These two buttons can also be activated with the keyboard shortcuts x38 UpArrow and DownArrow respectively 132 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING 14 6 5 Split View Button Finally the last button on the right hand side is a multi purpose button which changes depending upon the current layout of the application and your last preferred split orientation When no splits are open a small line will be drawn through the icon in the hor izontal or vertical orientation to let you know which way the editor will be split if you click upon the icon If you hold down the Option key this will switch to the opposing orientation and that preference will be saved for future splitting as well When a split is already open the icon will appear
333. own you can drag the image from the text into the header view of one of the editors You can then double click on the image and zoom in or out on the image Note that any changes made here will not impact the embedded image in the text To resize the inline image double click on it This will bring up the image scaling panel Drag the sliders left to shrink the image or right to increase its size and then click on OK Unchecking Lock aspect ratio allows you to move the sliders inde pendently and therefore distort the image Clicking Cancel restores the image to its former size Note that some images types cannot be resized double clicking on such images will do nothing To save the image to the disk right click on the image and select Save as Picture Printing with Images There is a bug in the OS X text system whereby if your text contains an image that is much wider than the page when printing the page containing the image and all subsequent pages may not get printed at all If you find that Scrivener is not printing all of the pages it should check that you haven t got an image scaled too large in the text if you have fix it by double clicking on it and resizing it This bug can be reproduced in TextEdit by placing a very large image in the text and switching to Wrap to Page mode the image and anything after it will disappear 14 5 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 123 When using MultiMarkdown inline images and linked ima
334. p pearance to run from one document to the next with no visible seam a Empty line Two paragraph breaks will be inserted causing a visible space be tween the items 25 3 OPTION PANES 197 z Page break A page break character will be inserted causing the next section to move to the next page of the manuscript Custom Anything entered into the adjacent text field will be placed between the two items Note that the text or symbols entered here will be buffered by a single return on each side forcing it to fall on its own line The value will be centre aligned The following formats have different options and behaviours from those listed above HTML WebArchive and ePub formats The single return and empty line op tions will be replaced by suitable alternatives to produce the same appearance of actual paragraph breaks Since page breaks have no meaning in Web publishing a horizontal rule will be inserted The option will be renamed to Section break MultiMarkdown and MMD HTML formats In most cases the empty line op tion should be used to retain clean paragraph breaks between blocks The sin gle line type will cause the last paragraph of one section to flow directly into the next paragraph of the next section Page breaks are replaced by section breaks which emit a series of hyphens on their own line This will be converted to a horizontal rule using the HTML converter MultiM
335. panded to include document stacks as well Expand All 98 9 Expands all of the visible items recursively When this command is used in the binder it will expand the entire binder including all non Draft sections When used in outliner it only works within the context of the currently viewed portion of the binder Collapse All 98 0 As with Expand All this works the other way closing all visible open items recursively Note that in both cases you can use the Option key in conjunction with a mouse click to selectively perform this function on the arrow and everything beneath it clicked Previous Container X UpArrow Will select the previous visible con tainer in active outliner no matter what the depth In this case previous means a container higher on the list than the current position If a con tainer is currently hidden it will be skipped If you only wish to select the parent container of a the current item you can use the LeftArrow key a Next Container DownArrow Works the same as Previous Container only selecting the next visible container downward from the current posi tion Reveal in Binder lt 38 R This command is available from either editor split and will show the location of the currently edited file in the binder disclosing con tainers as necessary to do so This is most useful when the method you used to arrive at the current document did not involve clicking in the binder This menu c
336. piler will insert a special RTF code which lets compatible word processors cross reference the actual page number of that item This technique is also used in the Table of Contents generator but could also be used for formatting nicer cross references for your readers This feature will also be available when using the Print PDF format option in Compile See also 1 Compiling the Draft chapter 25 2 Creating a Table of Contents chapter 24 Richard Stengel managing editor of Time magazine on why he chose to run on the magazine s cover a photo of a young 9 6 Using Favourites Setting binder items as favourites will increase their visibility in a few key areas of the application One of these has already been covered the Go To menus Setting an item as a favourite will make it easy to navigate to that item in the future as it will always be present at the top level of that menu with the exception of when the menu is acting as a table of contents for a Scrivenings session 9 7 LAYOUTS PANEL 67 The second menu which will have favourites added to it is the Scrivener Link cre ation menu When creating a new Scrivener Link your favourites will be placed at the top of this menu Adding and removing items from the list of favourites is easy to do Simply select the item in the binder and right click on it to view its contextual menu At the bottom of the menu there will be two options Add to Favorites Adds the selected doc
337. plete Document Title K If you start typing in a document title from the same Scrivener project you can use K to cause Scrivener to search your project for matching titles based on what you have typed thus far and suggest alterna tives This is very useful in conjunction with the auto correction option sec tion B 8 to automatically detect Scrivener links typed in with Document Ti tle bracketing Add Selection to Auto Complete List Adds the currently word to the project s auto complete list If more than one word is selected nothing will be added to the auto complete list Insert The Insert sub menu provides a wide variety of elements that you can insert into text fields These will be placed at the current cursor position Note that some of these insert invisible characters which control the flow of your document you may not see anything happen unless you have For mat gt Options gt Show Invisibles enabled Image From File Allows you to select an image file from disk to insert into the current text document note that inserted images can be resized by double clicking on them Image Linked to File As with the above but the inserted image file will be linked to the original file on your hard disk rather than copying it into the text document This allows you to keep image files separate and easily apply updates to images later on if necessary 236 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Read Inline Images
338. potlight searching the content for the field should match its intended purpose in order to keep searches logical The Keywords field takes values separated by commas which will be shown as pills in the interface as you enter them The Background field will let you set a paper colour for the manuscript This is by and large ignored by most word processors and is primarily useful for the HTML and WebArchive formats MMD The Meta Data pane for MultiMarkdown compilations provides a front end to the preliminary meta data block at the top of any MMD file A few examples are inserted into new projects by default Note that what you type into the text area below the field will be printed into the compiled document verbatim Thus all rules pertaining to the meta data syntax should be followed Empty lines in this area will cause the 212 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Meta Data Note that if the first document being compiled is entitled Meta Data it can be used to provide or override the settings otherwise defined here Key Base Header Level Title Author My Novel Figure 25 11 Compile Meta Data MMD meta data block to prematurely abort and special characters should be converted to HTML entities Scrivener will automatically insert the Format complete meta data field for you so there is no need to specify that by hand This interface being project based is useful for creating a general meta data block If you
339. project keyword in parentheses after the title Scrivener will add it for you 13 1 7 Limitations Formatting Note that Simplenote like most mobile note taking solutions can only store plain text so all formatting bold italics line spacing and so forth will be stripped in the versions of documents stored in Simplenote Thus when updating documents in a project with corresponding versions that have been edited in Simplenote the following formatting limitations apply Scrivener maintains the formatting of paragraphs within a note that have not been changed Any paragraphs that have been edited in Simplenote will lose their format ting in Scrivener Images will be stripped from documents that have been edited in Sim plenote To avoid having inline notation become confused with standard text Scrivener will export inline annotations by wrapping them in square and brackets Inline footnotes will be similarly wrapped in curly braces and However since Scrivener only updates changed paragraphs unless you edit a paragraph with one of these types no loss of notation should occur in the rest of the document In the case that you do edit a paragraph with notes in it the bracket notation will be retained so that you can man ually fix the formatting A helpful tip to remember is that you can copy and paste from snapshots 96 CHAPTER 13 CLOUD INTEGRATION AND SHARING Inspector comments and footnotes will
340. ptions while in Full Screen using the HUD These options will not impact any open projects but will set the defaults for all future projects that you create Default Text Zoom Dynamically scale the size of the text font for full screen mode This will not impact the underlying font settings letting you use a larger or smaller font only while in full screen Paper position There are three possible choices Left Center and Right Gen erally this is useful in conjunction with a high amount of Background fade so that you can place reference material alongside the full screen page B 5 NAVIGATION 2 3 For the next two options you can use the Use Current button to grab the settings from the active project Often it is easier to visually arrange things how you like them using the HUD These buttons let you do that and then transfer the settings to your defaults Paper width Adjusts how much width the virtual page should take up not including the margin space Move the slider all the way to the right to take up the entire screen or all the way to the left to use only a narrow column Background fade Lets you adjust the blend between the background and the chosen background color All the way to the right means no blending at all it will be completely opaque All the way to the left means no blend will be used and you ll see the windows behind Scrivener as if there were no background at all B 5 Navigation The navigati
341. r Outliner You can also remove items from a Collection by deleting them from these views 54 CHAPTER 8 SETTING UP THE BINDER Collections q Search Results q Search Results Search Results Label Status Scene a M cy First Draft Figure 8 4 The Search Result Collection 8 3 3 Search Result Collection If you ve used Project Search before then you ve been using a Collection without perhaps realising it Search results are placed into this special collection every time you run a search and the criteria of your search are saved into it along with the project This means the last Project Search that you ran will always be available to you even after you have rebooted your computer Like the Binder tab the Search Result tab cannot be deleted and there is always one included with every new project Both the built in Search Results collection and Saved Search Result Collections allow you to view the label and status of the matching items making it convenient to enact workflow changes without using the outliner When you click on the Search Results tab the previous search criteria will be loaded into the search bar tool allowing you to further tweak the results if you de sire Since search results depend upon the search criteria you cannot manually add remove or change the order of items from the Collection as you can with the stan dard type 8 3 4 Saved Search Result Collections As with the Search Re
342. r citations manager such as Bookends EndNote or Sente for academic work To set it up visit the General preferences pane section B 1 Click on Choose to choose your citations manager usually from the Applications folder If you set a citations manager here you can hit Y or Format Bibliography Citations to launch your bibliogra phy application and bring it to the front automatically You can then use your bib liography citations application to paste a citation placeholder into Scrivener After compiling to RTF you will need to use your manager to convert these placeholders into final print form 174 Chapter 21 Transcribing Media Material not finished 175 Chapter 22 Page View Material not finished 176 Chapter 23 The Name Generator Material not finished 177 Part IV Final Phases 178 Chapter 24 Creating a Table of Contents While there is no support for inserting a dynamic table of contents into your draft there is a way to produce a static list of items cross referenced to page numbers during Compile and utilising Scrivener Links internally to make the list useful for the author as well Note that this feature while it can be created in any Scrivener project is mainly useful in conjunction with the PDF Printing workflow and the RTF format when compiled For the ePub format use the built in Table of Contents generator which is dynamic With Mult
343. r in Final Draft 168 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING 19 2 4 Auto Complete The Auto Complete tab allows you to set a custom list of words that will appear for auto completion for the current element Use the and buttons below the list to add or remove new words to the auto complete list and double click on words to edit them When typing your script hit opt Escape or cmd period to bring up the auto complete list or select Automat ically show completions in the Text Editing pane of the Preferences Note that the auto complete list only appears after you start typing a word Checking Append project auto complete list will add any words set in the project auto complete list Edit gt Auto Complete List to the current script auto complete list This way script element completion lists can include character names set at the project level Important note Creating a script format is a static process That is to say that if you create a script format and then use it to write a script if you then go back and edit the script format in the Script Settings panel the elements of the script you created using the older script format will no longer be recognised as anything other than General Text until you click into each element in your text and select the correct element from the script elements pop up menu to update the text Thus to save yourself lots of painful reformatting later it is strongly recommended that you ensur
344. r options Images Inclusion of inline images is required for compatibility a Headers Footers Page headers and footers custom first page settings are not considered for compatibility Format 25 4 AVAILABLE COMPILE FORMATS Extension Description Printing PDF Rich Text Rich Text with Attachments Plain Text Microsoft Word Microsoft Word XML Open Office Final Draft 8 Final Draft 5 7 Converter N A rtf rtfd xt doc docx odt fdx fcf General Purpose Formats Use to print the compiled draft or to save it as a PDF using the Print dialogue s PDF features General purpose rich text format supporting multiple fonts images tables bullet points foot notes and comments Almost always the best op tion when exporting for use in a general purpose word processor including Microsoft Word Apple s proprietary extended RTF format Use ful mainly for exporting to other Apple Cocoa applications such as TextEdit especially if image support is needed Incompatible with most word processors and all other computing platforms UTF 8 Unicode plain text file Plain text con tains no formatting but can be opened almost anywhere on all platforms Simple Word format exporter It is usually better to export using RTF format see the note below on exporting to Word doc format Simple Word DOCX exporter This uses Ap ple s default exporter which loses much of the formatting in
345. r project is actually comprised of multiple documents or if you simply prefer to type in the meta data block by hand you can use documents titled Meta Data in the binder Whenever a document so titled is the first document in the included compile group it will be appended to the meta data provided in this pane Due to the rules of how meta data is parsed duplication is okay Whatever field is stated last will override any prior declarations Thus a Title value in the compile pane will be overridden by any Title fields declared in Meta Data documents in the binder When using this method the Format complete code will not be automatically inserted Be sure to add it yourself if you require it For further information on the available MultiMarkdown meta data fields refer to the online documentation http fletcherpenney net multimarkdown users_guide multimarkdown_syntax_guide P p y 8 y 8 25 3 OPTION PANES 213 Title Pale Fire Authors Vladimir Nabokov Contributors Subject Fiction Description Publisher Rights Date 2010 04 23 Language Code en g Use custom unique identifier palefire vladimirnabokov 20100423 Figure 25 12 Compile Meta Data ePub ePub Use of the ePub meta data pane is similar to the general meta data pane in that most of the fields are free form They will be inserted into the appropriate book descrip tion fields which will be available to e readers
346. r version of the document in Simplenote which will be downloaded in order to update the version in the project Green asterisk The document needs updating in Simplenote This green asterisk appears if you choose by deselecting not to sync a document that exists on the Simplenote servers but which has been edited in Scrivener since the last sync If you select to sync the document the asterisk will turn into a green up arrow to indicate that it will be up loaded Red asterisk The document needs updating in Scrivener This red as terisk appears if you choose by deselecting not to sync a document that has a newer version available on the Sim plenote servers If you select to sync the document the asterisk will turn into a red down arrow to indicate that it will be downloaded No icon The document is not selected for syncing and does not exist on the Simplenote servers recommended that you keep this ticked as it provides a good degree of protec tion against losing work in cases where you have inadvertently made changes to the documents both in Scrivener and in Simplenote between syncs Delete from Simplenote any project documents not selected for syncing When ticked Scrivener will delete from Simplenote any files that were previously uploaded from this project that are no longer ticked for syncing This is recommended in order to avoid clutter and slowing down Simplenote Once you are happy with the documents selected for
347. ral information in the outliner is up to you As with the Corkboard there are many features and usages for the Outliner To read more about it see the Outliner section 12 2 5 3 FULL SCREEN INTERFACE 25 5 2 3 Scrivenings This is a unique view mode in that it works not with the viewed items themselves but specifically with their text All of the text content even empty documents will be stacked together as if on a long spool of paper letting you read through large sections of your book at once no matter where they are located As you make adjustments to the text in this view each of the corresponding documents will be updated as you work The overall effect is as if you were working in a single long document but in fact you are editing potentially dozens or even hundreds of files as you go Combined text sessions also referred to frequently as Scrivenings and known to users of version 1 x as Edit Scrivenings are temporary editing sessions You don t need to worry about saving them or what will happen if you click on something and they go away It is merely a way of pulling together a number of files so you can edit their text at once and then releasing them when you move on For more information on how to best take advantage of this editing mode see Editing Multiple Documents section 14 13 5 3 Full Screen Interface Full Screen is a special interface which will blot out not only the rest of Scrivener but the rest of
348. rd and greater the system language settings will be used to determine the proper substitutions Convert em dashes to double hyphens The character will be converted to If this option does not appear to be working ensure that you have used em dashes lt and not en dashes in your manuscript The MultiMarkdown formats will convert em dashes to triple hyphens instead as the double hyphen is used to input an en dash Convert ellipses to triple periods The character will be converted to three full stops Convert indents and paragraph spacing to plain text Actual spaces and carriage returns will be inserted into the document to emulate indents and paragraph spacing line spacing will be ignored This function determines spacing by rounding off the supplied value If the base font is 12pt and paragraph spac ing is set to 28pt factor of 2 3 will be converted to two empty lines between paragraphs This option is not relevant to the FDX and FCF formats and will be removed from the pane when they are selected Rich Text Conversions This provides options for automatically converting a few rich text conventions from one standard to another Convert italics to underlines If the submission process requires underscoring to be used instead of italics this feature will let you write in italics but produce a properly underscored manuscript This option is not available to any formats which produce a plain text doc
349. rd drop down Items found in that collection will be included or excluded depending on the setting in the first drop down Applied Example Meta data Filtering In the provided example Figure 25 2 the Contents pane has been simplified to only show relevant interface elements Additionally the option to show label colour here renamed to PoV has been enabled in View Use Label Color In Icons Example 1 has the Filter checkbox disabled The list is thus a pure depiction of whatever container has been selected for compilation in this case the top level Draft We have labelled scenes a d and e with the Joseph character colour and scenes b c and f with another character The other items have no colour label Example 2 shows the Filter option enabled set to include all documents with PoV label of Joseph The resulting list has been filtered to only show the items which have had the Joseph label set What you cannot see here is that it is only selecting items within the current compile group If other documents in the project are la belled Joseph but outside of the current compile group they will not be included Filtering only adjusts the current contents of the compile group Example 3 is more subtle In this case we have left the second two options alone but changed the first option to exclude all documents with PoV of Joseph Note that not only have the scenes from the PoV of the other character been select
350. re Sets the number of blank lines to appear before the selected element 0 1 2 or 3 First Line Indent Sets the left indentation of the first line of the paragraph Left Indent Sets the left indentation of all lines in the paragraph excepting the first 19 2 CREATING YOUR OWN SCRIPT FORMATS 167 Right Indent Sets the right indentation of the paragraph First Tab Sets the first tab stop of the paragraph Note that subsequent tab stops may be added automatically to differentiate elements should any elements have the same formatting Advanced Allows you to set the writing direction minimum line height and de fault tab interval the latter for cases where extra tabs are added as mentioned in First Tab above 19 2 3 Tab Return The Tab Return pane allows you to control the tab and return behaviour for the selected element that is it lets you specify what happens when you hit the tab or return keys On return Sets which element formatting the text will use when you hit the return key In the above image Scene Heading is selected in the list on the left and Action is selected for On return This means that if you hit the return key after typing a Scene Heading the text will automatically be formatted ready to type an Action element Note that the pop up buttons in the Tab Return pane take on the same order as the elements in the list on the left Thus if you reorder the elements on the left
351. re in a way similar to Mac OS X s QuickLook but rather than limiting you to only one QuickLook panel and a view only model many QuickReference pan els can be opened simultaneously and when viewing items which would otherwise be editable in the standard editor allow full editing capability They also provide full editing access to most data you can get in the Inspector with the notable exception of snapshots more on that below Once opened QuickReference panels will remem ber their size and position on the screen as well as their meta data viewing options for the duration of the session only There are two easy ways to open a document in QuickReference mode 1 Select one or more documents in the sidebar or a view and tap the Spacebar If more than one document is selection multiple QuickReference windows will be opened at once 2 Use the View QuickReference sub menu to navigate your project binder and open a document from anywhere without disturbing your existing editor views or requiring an editor lock This method is also accessible from Full Screen mode This menu functions in a similar manner to the Go To menu Each item in the Binder will have an entry and you select a container entry just as easily to open that container in its own QuickReference window The panel itself is composed of four major parts one which is hidden by default At the top you have quick access to the Label and Status meta data fields In the middl
352. reenplay format is selected and Scrivener is in scriptwriting mode If Script Mode Screenplay did not have the tick next to it then we would know that the current editor was not in scriptwriting mode that is it would be in normal prose mode for general writing You can more easily tell whether or not you are in scriptwriting mode by looking at the footer view which will look different see below Note that it is possible to set the script mode individually for the two editors in the main window so that you could be writing a script in the top pane but using general text mode in the bottom pane However you cannot use different script types in each editor that is you cannot use screenplay format in one editor and stage play format in the other At the bottom of the scriptwriting menu you can see a list of all the different script formats that are available Scrivener comes with Screenplay format built in Several other script formats are installed if you run the Extras installer that comes with Scrivener You can also create and save your own script formats which will appear in this list see below You can of course mix up different text modes in the same document or draft so that parts of a document may be written as a script and other parts written as general text This makes it very easy to write treatments in Scrivener The screenplay format that comes with Scrivener by default is based on a Holly wood st
353. resets scriptwriting presets and more double click the Extras Installer which should be available in both the DMG and the CD Once this is complete you should eject the DMG or CD from your computer Click the Scrivener icon in the Dock if you have placed it there or double click from the Applications folder to launch Scrivener 4 1 Registering 4 1 1 The Trial Version You can try out all of the features of Scrivener for 30 non consecutive days without having to pay or register During that period Scrivener will be fully functional After 30 days of use you will no longer be able to access Scrivener at all unless you register Actually Scrivener will allow you a single grace session after the 30 days so that you can export all of your work This way if you have decided not to buy Scrivener but forgot to export during the 30 days you can still get your work out of the program 14 4 1 REGISTERING 15 4 1 2 Purchasing Scrivener During the trial period whenever you launch Scrivener you will be reminded of how many trial days you have left and given the option of buying and registering Clicking on the Buy Online button will take you to the Literature amp Latte online store where you can purchase a licence for Scrivener You can also visit the online store at any time whilst using Scrivener by going to the Help menu and choosing Purchase Scrivener If you are reading the paper copy of this manual you probab
354. reveal the meta data without disturbing your original focus If the item is already revealed then the shortcut will switch focus to that meta data area If the Inspector is hidden it will be opened if nec essary which counts as a reveal action Synopsis 8 1 Reveals or switches to the index card in the inspector will use the last inspector pane coupled with the synopsis and meta data panes if necessary Notes 8 H Reveals or switches to the notes editor within the inspec tor z References 38 N Reveals or switches focus to the references table Keywords xX8 J Reveals or switches focus to the keywords table Ar row keys can be used to navigate amongst keywords Return can be used to add new keywords and Delete to remove keywords 248 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Snapshots 3 M Reveals or switches focus to the snapshot text area allowing quick copy and paste of its contents 2 Comments and Footnotes 38 K Reveals or switches focus to the com ment list Arrow keys can be used to navigate amongst contents and expand and collapse notes Outline Provides navigation and disclosure commands which work in both the outliner and in the binder referred to below as the active outliner Container is defined as a folder by default but if Treat all documents with subdocuments as folders is enabled in Navigation preferences section B 5 the definition of container will be ex
355. rface elements available in full screen All of these settings operate on a project by project basis as opposed to the global scope of Preferences In order from left to right Text scale This operates in an identical fashion to the text scale zoom in the stan dard editor The only difference is that full screen stores its own scale setting independent of the editor splits Paper Position Allows you to choose where the paper the column of text should appear on the screen on the left in the centre or on the right You may want it in a non central position for instance if you have a lot of notes to which to refer and you want the inspector open and wide next to the text Paper Width Use this slider to change the width of the text You can set it so that the text takes up the whole width of the screen or appears as a column Paper Height To access this slider hold down the Option key It will replace the Paper Width slider above This sets how tall the paper column should be giving you a letterbox presentation at its more extreme settings Keywords Brings up the standard Keywords HUD section 10 2 which you can use in conjunction with the inspector below to assign keywords to the current document Inspector Brings up the full screen inspector HUD panel see below Dynamic Controls amp Statistics The middle portion of the HUD changes depend ing upon your editing mode In standard editing mode this will display
356. right The paper colour for the edit ing area of the QuickReference window Alternate paper colour used behind the notes section Choose an alternate text high light colour for selection Choose an alternate background colour for margin comments and footnotes display The paper colour for the snap shot text area Note this will ap ply both to snapshots shown in the inspector and snapshots be ing displayed in the main editor Text colour to use when indicat ing text that has been deleted in the difference between the snap shot and the current version Text colour to use when indicat ing text that has been added in the difference between the snap shot and the current version Set individual colours for the re vision level text tool Progress bars blend between three colours this is the colour the progress bar will be when it is at its lowest The final colour that progress bar will appear as If you don t like the way the progress bar looks when blended between Start and End use the Midway option to set a third blend the B 3 CORKBOARD 269 B 3 1 Appearance Draw lines in index cards Determines whether lines should be drawn in the text area of index cards affects both the corkboard and the index card in the inspec tor Display images as photographs Media files such as QuickTime movies and images can be displayed as Polaroids Disabling this option will show a standard synopsis index c
357. rity of cases just as you would with many other types of writing in Scrivener you will want to export your script from Scrivener so that you can do all the final formatting in a dedicated formatting program such as Final Draft in the case of scriptwriting 19 6 EXPORTING A SCRIPT 171 19 6 Exporting a Script To get a screenplay out of Scrivener and into Final Draft export your draft to Final Draft 8 FDX format if you are using Final Draft 8 or to Final Draft 5 7 File Con verter FCF format for earlier versions and then open it in Final Draft Elements such as scene heading action character name parenthesis dialogue and tranition should all be recognised automatically Alternatively you can create the whole script in Scrivener and export it as an RTF or DOC file and tweak it in your word processor of choice 19 7 Final Draft 8 Note that this information is only relevant to Final Draft 8 users Users of previous versions of Final Draft should use the more basic FCF format for importing and exporting their work Preparing the script format in Scrivener Importing FDX Files Exporting Individual Documents to Final Draft Compiling the Whole Draft to an FDX File 1 Preparing the script format in Scrivener NOTE For basic scripts or those that will use Final Draft s standard screenplay formatting indeed for most screenplays this step can be omitted as it is mainly concerned with setting up the formatting for custom scripts
358. roject The files of the other project will be imported into a folder entitled Imported Project at the bottom of the binder with the structure intact Keywords and project references are also imported and any project notes are imported as a text document which is placed at the top of the folder This command can also be used to import and therefore retrieve corrupted projects If you have a project that has somehow become corrupted so that it can no longer be opened in Scrivener use File Import Scrivener Project to have Scrivener do its best to retrieve all the data All the text synopses and notes will be retrieved along with snapshots The structure cannot be retrieved for corrupted projects how ever and folders will be imported as text documents which you can convert back to folders using Documents Convert to Folder 11 1 7 Import and Split There are two modes for this tool 1 Plain text when a plain text file is selected you will be presented with a text field Type in the separator that was used in the text document to define sec tions A common example might be a character Any line in the document that contains only the text entered into this box will be removed from the file and used to split the results in two This process continues further splitting the work into subsequent binder items until all of these lines have been processed 2 FDX Final Draft files can be imported using this tool and w
359. s after this period Scrivener deems it a good time to auto save the project without the save process interrupting what the user is doing You can change the period Scrivener waits to auto save with this preference If you in crease the period significantly be sure to use Save from the File menu regularly to force saves to your project Enable Subversion CVS compatible saving Advanced If this is checked the binder data saved inside your scriv files get saved in XML format instead of bi nary format This makes saving slower but makes your scriv files compatible with Subversion and CVS for versioning If you have no idea what Subversion or CVS is just leave this unchecked and don t worry about it See Version Tracking for more information Automatically name untitled text documents upon saving When enabled text documents that have been left untitled will acquire the first few words from the document B 1 3 Separators This table lets you configure how Scrivener will separate texts from one another in various situations In all cases you have three choices available 1 Single Return Inserts a single carriage return between selections If two para graphs appear together there will be no whitespace between them save for any style based paragraph spacing 2 Empty Line A full empty space will be inserted between selections If you prefer or require working with double spaced paragraphs this is the option you will want to use
360. s and your custom colour swatches in a manner similar to the Format Ruler 14 5 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 125 Comments and Footnotes Will search within any inspector based comments or footnotes in the project By default all will be considered as potential matches but you can narrow this down by selecting one of Comments or Footnotes from the Type menu Inline Annotations and Footnotes Searching for inline annotations gives you three colour matching options Any Color No limits will be made on the search results z Limit Search to Color will only consider annotations of precisely the specified colour as matching z Exclude Color from Search any annotations precisely matching the provided colour will be excluded from the search The default configuration of this search mode is set to exclude all Blueberry Blue annotations This is because Scrivener uses this colour to add bookmark annotations Since it is unlikely that you will want to find these types of annotations in your search it is provided as a handy default Inline footnote searching is much more simple Since footnotes cannot have custom colours no additional criteria is necessary Revision Colour You will be given the choice to search for a particular revision level in the drop down menu These are hard coded as provided by the Format Revision Mode sub menu Do note that if you have changed Scrivener s default colours and are working with a
361. s from the headers defined in the file 28 5 Exporting MultiMarkdown Files You export to MultiMarkdown format the same way you export to any other format using Compile Draft under the File menu In the menu of the Export Format pop up button you will find several options for exporting to MultiMarkdown format MultiMarkdown Exports the draft as a plain text file creating headers from doc ument titles based on the hierarchy in the binder i e a document on the third level under the Draft folder would be have its title generated as title Note that structural titles will not be created for documents that have Preserve Formatting checked This really just gets a clean MultiMarkdown file out of Scrivener created from the whole of the draft MultiMarkdown gt LaTeX First parses the draft into MultiMarkdown format as above and then pipes the text through MultiMarkdown the program built into Scrivener to generate a tex file By default this uses a version of the Memoir class to create the LaTeX file MultiMarkdown gt RTF Parses the draft into MultiMarkdown format and then pipes it through MultiMarkdown to create an RTF file It is unlikely you will use this much given that most MultiMarkdown users are likely to want to use formats other than RTF If RTF is your ultimate aim you would be better off not using MultiMarkdown and instead using Scrivener s built in OS X rich text engine which supports many
362. same holds true for header style bookmarks These use two asterisks and then a space so to give them a custom label enter the label into the annotation after these asterisks In addition to formal bookmarks any annotations that appear on a line by them selves will be added to this menu as well regardless of whether or not they have an asterisk in front 14 12 1 Navigating to Bookmarks Once bookmarks have been created they can be viewed in the header bar icon menu under Bookmarks or View Text Bookmarks menu To navigate to a particular book mark select it from this menu When viewing several documents in a Scrivenings session all of the bookmarks found within the individual documents will be used to populate this menu To remove a bookmark simply delete the inline annotation on the respective line 14 13 EDITING MULTIPLE DOCUMENTS SCRIVENINGS VIEW 141 14 13 Editing Multiple Documents Scrivenings View The Scrivenings view mode View Scrivenings allows you to edit multiple text documents as though they were one long document This way you can write in small chunks and then combine them in any way you like to see how they work together For instance you might write lots of small scenes for a chapter and then view and edit them all together in an Scrivenings session to see how the chapter works as a whole Asan example of how Edit Scrivenings might be used imagine that the Draft folder in the binder has f
363. save any format level adjustments like bold underscore kerning or anything else found in the Format Font sub menu These two types can be used exclusively or combined into a single Preset control ling all aspects of the text appearance and both can optionally also apply font size and font family information The Preset menus will display small icons in blue next to each entry indicating whether the style will impact one or both of these types when applied to your text 120 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Applying Presets The method of application will depend upon the type of preset For character at tributes presets you must select the text you wish to apply the preset to just as you would when using bold or italics For paragraph style presets the caret can be any where in the target paragraph and no selection need be made Of course if you wish to change many paragraphs at once using the selection tools will allow you to do so Note that whatever paragraphs the selection falls into will be impacted even if they are not fully selected Presets which contain both character and paragraph attributes will apply all stylings to the entire paragraph regardless of selection If you wish to only apply font styles to a portion of your paragraph then you will need to create a character attribute preset to do so For example if you saved the bold attribute into the paragraph and character preset the entire paragraph will be embold
364. silvery if the Graphite theme is selected in System Preferences gradient when it has the focus or a grey gradient when it doesn t The colour of the binder will be set to a light blue as is standard for source lists although you can change the colour again after checking this option if you so wish If this option is not checked the binder s selection highlight is drawn based on the system highlight colour although it is still drawn as a gradient in contrast to most other programs If your system uses the standard Aqua theme and blue highlighting you will notice very little difference between this option being turned on and off Show subdocument counts in the binder Beside each container in the binder a number will be displayed showing how many documents it contains This num ber is recursive meaning that it will count not only its immediate children but all of the descendents beneath those children as well if applicable Keep text on lines in index cards and notes When enabled Scrivener will adjust the ruling beneath lines to match the current font size In most cases this will produce the most pleasant result but if your notes have a lot of different font sizes it might look nicer to keep the rules uniform regardless of font size Show notepad lines in documents notes Turns on notepad style ruling for docu ment notes giving it the appearance of a pad of paper Show notepad lines in project notes As with the above will togg
365. spacing Scrivener will look up this formatting in the list of script elements and if an element 19 4 EXPORT THE SCRIPT FROM FINAL DRAFT AS AN RTF FILE 169 is found with matching formatting its name will be selected in the elements pop up button in the footer view If no elements match General Text will be selected This means that if you import a script into Scrivener from another program and want to continue working on it the script format mode selected in Scrivener must exactly match the formatting of the script you have imported For convenience when you install the Extras that come with Scrivener an extra script format entitled Screenplay Final Draft is installed This has been set up to match the elements of a standard screenplay created in Final Draft 7 Assuming you have used the standard screenplay template of Final Draft to create your script then to import the script from Final Draft into Scrivener this is the process you would follow 19 4 Export the script from Final Draft as an RIF file Import the script either by dragging the RTF file from the Finder into Scrivener s binder or by using File gt Import gt Files Select Screenplay Final Draft from the Text gt Scriptwriting menu note that you must have installed the Extras from the Scrivener DMG for this to be available Ensuring that the script is visible in the editor and that the editor has the keyboard focus by clicking into it if nec
366. spell checker Spell checking as you type can be turned on or off via the Edit Spelling and Grammar sub menu or by hitting 38 You can use the contextual menu to get suggested spellings for selected words or use the spell checker also available in that sub menu When Check Spelling as You Type is turned on words that OS X thinks you have misspelled are underlined in red 14 3 Editing with Scrivener Beyond the basics of text editing which are common to many applications Scrivener provides further tools specifically designed for writers in its editor interface The rest of this chapter will focus on these tools in a comprehensive fashion where you can glance through the list of topics covered and pick which items you feel are best suited to your writing style and the task in hand You could read this section cover to cover but it is mean to be a collection of individual nuggets that you can learn independently as you gradually build up your knowledge of the application 14 3 1 Scaling Text The text of the editor can be scaled up and down without affecting the font size via the ability to zoom the scale of the text Each split can have its own zoom setting additionally the full screen mode can have its own independent zoom setting as well All of these settings are preserved between sessions and saved into the project file itself 14 3 EDITING WITH SCRIVENER 113 In the standard text editor interface zoom can be set usi
367. st reading Folders are Files are Folders subsection 8 1 3 64 CHAPTER 9 NAVIGATING AND ORGANISING Favourites As with the Go To menu Favourites will be added to the list Consider adding frequently linked to items as Favourites to make it easier to access them in the future This section will not appear if no Favourites have been created Item List The remainder of the menu will be organised according to how your project is laid out Containers will be converted into sub menus allowing you to navigate the project and select a link target much as you would with the Go To menu Wiki Link Style An optional method lets you type in new links without using the mouse at all or even being fully aware of the title you wish to link to To enable this method visit the Auto Correction tab of Scrivener s preferences and turn on and Scrivener links in the Substitutions section To use this method while typing in the text you can enter two double brackets type in the title of the item you wish to link to and then close it with a second pair of brackets as shown Scrivener will detect what you are trying to do and if it finds an exact match to a document will link it for you automatically If it does not recognise the text inside the brackets as correlating with an existing title the New Link sheet will pop up giving you the option to either create a new item and place it in the Binder or via the second tab Link to existin
368. subsection 14 4 6 for more information on inserting images into your text Line Break x38 Return Inserts a soft break instead of a full paragraph break Use this when you need to create a list within a single paragraph Page Break Inserts a page break within the current text Note that as in TextEdit s Wrap to Window mode page breaks are invisible and will only show up when printing or exporting to a fully featured word pro cessor or if you have Show Invisibles enabled Typically it is best to let Scrivener handle page breaks by section using the Page Break Before option in the inspector See Using Meta data chapter 10 for more infor mation on dynamic document control Non Breaking Space Inserts an space character which will prohibit word wrap from dividing two or more words from each other For the pur poses of word wrap it will consider a sequence of words separated with non breaking spaces as a single word Word Joiner Inserts an invisible Unicode character which has zero width but otherwise acts just as a non breaking space Auto number Scrivener has a number of internal counters which are repre sented as tokens in the text These will be computed and printed in the desired format when compiling Draft Word Count Inserts a token which will be calculated during Compile which indicates the word count for the entire manuscript There are a number of rounding options available for cases where precis
369. sults tab saved searches have a magnifying glass in the corner to indicate that it is a special type of Collection which cannot have its contents modified Saved searches are created by clicking the magnifying glass in the Project Search tool and selecting Save Search If the Collection interface is hidden the sidebar background will change to a ran dom automatically generated colour and the header bar title will adjust to the name 8 4 DOCUMENT TEMPLATES 55 you provided To leave the saved search you can either click the close button in the sidebar footer or enable the Collection tab interface and select another tab Limitations Searches performed using the Binder Selection Only option cannot be saved for future use because the binder selection is a temporary state which changes whenever you click in the binder If you find yourself unable to save a search make sure this option is disabled The contents of a saved search are dynamic Every time the tab is loaded the saved criteria will be checked against the current state of the project If you wish to freeze a list for later reference there are two ways you can do so 1 Convert the saved search to a standard type This will destroy the saved search so only use this method if you no longer need to the search criteria To con vert a saved search result to a standard collection View Collection Convert to Standard Collection 2 Copy the contents into a new collecti
370. syntax is actually based on the Markdown syntax created by John Gruber and the best description of what Markdown is comes from his Mark down web site Daring Fireball Markdown is a text to HTML conversion tool for web writers Markdown allows you to write using an easy to read easy to write plain text format then convert it to structurally valid XHTML or HTML Thus Markdown is two things 1 a plain text formatting syntax and 2 a software tool written in Perl that converts the plain text formatting to HTML See the Syntax page for details pertaining to Markdown s formatting syntax You can try it out right now using the online Dingus The overriding design goal for Markdown s formatting syntax is to make it as readable as possible The idea is that a Markdown formatted document should be publishable as is as plain text without looking like it s been marked up with tags or formatting instructions While Markdown s syntax has been influenced by several existing text to HTML filters the single biggest source of inspiration for Markdown s syntax is the format of plain text email 224 28 2 WHAT IS MULTIMARKDOWN 225 28 2 What is MultiMarkdown The following is Fletcher T Penney s description of MultiMarkdown Markdown is great but it lacked a few features that would allow it to work with documents rather than just pieces of a web page I wrote MultiMarkdown in order to leverag
371. t This will bring up the Assistant panel see Quick Tour chapter 6 which will walk you through creating a new project which will be saved as a scriv file in the direc tory on disk that you specify Open 2 0 Open allows you to open a pre existing scriv file on your hard disk Note that Scrivener cannot open read only files directly such as those that have been backed up to a CD ROM and will give you the opportunity to save the project to an area where you have permission to save files Recent Projects Here you can select and open projects that have recently been opened in Scrivener unless you specify otherwise in the General Preferences section B 1 Scrivener will reopen all projects that were open in a previous session when it is launched Close Project 4 38 W Closes the current project and all of its associated windows Close Window 38 W Closes the currently active window HUD QuickReference or dialogue box However if the project window has focus the entire project will be closed instead Full screen mode must be exited explicitly it does not respond to s W Save 3 S Scrivener auto saves your work so that you never have to worry about losing your writings Projects are also saved automatically whenever they are closed However you can use Save to force an immediate save whenever you want Optionally if you hold down the Opt key lt 3 S you can manually rebuild the search index This is sometimes useful in
372. t colour selection drop down will alter the foreground text colour Click the button once to set the selected text to the depicted colour black by default or right click to access further options You can opt to strip out all colour code from here and at the very bottom of the menu which may be hidden if you have a lot of colour favourites added access the standard colour palette For more information on using the colour palette see Text Colour and Highlights section 16 3 The second colour selection drop down works in an identical fashion to the first but it sets the background highlight colour for the selected range Click once to toggle 14 4 FORMATTING TOOLS 119 the current highlight or use 8 H or use right click to access further options as described above The final fourth section Figure 14 2 of the Format Bar accesses paragraph and line spacing lists and favourite styles The line spacing drop down provides some quick presets but for more complex multi type spacing preferences select the Spacing item at the bottom of this menu The list tool provides most common Western list formats For custom and interna tional formats select the Other menu item Lists can be enumerated or bulleted in a variety of methods They will transform the current paragraph even if empty into the first list item and will continue generating new list lines until you enter a blank line While entering lists it is possible to indent
373. t file is four layers deep if the next item in the list is a folder it will still use the Text and Folder Separator rule There are four types of possible combinations in a compile and each has its own rule You can supply the same rule for all of them if you do not need any special differences between types The types are Text separator inserted between any two adjacent text documents 196 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Text separator B Custom H This separator will be inserted between adjacent text documents Folder separator T Empty line 4 aa This separator will be inserted between adjacent folders Folder and text separator a Empty line 4 This separator will be inserted before text documents that follow folder documents Text and folder separator B Empty line 4 al This separator will be inserted before folder documents that follow text documents Figure 25 6 Compile Separators Pane z Folder separator inserted between any two folders z Folder and text separator inserted at the top of any file that directly follows a folder z Text and folder separator inserted at the top of any folder that directly follows a text file Each individual rule has four options some of which change their behaviour de pending on the compile format Most of the options are as follows z Single return A single paragraph break will be inserted causing the final a
374. t might be a custom icon if you have supplied it with one or if you are viewing a corkboard outside of the Draft it might be some kind of media file icon The title is simply what you would expect it is an editable name of the item as it appears in the binder or in the header bar when you are editing it or view its corkboard The title is also used by the compiler if it has been set up to consider it but we ll come back to that in a later section The synopsis is meant to be a brief encapsulation of what the document s purpose is but beyond that you can use it for whatever you like Some people use it to keep track of the things they need yet to do others keep notes about what they ve written so far and some don t even fill them in at all either just leaving them blank or letting Scrivener automatically generate a synopsis from the first few lines of text Whatever you end up using them for it is important to realise that they are separate from the 12 1 THE CORKBOARD 85 Sire 2 Ratio 9 Spacing Cards across Keyword chips Cd Size to fit editor E Use small font Figure 12 2 Corkboard options pane actual text of the document and in most cases what you type into them will not appear in the final book Use this to your advantage To edit either the title or the synopsis on a card double click in the text field you wish to edit Once editing you can use Tab and Tab to navigate between cards and their two e
375. t session and to check on your progress To bring it up select Project Show Project Targets or press 88 T to toggle its display The targets panel displays two progress indicators one showing the progress of the draft and the other showing the progress of the current session Using this panel you can set a target word count for the draft that is the contents of the Draft folder and for the current session and keep track of how far you have to go before you reach those goals To change the targets just click in the appropriate text field and enter a new target word count or target character count you can set whether the target should be in words or characters by clicking on words so that a pop up menu appears allowing you to choose between words and characters Using targets to hit an editing goal While this tool was originally designed to set a writing goal you work up toward it can easily be used as an editing tool when cutting text It not only counts words added but words subtracted You can set an editing goal in the same way you would set a writing goal The progress bars will appear maxed out Once you have edited below the target you can be optionally alerted to this fact with Growl or just keep an eye on it as you work This panel will float over your project if you leave it open and update itself in real time as you write and edit If you want to track a goal for an individual document rather t
376. talic Strikethrough All of these operate in the same fashion by ei ther modifying the behaviour of typing if there is no selection or toggling the selected text between the various styles Note that not all fonts sup port these styles If it appears that one of these is not working check your font for proper variant support Underline Has been expanded from the system default menu item to pro vide additional support for underlining styles including dotted dashed and by word Remember Typing Style Use to set up fonts and ruler styles in blank doc uments Ordinarily if you change formatting settings on a blank docu ment these settings will be removed to optimise the RTF file Use this command to force these settings to be retained Generally you will only need this when setting up Document Templates section 8 4 Outline Changes the style of the font to outlined instead of filled Bigger 4 8 Increases the size of the font by one point Smaller 38 Decreases the size of the font by one point Kern Supplies access to the OS X typographic kerning engine Ligature If the font family supports typographic ligatures they can be enabled or disabled here Baseline Adjust the baseline height of the text most commonly referred to as superscripting and subscripting Character Shape If the font family supports typographic shape alternates they can be adjusted here such as Old Style Numerals Show Colors 8 C Toggles
377. te that further options can be accessed via the corkboard display options button which is located on the right hand side of the footer bar for each corkboard See also Setting Up Meta Data chapter 10 for more information on the types of meta data that can be viewed on an index card Cards Across The Cards Across submenu allows you to define how many index cards you would like to appear in each row on the corkboard The default is three Auto will calculate how many cards to show based on the size of the editor and the size of the cards kind of like word wrap for index cards Show Hide Pins 38 P Toggles whether the coloured pins are displayed on the index cards Pins take on the colours associated with the labels that have been assigned to the documents represented by the index cards If you are using the Rounded Card theme pins will be displayed as colour swatches on the upper right side of the card The appearance of pins can be adjusted in the corkboard tab section B 3 of preferences Show Hide Stamps 38 S Toggles whether stamps are displayed on index cards Stamps show the current status associated with the document rep resented by the index card as though it has been stamped on the index card The appearance of stamps can be adjusted in the Corkboard tab section B 3 and the Appearance tab section B 2 Show Hide Keyword Colors 38 K Keywords assigned to a document can be visually indicated along the right
378. ted A yellow border will appear around the selected template Once this is set the next time you call up this window it will highlight that template for you Import Template If you have downloaded templates from the Web or would like to transport your custom templates to another computer use this feature to import template files from the disk into the template system Export Template Useful for sharing your templates on the Web with other au thors or if you wish to transfer templates to another working computer Delete Selected Template When a custom template is selected you can use this menu item to remove it from your system Note that the built in presets cannot be removed 7 6 Backing Up Your Work Regularly backing up your work is an important part of the writing process and while there are many external strategies for keeping your work safe from catastrophes and mistakes the most important part is remembering to do it Fortunately it is possible to set up Scrivener to handle most of the latter part for you 7 6 BACKING UP YOUR WORK 43 7 6 1 Configuring Automated Backups By default Scrivener will automatically back up every project that you work on whenever you close it These backups will be stored in your user folder Library Application Support Scrivener Backups This location can be changed in preferences and could even be set to save into a synced folder over the Internet Also by default projects will b
379. ted against projects with millions of words in them way beyond what it would normally have to face So for ordinary usage you will never need to worry about limitations There is one caveat to keep in mind however The bigger your project is on the disk the longer it will take to produce backups When combined with the automated backup system this could mean waiting long periods of time for backups to complete in the most extreme cases While Scrivener is very capable of handling large amount of media some users have found it better to use database software in conjunction with Scrivener when gigabytes of data are involved 36 7 2 CREATING A NEW PROJECT 37 7 2 Creating a New Project When you first start Scrivener you will be presented with the Project Templates win dow In addition to providing an easy selection mechanism for new projects based on templates you can also create a blank new document which is the default for new installations open existing projects from your disk or select from a short list of re cently opened projects To call up this window use the File New Project menu command or press 8 N Along the left side of the window are template categories A number of useful presets have been provided and it is easy to make your own templates as well The Options drop down menu provides template management tools To read more about creating and managing templates see Templates section 7 5 To create a n
380. templates folder Anything that you create within the templates folder will be available for usage in the project 8 4 DOCUMENT TEMPLATES 57 It is possible to pre configure all aspects of an item The only thing which will not get carried over is Snapshots The latest version of the item s text will always be used and Snapshots will be ignored 8 4 3 Using Document Templates Once a container is designated as a Template Folder and items have been added to it you can generate copies of these templates via the Projects New from template sub folder The items in this folder will be arranged precisely as they have been or ganised in the binder Groups will become further sub menus As with the other commands that create new items they will be created in relation with the current binder selection z If you select an entire group it and all of its child items will be created in the selected position a The first template item in the template folder is a special spot as it will be given a keyboard shortcut 38 N Using this shortcut you can easily create that item on the fly so if applicable choose the top position for a template you will be using most frequently As with project templates once created document templates have no connec tion with the item that they were modelled after It is safe to delete a template that is no longer being used to create new items You might wish to however move the template item to anot
381. th the bold items indicating material used from Document B Note that for this purpose a freeform corkboard is still considered to adhere to Outline Order as is depicted by the card number View Corkboard Show Card Numbers on the index cards If you wish to impose a new order based on the freeform spatial placement make sure to use the Commit Orderbutton section 12 1 5 first and then merge 116 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Document A Synopsis This is the first document This is the second document Keywords Apples Carrots Status First Draft Notes Mix these two together in a blender for a great tasting healthy beverage When merging the main text will be combined according to the preferences you have set in the General preferences pane section B 1 under the Separators section Merged documents can be combined with a single line a full empty line useful in sit uations where plain text is in use and paragraphs need to have an empty line between them or a custom separator which allows you to type in any sequence of characters Note you can add carriage returns and tabs to this field by holding down the Option key and typing in the special character 14 3 3 Typewriter Scrolling You can turn typewriter scrolling on for the main editors QuickReference panes and for the full screen editor independently via the Format Options sub menu 8 T Typewriter scrol
382. the feature to sync two different versions of the project see above You will receive a warning dialogue the first time you try on each system but in this one case it can be ignored Avoid editing the filename The numeric value on the very end of the filename enclosed in hyphens such as 78 the precise number will be different for each item is vital to keeping the file identifiable by the item it is linked with in the project damaging the number could produce unintended duplication or data loss in some cases z Session target goals will include synced changes When updating project files with external edits the session target will be incremented by the amount of text that has been added If you wish to keep track of your session target separately you might wish to reset the counter after updating your project z fusing mixed inspector comments and inline annotations When using sync fold ers it is best to use either all Inspector footnotes and comments or all inline annotations and footnotes and set your Import amp Export preferences accord ingly In some rare cases comments adjacent to annotations can result in one of the notes getting lost due to the limitations of the RTF format Dropbox and iOS When using Dropbox with the iPad or iPhone you can elect to have documents stored on your device Ordinarily you need an active Internet connection to view files but when a file has been marked as a Favorite
383. the Appearance tab section B 2 in the Editor section under Current Line Highlight This setting will also impact full screen unless text colour override is enabled Disable insertion point blinking When enabled the cursor will be always visible on the screen Use block insertion point of n pixels Adjust the width of the insertion point from its default of 1 pixel This will dramatically increase the visibility of it however with variable width fonts like Optima this setting can produce odd results It is best used with a fixed width font like Courier Default Text Zoom Dynamically scale the size of the text font in the editor This will not impact the underlying font settings letting you use a larger or smaller 276 APPENDIX B PREFERENCES font while editing Note this only sets the default Each editor split can have its own settings and these settings will be preserved between editing sessions Ruler Units Lets you choose the units centimetres inches picas or points that should be used in the main editor s ruler available by hitting R when the editor has the focus or by selecting Show Ruler in the Edit menu B 6 2 Wrap to Editor Mode There are two primary editor modes in Scrivener 2 Wrap to Editor is the method that most will be familiar with coming from Scrivener 1 In this mode text is wrapped according to the width of the editor view or an artificial limit when Fixed width is enabled Wrap to Page mode is a new
384. the Edit Copy Special Copy Documents as Scrivener Links menu command Now you can paste V the items into several different places rapidly As with Drag and Drop you can select more than one binder item at once producing quick lists of links Select Text and Link Often you will want to link a phrase to a specific document without having the name of that document be a part of the link To create links in this fashion select the text you wish to link and then right click on the selected text Use the Scrivener Link sub menu to create a new link This menu is also located in Edit Scrivener Link This sub menu functions in a very similar manner to the Go To menu sec tion 9 2 by providing an organised list of every item in the binder The menu is organised as follows New Link 3g L Brings up a sheet which gives you the option between creating a new item and choosing where to place that item or to navigate through a list of items that already exist There are two tabs available in the sheet The default tab Create New Linked Document will let you generate a new document and attach it to an existing con tainer or optionally another item forming a new container 9 5 SCRIVENER LINKS 63 Create New Linked Document Link to Existing Document Destination Research F Title A new document with the specified title will be created inside the destination document and a link to it will be added
385. the available tabs It will be noted in each section which formats the tab is relevant to 25 3 1 Contents Pane This option pane is a core feature available to all export formats The Contents pane is where you define which parts of the Draft Scrivener will use to create your exported file To accomplish this it provides several tools of varying scope The method with the most immediate impact is the drop down menu at the very top of the pane marked as 1 Figure 25 1 Ordinarily this will have the Draft selected which might be called something else if you have renamed it or started with a template In cases where you wish to proof only a portion of the book or are working in a project that includes several editions located in the Draft you can use this drop down to select only a portion of the manuscript Whatever container you select will include everything from that point downward in outliner terminology its descendants You 184 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Draft o include Title S Pg Break Before As ls v Table of Contents z a v Introduction v O Chapter 1 z z v Scene a Z v Scene b Q z v Scene c J J v C Chapter 2 z v Scene d J v Scene e a O v Scene f 0 aaa i select or deselect all Compile Included documents H Filter include Documents with labe No Label Figure 25 1 Compile Contents Pane could for example select the folder called Chapter 1 All of the scene files incl
386. the binder items titles and is thus useful for keeping clutter out of the binder Rather than putting Chapter lt n gt into every single chapter folder in the binder you can simply add that to the Prefix and be done with it This means you can also more easily use casual titles for proofing prints and more formal titles when submitting your manuscript It is possible to type carriage returns tabs and other such characters into these fields allowing you to create multi line titles if you wish Click the purple Help button in this sheet for some useful examples of title pre fixes and suffixes For MultiMarkdown users by default the title prefix and suffix will be placed within the hash marks that Scrivener generates to indicate title depth If you prefer you can disable the Place prefix suffix inside hashes options to allow text entry out side of the header line itself Note that to allow compatibility with the other compile formats you will need to manually type in carriage returns to separate lines Placing characters before or after the hashmarks ona title line will at best cause it to no longer render as a title correctly One important thing to consider is that the title prefix and suffix entries will be printed even if Titles are disabled for that row This can prove very useful in some cases It could for example let you use casual titles in the binder and standard generic titles in the manuscript Formatting f
387. thod for storage of backups on network drives Back Up Now Triggers the automatic backup system to produce a backup im mediately using the preferences for backup location and rotation scheme Customise how this works in the Backup preferences pane section B 10 http www denvog com iphone IndexCard A 3 EDIT MENU 233 Exclude From Automatic Backups Removes the current project from the au tomated backup system This is useful when the current project is very large and is causing you to have to wait for long intervals while the auto matic system performs backups Note that when this option is engaged Scrivener s backup protection will be completely ignored for this project Take care to manually back up excluded projects from time to time Save As Template Saves the current project as a template This will add it to the New Project window for use as a basis for future projects For more informa tion on creating templates see Templates section 7 5 Page Setup 38 P Accesses the standard page layout setup pane Additionally accesses Scrivener specific features from the Settings drop down menu For full documentation of the printing process see Document Printing section 27 1 Note these settings do not adjust Compile printing only current document printing though Compile can be optionally configured to use your Page Setup paper dimensions Print Current Document 38 P Prints the current editor view How
388. ting snapshots are all managed in the inspector pane To jump to snap shots click the button with a camera in the Inspector footer bar use the Docu ments Snapshots Show Snapshots menu item or press 3 M You can read more about the particulars of the interface subsection 17 4 4 to learn more about 1 Deleting existing snapshots 2 Running comparisons between the current text and a snapshot or between two snapshots 3 Reverting your changes to an older snapshot 14 10 3 Viewing Snapshots in the Editor It is possible to load snapshots as read only text into the main editor splits To do this simply drag the snapshot you wish to view into the header bar for the editor split you wish to load it in You can also load the snapshot in comparison mode by holding down the Option key as you drag the snapshot into the header bar 14 10 4 Automatically Created Snapshots Some functions in Scrivener will create automatic snapshots for you When a docu ment is scheduled to be changed to a sync action the default behaviour is to create a snapshot before updating the document with the remote changes This makes it easy to find what has changed with the external document This behaviour can be sup pressed within the sync configuration panes if you wish to keep the snapshots area for your milestones only 14 11 Auto Completion Material not finished 14 11 11 Typographic and Grammar Adjustments Material not finished 140 CHAPT
389. tings to save your format for use with other projects to save it for back up somewhere on your hard drive or to share it with others and to load from file an existing format mode created either by yourself or someone else note that some formats have been created by other users and shared on the forums Next to the Manage pop up is another pop up button that allows you to choose the units used to define your style inches centimetres or points most script formats use inches of course On the bottom right of the panel are the OK and Cancel buttons for saving or cancelling the changes you have made to the format mode respectively Note that clicking OK saves the script format into the current project package This means that if you share your scriv file with someone else that someone else will be able to open the project and use the script format regardless of whether they have this script format installed on their machine The format will not be available for use with other projects until you select Save for use with other projects from the Manage menu though Once you are happy with the format it is thus strongly recommended that you make it available for use with other projects Note that making a format available for use in other projects saves it as an XML file in Library Application Support Scrivener ScriptFormats For script formats you use a lot it is recommended that you also use Ma
390. tle text if necessary or style it like a header For more details on splitting doc uments read Managing Documents with Split and Merge subsection 14 3 2 z Append Selection to Document Provides a menu of all documents in the binder Selecting a document from this menu will cause the selected text in the editor to be appended to the document selected from the menu Read Gathering Material chapter 11 for more tips on moving text around and organising information in the Binder za Set Selected Text as Title Sets the title of the current document to the text se lected in the editor z Add Selection to Auto Complete List Adds the selected text to the project s auto complete list which can be maintained with the Project Auto Complete List menu command Read more about this feature in Auto Completion sec tion 14 11 z Scrivener Link Allows you to create a link to another document in the project within the text Read more about linking items together in Scrivener Links section 9 5 z Text Color Provides the text colour menu from which you can select from the built in colours or those custom colours you have saved into your colour palette Highlight Provides the highlight menu allowing you to select a highlight colour for the selected text or to clear it Read more about this and the above feature in Text Colour and Highlights section 16 3 Images Contextual Menu These options appear when right clickin
391. tline 148 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING Page Count Options Set the counting algorithm used to estimate paperback page counting This figure will be divided from the total word count to produce an estimate 14 14 4 Text Statistics The Text Statistics panel can be accessed with Project Text Statistics or S is only available when the active editor is displaying text and it will produce statistics for all of the text being displayed even if that editor is currently displaying many documents in a Scrivenings session The types of information it provides are more pertinent to the topology of the text document as opposed to the end product where page counts and paperback estimations come into play In addition to the simple counter statistics you can flip down the Word Frequency chart to display a table of discovered words how often they have been used numeri cally and graphically how often in comparison with other words in the table These columns can be sorted by clicking on their header fields Chapter 15 Full Screen Full screen mode allows you to edit your text in a distraction free environment You can view any text document or Scrivenings session section 14 13 in a full screen mode akin to the one in iPhoto so that you can compose and refer to your notes without the noise of the rest of your desktop or even Scrivener itself Consequently you ll find that Scrivener disables itself to a degree while in f
392. tself will always override either of the above To reset a document to either the project preferences if changed or the applica tion preferences use the menu command Documents Convert Formatting to De fault Text Style The top half of the tab is dedicated to setting up the default settings for new text documents files and folders You will have access to the full standard ruler settings as well as font controls via the Show Fonts button All changes you make here will be immediately previewed against the provided sample quotation If you already have a document set up the way you would like all future documents to appear make sure that editor and not the other split if one is open is active before clicking the Use Current button Footnotes font When enabled the font within an in line footnote will be changed to this setting It will still conform to the ruler settings of the text around it Also note this setting does not impact Inspector Footnotes Scriptwriting font When the editor is set to Scriptwriting mode this font will be used instead Notes font The default font for all notes This setting impacts Project Notes and Document Notes alike Note that both of these are rich text fields and can be changed from this default As with the main text editor if you change this setting later on old notes will remain as they were Writing direction In most cases you will want to use the Natural setting which is s
393. ttings panel Text gt Scriptwriting gt Script Settings Enter a title for your new format in the Format Title text field Select the first element in the list 170 CHAPTER 19 SCRIPTWRITING and give it the name you require i e the name of the element in which you placed the cursor in step 3 by double clicking into it and editing it if necessary From the Manage pop up button in the Script Settings panel select Use current font amp paragraph settings This will copy the font and paragraph information from the line of text in which the cursor has been placed in the editor into the Font and Paragraph panes of the Script Settings sheet Repeat this process matching the settings for the elements in the Script Settings panel with the text in the editor for each element in your script Be sure to save your script format for use with other projects using the Manage pop up button at the bottom of the Script Settings panel You can then use your new format with all projects in the future for any scripts you import Once you have successfully created your own script format mode all of the elements in your imported script should be recognised in the pop up button in the footer view of the editor and you should be able to use the script mode to continue editing your script Note that more complicated script formats may require a little more tweaking to be recognised but the above process should work for most If you do
394. types of formatting tools Note that Scrivener does not supply word processor stylesheets Styles are strictly saved formats which can be applied to your text Once applied they are static changes to the text and will not be updated later if you change that favourite style A Z FORMAT MENU 259 Highlight The highlight menu lets you place a background highlight behind the selected text much like using a highlighter marker on paper In addition to the five provided presets this menu also displays any favourite colours that have been set on your system For more information on how to use highlights see Highlights Revision Mode Revision modes force anything you type to be displayed in a pro vided colour until you disable the revision mode This menu provides access to these levels For more information on using this see Marking Revisions section 16 4 For more information on annotating and footnoting your text see Annotating and Marking Your Text chapter 16 Note that while the menu system refers to these as footnotes it is possible to export them as endnotes during compile Comment 73 8 Attaches a comment to the selected text or previous word mak ing a new linked comment in the inspector pane Useful for keeping notation text out of the editor Footnote As with Comments adds a linked footnote style comment to the inspector pane Useful for keeping footnote information out of the editor Inline Annotation 8
395. u ment Convert underlines to italics Use when you have produced a document with un derlines but need an italic version for compile This option is not available to any formats which produce a plain text docu ment 25 3 OPTION PANES 199 Convert linked images to embedded images If you have used linked images in your project text use of this function will find the original resources and embed them directly into the compiled document You will nearly always want to use this option when producing a file that will be sent to other people See also Linked Inline Images section 14 4 6 Only available with the RTFD format Presentation Options Disable auto numbering Scrivener s token counter system will be disabled the to kens will remain visible Note this only impacts the counter system Other document tokens and replacements will still be expanded Use hyphenation By default hyphenation will not be used When full justification is in use this option can substantially improve the compiled result If you in tend to use a word processor to handle the compiled file it is often better to let it handle hyphenation Only available to RTF Printing PDF and the word processor formats Avoid widows and orphans When used with a compatible word processor this will enable widow and orphan protection for your paragraphs Only available with the RTF format and the DOC format when Import amp Export preferences have been set to e
396. uded in the folder will be used in the Compile including the chapter folder itself but nothing outside of that folder will be used In addition to folder selection you can also select a Collection to be used the con tent source When Collections are in use there are two important things to consider 1 The rule of thumb in which only items within the Draft can be compiled will be temporarily dismissed Items placed into a collection from outside of the Draft will be included in the compile However only text and folder items will be used 2 Since Collections have no inner hierarchy the compile will always result in a flat list of documents Book parts will be on the same level as sub sections to put it into practical terms Since the final result will always be a flattened file anyway the main thing to note here is that only those formatting stylesheets relating to Level 1 will apply 25 3 OPTION PANES 185 Content Item List The item list is the large display in the middle of the pane listing the contents of whatever has been selected in the top drop down menu In the case of the illustrated example marked as 2 Figure 25 1 the Draft has been selected and so the entire Draft contents are revealed in the list below it The items in this list will be indented in the same fashion that they are indented within the binder representing their hierarchy If you wish to use Collections but still retain hierarchy read the next section o
397. uestions on the forums His own tutorials are by far the best places to go to learn about using Scrivener with MultiMarkdown See his website and the Scrivener forums for more information Thank you Fletcher Appendices 228 Appendix A Menus and Keyboard Shortcuts This chapter will address each item in every menu and will display the keyboard shortcut for it when applicable It is intended to be a quick exhaustive reference of the menus and will attempt to point you in the right direction for more thorough discussion and analysis of various features when necessary A l Scrivener Menu Much like the application menu in any other Mac OS X program this provides access to application level information features and system integration such as Services About Scrivener Displays the credits and version number of the application If you are experiencing problems and wish to contact customer support regarding them you can provide version information using this dialogue Simply click anywhere outside of the scrolling text area to dismiss it Preferences 8 Accesses the main application menu dialogue For a complete list of all available options see Preferences Appendix B Registration When you purchase the application use this menu item to copy and paste your registration information from the e mail that you will receive from Literature amp Latte In case you have lost the original e mail or never received it you ca
398. uld be easy to view the project as an outline and use drag and drop to restructure the project Moving between the outline and the text itself should be fluid 4 CHAPTER 1 PHILOSOPHY z It should be possible to view individual documents either as discrete chunks of text or combined with other arbitrary documents Thus for instance a chapter could be viewed as a whole or each scene could be viewed individually a The user should be able to view more than one document at the same time for instance the end of one chapter alongside the beginning of the next a character sketch alongside a scene in which that character appears or a research document alongside the writing it is being used to support The software should be capable of storing and displaying common research documents because writers do not just use text they also refer to images web pages recorded interviews and other media The overriding philosophy behind Scrivener was in part inspired by a passage writ ten by the author Hilary Mantel in a collection of essays by writers on the process of writing entitled The Agony and the Ego Hilary Mantel described a process of grow ing a book rather than writing one which can be summed up as follows 1 During the first stage of writing you might jot ideas down on index cards phrases character names scene ideas any insight or glimpse 2 When you have gathered a few index cards you might pin them
399. ull screen mode Menu commands that would otherwise be available are turned off in most cases these are commands which would have no meaning at all such as commands for merging two selected items in the Binder or enabling Corkboard view To enter full screen you must have a text document as the active document you cannot view images or any other type of media in full screen and it must be visible as text that is the corkboard or outliner modes must not be active Launch full screen either by hitting X38 F or select View Enter Full Screen Pre loading History In Full Screen The one instance in which you can enter full screen if the corkboard or outliner is visible is if you have selected multiple items in the binder In this case the currently selected document in the corkboard will be displayed in full screen mode and all of the other documents on the corkboard will get loaded into the full screen navigation history This is a good way of loading multiple documents so that you can easily flip between them in full screen using the 38 and 3g keyboard shortcuts It can also lead to confusion if the editor itself is already in Scrivenings mode for these selected items Make sure to call the Full Screen command with focus in the area you wish to edit from To add multiple items to the history queue from the binder leave your focus in the binder If you wish to edit the Scrivenings session that resulted from that selection make sure
400. ument in the active project in Scrivener from the selected text in the active application Note that all new clippings are placed inside a Clippings folder which will appear right at the bottom of the binder This service is slightly different from the above two in that the title you provide will be used to name the clipping document that is created in the binder A default date based title will be provided in case you do not wish to bother with naming them individually 82 CHAPTER 11 GATHERING MATERIAL 11 3 Scratch Pad Panel The scratch pad is a universal Scrivener tool that is not tied to any particular project You can use it to jot down any notes that don t fit anywhere else or that arise whilst you are looking at another application You can access it by selecting Show Scratch Pad from the Window Show Scratch Pad menu 8 or you can use the Dock menu by right clicking on the Scrivener icon in the Dock and selecting Scratch Pad which will bring up the scratch pad over the currently active application The scratchpad is a floating panel which means that you can have it open over the main window or in full screen while you work on other documents or even other appli cations The top pane contains a list of all the note pads you currently have stored in the scratch pad New notes can be added by clicking the button in the lower left and notes you no longer need can be deleted with the delete button next to it
401. ument s to the favourite list Remove from Favorites Removes the selected document s from the favourite list Favourites will be added to the following menu functions z Edit Go Tom Provides navigation features to any spot in the binder z Edit QuickReference Opens a QuickReference Panel for the selected item from that menu za Edit Scrivener Link Creates text links to documents like URLs in a web browser 2 Documents gt Move To Moves selected binder items to other locations in the binder 9 7 Layouts Panel Material not finished Chapter 10 Setting Up Meta Data Documents of any type in Scrivener can have various meta data associated with them Some of this meta data can be viewed in the corkboard outliner views and the Quick Reference panes but the main interface for viewing and editing all of the meta data for a given document is the Inspector chapter 17 This section will brief you on the various types of meta data available and how to create more types if necessary It will not go into all of the details of the Inspector pane please read that section to gain a full understanding of how meta data is assigned to documents 10 1 Meta Data Types The basic meta data types include the title text synopsis and an optional image re placement for the synopsis The title is the most important component of any item in the binder as it will be used to identify the document in the man
402. uments that have the phrase the book as written not documents that just have the word book It will also return documents that contain the books For exclusive matching use Whole Word below e All Words Every word entered into the search field must appear in the selected data type Documents which only match some of the words will not be returned Words can be entered in any order Analogous to logical AND Any Word Queried documents must contain at least one of the words typed into the search field Analogous to logical OR Whole Word Unlike any of the above search methods the term supplied will only match whole words A search for Jo will only return docu ments with that word not documents that also contain Joseph Options Provides a few extra options as well as searching scope limiters Scope limiters instruct the search engine to only analyse parts of your binder rather than the entire thing 128 CHAPTER 14 WRITING AND EDITING z Search Draft Only Will only look in the Draft folder of the binder Note that if the name of Draft has been changed in the project the title of this option will reflect that name change z Search Binder Selection Only Pre select items in the binder and then per form the search against those items only This selection is explicit not implicit Selecting a folder will not include all of its children in the search query as well Search Included
403. ure to check Do not show this warning again When importing text documents they are internally converted to the RTF format so that Scrivener can work with them easily again note that this has no effect on the 77 78 CHAPTER 11 GATHERING MATERIAL original file in the Finder only on the copy that is made inside the Scrivener project during the import process This can cause some loss of data for some file types see Compatibility Issues below When using the import menu items material will be imported according to where the current binder selection is set If you have a line selected in the binder the material will be inserted between the selected line and the one below it If more than one item is selected the last item in top down fashion will be used as the insertion point This means that some forms of import will be disabled depending on where your selection is If your selection is in the Draft you will be unable to import media of any kind if your selection is in the Trash all import will be disabled The only exception to this is importing another Scrivener project and importing from SimpleText ws both of which ignore binder selection and create top level folders at the bottom of your binder When using drag and drop the dropped material will be placed wherever the inser tion indicator in the binder shows If you try to drag media into the Draft the drop will be prohibited until you move the mouse out of t
404. ut 254 APPENDIX A MENUS AND KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Merge 73 M The opposite of splitting merge will take two or more documents and combine them all together into a single document using the top most doc ument in the selection as the template for the merged document s meta data This action cannot be undone except via the split command Note that in those fields where combination makes sense such as notes and keywords all of the documents will be used to create a combined meta data result How documents get merged together can be controled in the General prefer ences pane section B 1 under Separators Group lt 3 G Takes one or more selected items and creates a new folder placing the selection within that folder You will be given the option to name that folder after invoking the command Ungroup 3 U The opposite of grouping ungroup will move the contents of the Move Sort selected container up one level so that they become siblings of that container This action will not destroy the original container allowing you to move the items back in if it was made in error Provides keyboard shortcuts for moving the item around in the outline in two dimensions as well as completely displacing it to another spot in the binder To This menu will be populated with all of the items in the binder The selected item s will be moved beneath the selected item as children Note that if you select a document
405. ut The feature can also be accessed from the header bar menu Locking the editor prohibits external click actions from impacting the locked ed itor This means that clicks in the binder corkboard or outliner when Auto load is enabled will be blocked This makes it easy to keep your editing session while you use the binder or these other views to explore the outline What locking will NOT do is prohibit actions taken from within the editor itself This includes use of the binder navigation arrows History functions and manually dragging items to the header bar or menu navigation commands Locking is meant primarily to keep the interface from taking actions that it would ordinarily take automatically It will not inhibit intentional actions that you make When the editor is locked the header bar will change to a reddish colour which persists even when the split is not active 9 5 Scrivener Links Much like hyperlinks on the Web Scrivener Links make it easy to create and use a network of text based cross references within your project Since they do not export from you project it is safe to use them in the text of your work wherever you need them They can also be used within the various available notepads Their ability to elevate the visibility of information in your project can turn them into a valuable navigation tool as well as providing convenient uses beyond the project itself during Compile The creation of links can even be a
406. variations they will all get the same name To avoid this create a new named colour swatch for each variation This is a purely aesthetic feature though Names are not used for anything except for your own reference Mac OS X Tip If you wish to share your colour sets with other users or transfer them to another computer you will find a file in your user Library folder un der Colors named Scrivener clr Place this file into the same folder on the second computer and it should become instantly available 76 CHAPTER 10 SETTING UP META DATA Palette Needs attention Orange Marker EER Pink Marker E Green Marker Blue Marker Dark Green Placeholder annotation Drag amp Rename Figure 10 2 Custom named colours Scrivener Menus Remove Color C Needs attention D Orange Marker B Pink Marker P Green Marker J Sue Marker E Placeholder annotation Chapter 11 Gathering Material 11 1 File Import Whether you are using Scrivener for the first time and want to use it with documents you have already created in other programs or whether you just have reference files lying around that you want to bring into an existing project the chances are that at some point you will need to import documents created in other word processors and programs into your Scrivener project Fortunately this is very easy Importing files into the project binder means that these files will be copied and poss
407. ved within the Scrivener project when you return 14 8 1 Viewing Images The image view is displayed whenever an image document is selected allowing you to zoom in and out and rotate it If the image is larger than the viewable area click and hold the mouse on the image and move the mouse to drag scroll the image around To zoom in and out and rotate double click anywhere within the image or the grey area around it This will bring up the image tools HUD The slider at the top of the HUD allows you to scale the image The button on the left of the slider zooms the image as far out as it will go that is makes it as small as possible and sets the slider to the far left the button on the right of the slider zooms the image as far in as it will go makes it as large as possible and sets the slider to the far right Below the slider you can check a Scale to fit option which will disable the slider and always size the image according to how big the editor is There are three tools available there is a button for rotating the image rotating it 90 degrees clockwise or anti clockwise when Option clicked a button for fitting the image to the current viewable area and a button that returns the image to 100 magnification In the footer bar click the toolbox button to open the image an your default exter nal editor If you wish to open the file in another program right click on this button to select an alternate from a menu This menu
408. ves the parts of a project that have changed to save space Copying a scriv file out of the backup disk will hardly ever re sult in a valid project file Apple s Time Machine tool will always re assemble a complete version of your project by building it together from hundreds of individual backups Going the extra mile Time Machine is a wonderful tool for what it does but it shouldn t be used as your sole backup for two important reasons First being attached to your computer at all times it is thus susceptible to the same risks of 7 6 BACKING UP YOUR WORK 45 damage and loss due to theft or catastrophe Second no backup system should be considered infallible and thus you should have more than one method Time Machine isn t perfect don t let it be your single safety net Chapter 8 Setting Up the Binder 8 1 How the Binder is Organised The binder is the document browser on the left of the main window where you can organise your files It allows you to structure and rearrange your work with the utmost flexibility much like a ring binder in the real world hence the name You can drag files from the Finder straight into the binder to import them too which you can read more about in Gathering Material chapter 11 The binder is an optional element though in most cases you ll want to rely on its organisational features at all times To hide the binder click the Binder icon in the toolbar select View Layout Hide
409. w harmless de cocoa html http www stone com http www omnigroup com gt http mattgemmell com source Shttp andymatuschak org http journler com Shttp www devon technologies com http www positivespinmedia com http www bean osx com found on their respective websites Philip Dow author of Journler help with the custom ruler code Wagner Truppel for help figuring out how to draw the diagonal status text in the cork board Martin Wierschin of Nisus for various help with the chicaneries of the text system and RTF Peter Maurer help with the custom ani mated disclosure triangles and kindly pro vided the images too Christian and Eric at Devon Technologies help with keeping Scrivener in the back ground when the clippings services are used Positive Spin Media the tab bar in the project notepad uses PSMTabBarControl Copyright 2005 Positive Spin Media all rights reserved which in turn uses por tions of code from Copyright 2004 The Shiira Project all rights reserved Malte Rosenau for pointing me in the direc tion of the code I needed to import web pages with their titles intact James Hoover creator of Bean for provid ing the basis of the show invisibles code and vi for sharing various other code snippets from his work on Bean Brent Simmons the OPML importer code is based on a class created by Brent Simmons for NetNewswire Copyright 2002 Brent Simm
410. way of viewing a section of your work The important thing to realise with the corkboard is that each of the displayed index cards are actual files or folders in your binder outline They display the title and the synopsis a short description of the item on the cover and optionally can represent a few kinds of meta data using real world metaphors as well Just remember cards are documents and conversely documents can all be viewed as cards The corkboard view is rich with features to read more about it and how to best use it see The Corkboard section 12 1 5 2 2 Outliner While the binder is in a sense a very simple outliner there are often times when you need to view your book or parts of it in a much larger context and with a greater degree of information at your disposal The outliner view lets you see your book structure in a standard outline format with indenting used to indicate depth It also has the ability to display many built in aspects of your documents from their label colour to word counts modification dates keywords and much more including your own custom meta data Outliner is also a great view for making bulk changes to lots of documents at once Since it provides feedback for so many different aspects of your document it is easy to see what has been changed at a glance Many people also like to brainstorm in the Outliner view as well Whether you prefer the analogue experience of the corkboard or the more lite
411. we suggest that going through the full tutorial would be best 6 l Project Format Scrivener is a project based application which means that it stores your projects as separate files rather than working like a database which hides the location from you and loads everything automatically when you start up the program or a file based program like TextEdit which creates an empty document whenever you launch it The intended use of a project is to store everything relating to a single major work be it your next novel screenplay for a film a dissertation for your masters or a serial collection of articles for a magazine or blog It is recommended that for each new real world project you embark on a new project file should be created When you create a new project Scrivener asks where you want to save the file by default this location is your personal Documents folder 26 6 1 PROJECT FORMAT 27 A standard empty project with no presets Options Open Recent 7 Figure 6 1 Template Wizard but you can choose to organise your projects on the computer however you like It is a good idea to choose a place you will remember Even though Scrivener provides convenience functions for finding the projects you ve worked on most recently and will even reopen your last session for you if you choose these tools should not be relied upon as your sole reference point for of where projects exist Let s create a new project rig
412. will arrive in Scrivener in one large chunk Where you choose to break this long document apart is up to you and the split tools make it easy to do so To split in a document into two pieces you will first need to place the caret at the precise point in the document where you wish to split it in two If you select a range of text the start of the selection will be considered the caret point for purposes of splitting Once the selected location has been chosen you can use one of two methods to split the document Documents gt Split gt at Selection 38 K This will create a new document directly be low the current document in the outline The new document will contain ev erything that follows the caret position and this material will be removed from the original document It can be useful to think of splitting in terms of above and below the selection Everything above the caret and also to the left if in the middle of a line will remain in the original document while everything to the right and below of the caret will be moved to the new document After splitting you will be given the option to name the new document in the Binder Documents Split gt with Selection as Title C38 K This alternative method will only appear when a range of text has been selected in the editor This method works identically as at Selection does only the selected text will automatically become the title of the new document This text will
413. xpand All and Collapse All will disclose or reveal the entire outline at once Expand All can be accomplished with 3 9 Collapse All with 3 0 Both of these commands work in many areas of the interface where it is possible to disclose items Hoisting Focus on one area of the binder by selection a container and choosing Doc uments gt Hoist Binder Documents gt Unhoist Binder will return the binder to its full display Drag and Drop Items can be moved around in the binder with drag and drop Sim ple pick up the item by clicking and holding on it then drag it to where you wish to move it The binder will display a target preview showing where the drop will result Holding down the Option key while dragging will inhibit the Drop on fea ture making it easier to move siblings amongst one another Moving items with the keyboard 38 ArrowKeys can be used to move an item around in the binder Up and down will increase or decrease its placement in the outline while left and right will promote and demote the item Keyboard navigation The arrow keys move around in the binder Up and down arrows will move up and down the outline Left and right will ascend and descend the hierarchy X UpArrow and X DownArrow will jump from one visible container to the next If a container is hidden from view it will not be selected When Treat all documents with subdocuments as folders is enabled in the Navigation prefer ences file groups wi
414. xport DOC files as RTF based documents End of Text If you require the end of the document to be marked with a sequence of characters you can use the Mark end of text with field to specify that sequence Simply enable the checkbox and type in the character sequence you wish This option is not available to the FDX FCF and ePub formats 25 3 6 HTML Options HTML Options control a few specific features in relation to the Web Page but not webarchive files and ePub formats Convert Scrivener links to HTML links When enabled Scrivener will insert the necessary HTML framework to allow for links to cross reference to internal parts of the Scrivener outline If the linked element is outside of the scope of the current compile group the link will be removed from the compiled document rather than produce a broken link Footnotes will always use internal links to cross reference from the marker to the footnote text 200 CHAPTER 25 COMPILING THE DRAFT Underline internal links By default Scrivener links are styled so that they are not underlined in the web page If you wish underlining to be retained use this option to disable the stylesheet Use centered table to restrict body text width The entire document will be en closed in a div which will keep the width of the document within a certain limit and centred in the browser The precise width can be specified in the provided text field using pixels This option is not available t
415. y of the rows and its text will appear in the text preview area below the table The Compare button lets you analyse the differences between versions of your text There are two ways of using this 1 Compare with current Simply select the snapshot you wish to compare against the current text and then click the Compare button The changes will be high lighted in the text preview area 2 Compare two snapshots Select two snapshots in the table and then click the Compare button The differences between those two versions will be high lighted While in comparison mode the text preview area will switch to plain text so that only actual changes to the content can be analysed To return to standard viewing mode click the Original button The two arrow buttons which will appear in com parison mode let you jump from change to change You can use 3 and 3 to navigate between changes as well In some cases the level of editing will be as such that the comparison mode pro duces confusing results The method of analysis can be fine tuned by clicking the down arrow beside the comparison button at any time In many cases removing word level analysis will produce a cleaner result when extensive edits have been made These options work in a descending fashion meaning that the lowest selected option overrides the options above it 1 By Paragraph any changes made within a paragraph will trigger the entire para graph as having been mo
416. y views menus and export methods When exporting as files filenames will be set according to the title field when compiling titles can be used to generate headers for that section index cards use the title the outliner is composed of a list of titles The synopsis is a plain text field primarily intended to be a short summation of the contents of the document though how you choose to use it is entirely up to you The synopsis is displayed in a variety of ways 1 Corkboard used to display the content area of the card 2 Outliner will be placed beneath the title which appears in bold by default 3 Binder revealed in the tooltip when hovering the mouse over the correspond ing title Instead of the text synopsis you can elect to use an image to represent a document on the corkboard This image will be used on the corkboard and in the inspector but whatever text exists in the standard synopsis field will be used in the outliner and binder as described above and in the various export and print options that include a synopsis field The image is not a replacement for the synopsis but an override for the corkboard 68 10 1 META DATA TYPES 69 In all cases specific types of meta data can be displayed as columns in the Outliner view including custom meta data 10 1 1 Setting Up Label amp Status The next two forms of meta data are flexible in what you can refer to them as Using the Project Meta Data Settings
417. you enter new keywords into the Inspector subsection 17 4 3 they will be added automatically to the central project list You can access this pane via Window Show Keywords HUD or 7 s H You can create a new keyword by clicking on one of the buttons at the bottom of the HUD The left most button creates a new keyword as the sibling of the selected keyword and the one next to it creates a new keyword as a child of the selection The third button deletes the selected keyword s Note that the keywords are auto matically sorted alphabetically You can drag any keyword onto any other keyword to make the dragged keyword a child of the one onto which it was dropped Note that for the most part the hierarchical structure of keywords are really only an or ganisational convenience and has no effect on how the keywords are represented in documents themselves There is one exception to this below To assign keywords in the HUD panel to a document in the main window se lect and drag the desired keywords from the HUD and drop them onto either the keywords table in the inspector of the main window the header view above the doc ument editor or onto the document in the binder corkboard or outliner If there is a multiple selection in the binder corkboard or outliner and the keywords are dropped onto one of the selected documents the keywords will be applied to all selected doc uments Hold the Option key down whilst dragging to drag not only the keyw
418. your Mac as well allowing you to concentrate fully on the production of text It only works for documents and folders and while it allows access to the menus QuickReference panels and most aspects of the inspector its default state is to simply display the text contents of the selected document or documents if you are viewing an combined text in a page in the middle of your screen Read more about full screen mode chapter 15 Chapter 6 Quick Tour Before going over this section it is suggested that you skim through the prior chapter introducing the interface This chapter will get you up and running with a simple sample project and in troduce a few of the most basic concepts you ll need in order to start working with Scrivener It is recommended that you eventually go through the full interactive tu torial in the Help menu but if you are in a hurry this guide should get you going in thirty minutes or less Scrivener is a complex program with a lot of depth but we hope this section will demonstrate that despite this it is also a very straightforward and intuitive so its complexity can be gradually learned as required We will go over the following tasks z Creation of a new project from a blank template a Navigating the binder and adding new documents to the draft outline z Introduction to corkboard and Scrivenings text view Compiling the document into an RTF file If you need to learn more than the above

Scrivener 2.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents